MC400 Technical

Manual

File name: EAAM060801EN.docx

Rev. 01 Date: 28/03/2019
ID Document: EAAM0608EN
Product: MC400
 Revision Date Pages Notes

00 14/05/2018 201 First version of the manual for the version 01.00 of
the controller.
01 28/03/2019 201 Updated paragraphs 5.5.3 and 8.8 (016)

ii MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 1 Introduction................................................................................................................. 15
1.1 References ......................................................................................................... 15
1.2 Introduction and prerequisites ............................................................................ 15
1.3 Notes on the parameters configuration of the device ......................................... 15
1.4 Definitions ........................................................................................................... 16
1.4.1 Acronyms ..................................................................................................... 16
1.5 Conventions........................................................................................................ 17
1.6 Revisions of the software.................................................................................... 17
2 Views of the device .................................................................................................... 18
3 Technical features ...................................................................................................... 19
3.1 Measurement resolution ..................................................................................... 23
4 Installation .................................................................................................................. 24
4.1 Mounting ............................................................................................................. 24
4.2 Wiring ................................................................................................................. 24
5 IN/OUT connections and configuration .................................................................... 26
5.1 Basic diagram ..................................................................................................... 27
5.2 Functional earth (JC) .......................................................................................... 27
5.3 Device supply (JD).............................................................................................. 28
5.4 Digital inputs 1-8 (JN) ......................................................................................... 28
5.4.1 JN - Digital inputs 1-8 ................................................................................... 29
5.4.2 Virtual digital inputs ...................................................................................... 29
5.4.3 Digital inputs configuration ........................................................................... 30
5.5 Digital outputs 1-8 (JE, JI, JL)............................................................................. 34
5.5.1 JL - Digital outputs 5-6 ................................................................................. 34
5.5.2 JI - Digital outputs 7-8: outputs for the command on the loads switching ..... 35
5.5.3 JE - Digital outputs 1-4 ................................................................................. 36
5.5.4 Digital outputs configuration ......................................................................... 36
5.5.5 AND/OR logics ............................................................................................. 39
5.6 Analogue inputs 1-3 (JM).................................................................................... 43
5.6.1 JM - Analogue inputs 1-3.............................................................................. 44
5.6.2 Configuration of digital inputs (AI_CONTROLLER) ...................................... 44
5.6.3 Virtual digital inputs (AI_VIRTUAL) .............................................................. 46
5.6.4 Conversion curves ........................................................................................ 47
5.7 Analogue outputs (JQ, JR) ................................................................................. 49
5.7.1 Configuration of the analogue outputs .......................................................... 49
5.8 Optional additional modules ............................................................................... 50
5.9 JG/JH – Mains/ generators bus voltage measure inputs .................................... 52
5.9.1 Star or Wye (three phases, four wires) ......................................................... 52
5.9.2 Delta (three phases, three wires) ................................................................. 54
5.9.3 Single phase (one phase, two wires) ............................................................ 56
5.9.4 Aron insertion of voltmetric transformers ...................................................... 57
5.10 JF Current measurement inputs. .................................................................. 58
5.10.1 JF - Currents measurement inputs 1-3.................................................... 58
5.10.2 JF – Auxiliary currents measurement (fourth current) ............................. 59
5.11 Communication ports ................................................................................... 60

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN iii

 5.11.1 JA - Serial port 1 RS232 ......................................................................... 61
5.11.2 JO - Serial port 2 RS485 ......................................................................... 62
5.11.3 JB - USB Serial port ................................................................................ 63
5.11.4 JS - Ethernet port 10 100Mbps ............................................................... 64
5.12 CAN bus Communication ports .................................................................... 66
5.12.1 JO - CAN bus port 0 ................................................................................ 66
5.12.2 JP - CAN bus port 1 ................................................................................ 67
6 Main functions ............................................................................................................ 68
6.1 Front panel ......................................................................................................... 68
6.2 Buttons ............................................................................................................... 69
6.3 Indicators (ref. to fig. 1 and 2) ............................................................................. 71
6.4 Multifunctional display......................................................................................... 73
6.4.1 LCD lighting .................................................................................................. 73
6.4.2 Contrast adjustment ..................................................................................... 73
6.4.3 Mode navigation ........................................................................................... 73
6.4.4 Display area layout (ref. to fig. 4) .................................................................. 74
6.4.5 Top status bar (ref. to fig. 5) ......................................................................... 74
6.5 Display mode ...................................................................................................... 75
6.5.1 Programming (P.XX) .................................................................................... 75
6.5.2 Status information (S.XX) ............................................................................. 82
6.5.3 Electrical measurements (M.XX) .................................................................. 87
6.5.4 Measurement from CAN bus PMCB (B.XX) ................................................. 92
6.5.5 History logs (H.xx) ........................................................................................ 95
6.6 Language selection........................................................................................... 102
7 Operation sequence ................................................................................................. 103
7.1 Operation mode ................................................................................................ 104
7.1.1 Events and signalling ................................................................................. 107
7.2 Generators bus voltage detection ..................................................................... 109
7.2.1 External sensor .......................................................................................... 109
7.2.2 Internal sensor............................................................................................ 109
7.2.3 Events and signalling ................................................................................. 109
7.3 Load bus voltage detection ............................................................................... 110
7.3.1 Signalling .................................................................................................... 110
7.4 Mains ................................................................................................................ 111
7.4.1 Automatic Mains Failure ............................................................................. 111
7.4.2 “Loss of mains” protection .......................................................................... 114
7.5 Synchronization ................................................................................................ 115
7.5.1 Synchro-check............................................................................................ 115
7.5.2 Voltages, frequency and phase regulations................................................ 117
7.5.3 Digital inputs for synchronization ................................................................ 121
7.5.4 Digital outputs for synchronization .............................................................. 121
7.5.5 Automatic synchronization.......................................................................... 122
7.5.6 Manual synchronisation .............................................................................. 122
7.5.7 MCB synchronization failure ....................................................................... 123
7.6 Inhibition to genset automatic intervention ........................................................ 124
7.6.1 Inhibition from contact ................................................................................ 124
7.6.2 Inhibition from clock .................................................................................... 124
7.6.3 Inhibition to load management ................................................................... 125
7.6.4 Inhibition due to mains failure ..................................................................... 125

iv MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 7.6.5 Inhibition due to “GCB circuit breaker not open” ......................................... 125
7.6.6 Signalling .................................................................................................... 125
7.7 Inhibition to supply the loads ............................................................................ 125
7.7.1 Inhibition from contact ................................................................................ 126
7.7.2 Modbus commands .................................................................................... 126
7.7.3 Due to mains failure ................................................................................... 126
7.7.4 Inhibition due to “GCB circuit breaker not open” ......................................... 126
7.7.5 Inhibition for “synchronization on MCB in progress” ................................... 126
7.7.6 Inhibition for MCB synchronization failure .................................................. 127
7.7.7 Inhibition for “no supplying generators” ...................................................... 127
7.7.8 Inhibition for “TEST without load” ............................................................... 127
7.7.9 Signalling .................................................................................................... 127
7.8 Power measurements ....................................................................................... 128
7.8.1 Power measurements on the generators.................................................... 128
7.8.2 Power measurements on the mains ........................................................... 128
7.8.3 Power measurements on MGCB ................................................................ 128
7.8.4 Power measurements on the loads ............................................................ 129
7.8.5 Calculated powers ...................................................................................... 129
7.9 Circuit breakers management ........................................................................... 130
7.9.1 Digital outputs............................................................................................. 130
7.9.2 Digital inputs ............................................................................................... 133
7.9.3 Management logic ...................................................................................... 135
7.9.4 Events and signalling ................................................................................. 143
7.10 Gensets supplying ...................................................................................... 144
7.11 Active power management ......................................................................... 144
7.11.1 BASE LOAD.......................................................................................... 144
7.11.2 IMPORT/EXPORT ................................................................................ 145
7.11.3 Transfer to generators........................................................................... 146
7.11.4 Load and unload ramps ........................................................................ 147
7.12 Reactive power management ..................................................................... 148
7.13 Commands for gensets .............................................................................. 150
7.14 Plant types.................................................................................................. 152
7.14.1 MPM (Multiple Prime Mover) ................................................................. 153
7.14.2 MSB (Multiple Stand By) ....................................................................... 155
7.14.3 MSB+MSTP (Multiple Stand By + Multiple Short Time Parallel) ........... 158
7.14.4 MPTM (Multiple Parallel to Mains) ........................................................ 162
7.14.5 MPTM+MSB (Multiple Parallel to Mains + Multiple Stand By) ............... 164
7.15 Load function .............................................................................................. 165
7.15.1 Starting/stopping generators to meet power requests ........................... 165
7.15.2 Selecting generators ............................................................................. 167
7.16 Load shedding ............................................................................................ 169
7.16.1 All loads management........................................................................... 169
7.16.2 Single load management ...................................................................... 170
7.16.3 Manual commands ................................................................................ 170
7.16.4 Notes about “load shedding” ................................................................. 171
7.16.5 Events ................................................................................................... 171
7.17 “Peak shaving/lopping” ............................................................................... 172
7.17.1 Power management .............................................................................. 172
7.17.2 Events ................................................................................................... 172
8 Anomalies ................................................................................................................. 173

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN v

 8.1 Silence the horn ................................................................................................ 174
8.2 Acknowledge the anomaly ................................................................................ 174
8.3 Cancel the anomaly .......................................................................................... 175
8.4 Events and signalling ........................................................................................ 175
8.5 OVERRIDE of protections ................................................................................ 176
8.6 Anomalies connected to digital inputs............................................................... 177
8.7 Anomalies connected to analogue inputs ......................................................... 177
8.8 Faults list .......................................................................................................... 178
005 - At least one GCB is not opened ........................................................................ 178
007 – Manual STOP pressed in automatic mode ....................................................... 178
008 - Power required for supply not reached .............................................................. 179
013 - MCB not closed ................................................................................................. 179
014 - MGCB not closed .............................................................................................. 179
016 – Maximum current (#1) ...................................................................................... 179
017 – Maximum current (#2) ...................................................................................... 181
021 – Time-out for stopping generators...................................................................... 182
022 – Time-out for starting generators ....................................................................... 182
023 – MCB opening failure ......................................................................................... 182
024 – MGCB opening failure ...................................................................................... 182
037 – Low power supply voltage ................................................................................ 183
038 – High power supply voltage................................................................................ 183
045 – Maximum auxiliary current ................................................................................ 183
048 – Emergency stop................................................................................................ 183
057 – Clock not valid .................................................................................................. 184
062 – Faulty CAN bus 0 link ....................................................................................... 184
200 – CAN bus PMCB faulty connection .................................................................... 184
201 – Duplicated address over the PMCB .................................................................. 184
202 – Wrong number of generators over the PMCB................................................... 184
207 – Maximum time in parallel to the grid. ................................................................ 185
252 – CAN bus (EXBUS) expansion modules missing ............................................... 185
253 – CAN bus (EXBUS) missing measure ................................................................ 185
254 – CAN bus (EXBUS) duplicate address ............................................................... 186
255 – Disconnected CAN bus sensor (EXBUS) ......................................................... 186
271 – MGCB synchronization failure .......................................................................... 186
272 – MCB synchronization failure ............................................................................. 186
273 – Incoherent parameters ..................................................................................... 186
274 – Production line open ......................................................................................... 187
275 – Interface device not opened ............................................................................. 187
279 – Inconsistent bar voltage .................................................................................... 187
281 – Maximum power exported to the mains. ........................................................... 188
301...432 - Generic anomalies linked to analogue inputs ........................................... 188
701...774 - Generic anomalies linked to digital inputs ................................................ 188
9 Other functions ......................................................................................................... 189
9.1 Loads protection from mains breaker damages ................................................ 189
9.2 Clock................................................................................................................. 189
9.2.1 Clock automatic update .............................................................................. 189
9.2.2 Weekly planning for TEST. ......................................................................... 190
9.2.3 Weekly planning for working days. ............................................................. 190
9.2.4 Weekly planning of intervention forcing. ..................................................... 191
9.2.5 Configurable calendars............................................................................... 192

vi MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 9.2.6 Configurable timers .................................................................................... 196
9.3 Counters ........................................................................................................... 198
9.3.1 Counters reset ............................................................................................ 199
9.4 Alternative parameters configurations. ............................................................. 199
9.5 Non-volatile memory ......................................................................................... 200

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN vii

 INDEX

AOF.3121 50
A
AOF.3201 50
AIF.0000 44; 45; 46 AOF.3211 50
AIF.0100 43; 45 AOF.3221 50
AIF.2001 45; 48; 91
D
AIF.2003 45; 46; 48; 91
AIF.2005 45; 46; 48; 91 DIF.0000 29; 30; 31
AIF.2051 45; 46 DIF.1001 31; 134; 139
AIF.2101 46; 123 DIF.1002 31; 134; 139
AIF.2103 46; 118 DIF.1003 31; 134
AIF.2105 46; 118 DIF.1004 31; 121; 134; 137; 187
AIF.2107 46; 118 DIF.1005 31; 38; 133; 135; 141; 142
AIF.2201 46; 122; 123 DIF.1006 31; 38; 133; 135; 141
AIF.2303 46; 128 DIF.1031 31; 134; 138
AIF.2307 46; 144; 145; 172 DIF.1032 31; 134; 138
AIF.2309 46; 145; 146; 172 DIF.1033 31; 134
AIF.2405 46; 148; 149 DIF.1034 31; 121; 134; 136; 187
AIF.4001 46; 47 DIF.1035 31; 38; 133; 135; 140; 141
AIF.4006 46 DIF.1036 31; 38; 133; 135; 140
AIF.4007 46 DIF.2001 31; 175
AIF.4008 46 DIF.2002 31; 174
AIF.4009 46 DIF.2029 32; 105
AIF.4017 46 DIF.2030 32; 106
AIF.4018 46 DIF.2031 32; 105
AIF.4019 46 DIF.2032 32; 106
AIF.4020 46 DIF.2063 32; 176
AIF.4023 46 DIF.2093 32; 145
AIF.4024 46 DIF.2096 32; 146
AIF.4025 46 DIF.2151 32; 200
AIF.4026 46 DIF.2152 32; 200
AIF.4031 46 DIF.2153 32; 200
AIF.4032 46 DIF.2154 32; 200
AIF.4033 46 DIF.2181 32; 142
AIF.4034 46 DIF.2251 32; 170; 171
AIF.4041 46 DIF.2252 32; 170; 171
AIF.4047 46 DIF.2271 32; 105
AIF.4058 46 DIF.2272 32; 105
AIF.4059 46 DIF.2273 32; 105
AIF.4063 46 DIF.2501 32; 124
AIF.4065 47 DIF.2502 32; 126
AIF.4069 47 DIF.2701 32; 106; 107
AIF.4071 47 DIF.2702 29; 33; 165
AIF.4099 47 DIF.2704 33; 60; 183
AIF.4101 47 DIF.2705 33; 45
AIF.4105 47 DIF.2706 33; 105; 106; 107; 126; 138; 139; 174; 175
AOF.0000 50 DIF.2708 33
AOF.0102 50 DIF.2712 33
AOF.1000 49; 50; 150 DIF.2713 33
AOF.1001 50; 150 DIF.2721 33; 169
AOF.1002 49; 50; 151 DIF.2722 33; 172
AOF.1003 50; 151 DIF.3002 29; 33; 133; 179; 182; 187
AOF.3101 48; 50 DIF.3003 29; 33; 133; 179; 182; 187
AOF.3111 50 DIF.3004 33; 144

viii MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 DIF.3101 33; 112 DOF.3092 38; 121; 133
DIF.3102 33; 109 DOF.3093 38; 121; 133
DIF.3103 33 DOF.3094 39; 117; 121; 133
DIF.3104 33; 110 DOF.3096 39
DIF.3201 33; 84 DOF.3151 39; 175
DIF.3202 33; 84 DOF.3152 39; 173; 175
DIF.3203 33; 84 DOF.3153 39
DIF.3204 33; 84 DOF.3154 39; 175
DIF.3205 33; 84 DOF.4001 39; 175
DIF.3206 33; 84 DOF.4002 39; 175
DIF.4001 30; 33; 177 DOF.4004 39; 175
DIF.4002 33; 177 DOF.4005 39; 175
DIF.4004 33; 177 DOF.4035 39; 175
DIF.4005 34; 177
E
DIF.4008 34; 177
DIF.4021 34; 177; 189 EVT.1001 96; 107
DIF.4022 34; 177; 189 EVT.1002 96; 107
DIF.4024 34; 177; 189 EVT.1003 96; 107
DIF.4062 34; 176; 177 EVT.1004 96; 107
DIF.4064 34; 176; 177 EVT.1005 96; 107
DIF.4261 34; 177; 187 EVT.1010 96; 114
DOF.0000 34; 36; 38 EVT.1011 96; 114
DOF.0102 38 EVT.1012 96; 114
DOF.0103 38; 39; 121 EVT.1013 96; 124
DOF.1005 38; 150 EVT.1014 96; 124
DOF.2001 38; 130; 131 EVT.1020 96; 109
DOF.2002 38; 131 EVT.1021 96
DOF.2003 38; 131 EVT.1022 96; 109
DOF.2004 35; 38; 131 EVT.1030 96; 143
DOF.2031 38; 131 EVT.1031 96; 143
DOF.2032 38; 131 EVT.1032 96; 143
DOF.2033 38; 131 EVT.1033 96; 143
DOF.2034 35; 38; 131 EVT.1035 96; 143
DOF.2251 38; 169 EVT.1036 96; 143
DOF.2252 38; 169 EVT.1037 96; 143
DOF.2253 38; 169 EVT.1038 96; 143
DOF.2254 38; 169 EVT.1050 96
DOF.3001 38; 107 EVT.1051 96
DOF.3002 38; 107 EVT.1052 96
DOF.3003 38; 107 EVT.1053 96
DOF.3004 38; 107 EVT.1054 96
DOF.3005 38; 107 EVT.1055 96
DOF.3011 38; 107 EVT.1056 96
DOF.3012 38; 107 EVT.1057 96
DOF.3030 38; 110 EVT.1058 96
DOF.3031 38; 110 EVT.1059 96
DOF.3033 38; 114 EVT.1060 96
DOF.3034 38 EVT.1061 96
DOF.3035 38 EVT.1062 96
DOF.3036 38 EVT.1074 96
DOF.3037 38 EVT.1075 96
DOF.3062 38; 150 EVT.1076 96; 189
DOF.3081 31; 38; 133; 141 EVT.1077 96
DOF.3082 31; 38; 133; 140 EVT.1078 96
DOF.3083 31; 38; 133; 141 EVT.1080 96; 126
DOF.3084 31; 38; 133; 141 EVT.1081 96; 126
DOF.3091 38; 121; 133 EVT.1082 96; 176

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN ix

 EVT.1083 96; 176 P.0004 105; 106; 107; 126; 138; 139; 174; 175
EVT.1086 97 P.0101 53; 55; 56; 57; 109; 199
EVT.1087 97 P.0102 53; 54; 55; 56; 57; 109; 115; 199
EVT.1091 97 P.0103 52; 109; 199
EVT.1092 97 P.0104 52; 199
EVT.1093 97 P.0105 111; 112; 116; 199
EVT.1094 97 P.0107 59; 199
EVT.1095 97 P.0108 59; 60; 183; 200
EVT.1096 97 P.0109 59; 199
EVT.1098 97 P.0116 53; 54; 55; 56; 57; 79; 111; 112; 113; 115; 199
EVT.1099 97 P.0117 52; 111; 199
EVT.1100 97 P.0118 52; 111; 199
EVT.1101 97 P.0119 53; 55; 56; 57; 111; 112; 199
EVT.1102 97 P.0124 59; 128; 129; 199
EVT.1103 97 P.0128 52; 53; 54; 55; 56; 57; 109; 199
EVT.1104 97 P.0129 52; 53; 54; 55; 56; 57; 111; 199
EVT.1105 97 P.0130 60; 128; 129; 199
EVT.1151 97 P.0131 60; 88; 183; 200
EVT.1152 97 P.0132 60; 128
EVT.1153 97 P.0135 59; 60; 183; 200
EVT.1154 97 P.0139 59; 199
EVT.1155 97 P.0141 50; 184; 185; 186
EVT.1156 97 P.0142 50; 184; 185; 186
EVT.1160 97 P.0143 50; 184; 185; 186
EVT.1161 97 P.0144 50; 184; 185; 186
EVT.1162 97 P.0151 52
EVT.1163 97 P.0152 52; 111
EVT.1164 97 P.0201 112
EVT.1165 97 P.0203 112
EVT.1201 97; 126 P.0204 112
EVT.1202 97; 126 P.0207 124
EVT.1203 97; 126 P.0208 124
EVT.1204 97; 127 P.0219 132; 156; 159
EVT.1221 97; 124 P.0220 132
EVT.1222 97; 124 P.0222 32; 104; 105; 106
EVT.1223 97; 125 P.0236 75; 79; 112
EVT.1224 97; 125 P.0237 112
EVT.1225 97; 125 P.0238 113
EVT.1226 97; 125 P.0239 113
EVT.1291 97; 168 P.0244 113
EVT.1301 171 P.0246 130
EVT.1302 171 P.0247 131
EVT.1303 171 P.0248 135; 157; 162
EVT.1304 171 P.0301 115
EVT.1305 171 P.0303 115
EVT.1306 171 P.0305 116
EVT.1307 171 P.0307 116
EVT.1308 171 P.0328 109
EVT.1321 97; 98 P.0361 183
EVT.1331 98; 172 P.0362 183
EVT.1332 98; 172 P.0363 183
P.0364 183
P
P.0365 183
P.0000 76; 77 P.0367 60; 183
P.0001 76; 77 P.0368 60; 183
P.0002 76; 77 P.0384 188
P.0003 76; 77 P.0385 188

x MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 P.0386 188 P.0827 166
P.0408 190 P.0828 165; 166
P.0409 190; 192 P.0829 166
P.0410 190 P.0830 166
P.0418 106; 184; 190 P.0831 150
P.0419 106; 190 P.0840 90; 122; 123
P.0420 32; 105; 106; 190 P.0841 116
P.0421 124; 184; 191 P.0842 117; 119
P.0422 124; 184; 191 P.0843 116
P.0423 124; 184; 191 P.0844 117
P.0426 107; 184; 191 P.0845 117
P.0427 107; 191 P.0846 115
P.0428 107; 192 P.0847 134; 135; 189
P.0441 95; 107; 109; 114; 124; 143; 168; 171; 172 P.0848 122
P.0442 99; 100 P.0849 119
P.0443 99; 100 P.0850 119
P.0451 62; 63 P.0852 122; 160; 161; 163; 186
P.0452 62 P.0853 122; 159; 161; 186
P.0453 62 P.0854 130; 134; 136; 137; 187
P.0454 62 P.0855 130; 134; 135; 136; 137; 187
P.0456 65 P.0856 49; 150
P.0469 77 P.0857 49; 150
P.0470 62 P.0858 90; 144; 145; 146; 172
P.0472 63 P.0859 90; 145; 146; 172
P.0473 63 P.0860 90; 148; 149
P.0474 63 P.0861 151
P.0475 63 P.0862 49; 151
P.0478 64 P.0863 49; 151
P.0479 64 P.0867 90; 122; 123
P.0491 174 P.0868 119; 123
P.0492 73 P.0869 119
P.0493 73 P.0878 147; 160; 163
P.0494 87 P.0879 146; 148; 160; 163
P.0495 70; 74; 139; 140; 179 P.0880 32; 144; 145; 146; 158; 159; 162; 164; 172
P.0500 64; 65 P.0890 147; 158; 185
P.0501 64; 65 P.0897 185
P.0502 64; 65 P.0899 125; 162; 163
P.0503 64; 65 P.0900 162; 164; 187
P.0504 64 P.0903 135
P.0505 64 P.0904 146
P.0508 65; 66 P.0922 33
P.0509 65; 66 P.0924 33
P.0510 65; 66 P.1171 172
P.0511 65; 66 P.1172 172
P.0513 65 P.1173 172
P.0514 65 P.1174 172
P.0802 135; 137; 152; 187 P.1175 172
P.0803 184 P.1181 170
P.0804 184 P.1182 170
P.0805 125; 126; 178 P.1183 170
P.0806 142; 153; 154; 156; 157; 158; 159; 161; 179 P.1184 170
P.0820 166; 167 P.1185 170
P.0822 167; 168 P.1186 170; 171
P.0823 167; 168 P.1900 192; 195
P.0824 167 P.1901 193
P.0825 168 P.1902 193; 194
P.0826 165; 166 P.1903 195

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN xi

 P.1904 195 P.9515 122; 123; 127
P.1957 195 P.9517 146; 147
P.1958 195 P.9521 179; 180; 181
P.1959 195 P.9522 179; 180; 181
P.1960 195 P.9523 179; 180
P.1961 195 P.9524 179; 180
P.1962 195 P.9525 181
P.1963 195 P.9526 181
P.1964 195 P.9527 181
P.2000 30 P.9528 181
P.2001 30; 140; 141; 142; 177; 179; 182; 187
S
P.2002 30; 134; 177
P.2003 30; 177 ST.000 40; 108
P.2100 30 ST.001 40; 108
P.2151 30 ST.002 40; 108
P.2152 30 ST.003 40; 108
P.2153 30 ST.004 40; 108
P.2200 30 ST.006 40; 176
P.2250 30 ST.007 40; 176
P.2901 196; 197 ST.008 40; 176
P.2902 196; 197 ST.009 40; 176
P.2903 196; 197 ST.011 40; 176
P.2904 196; 197 ST.012 40; 176
P.2905 196; 197 ST.013 40; 176
P.3000 37 ST.015 40; 176
P.3005 35 ST.016 40
P.3006 35 ST.017 30; 40
P.3200 37 ST.018 40
P.3250 37 ST.019 40
P.4001 43; 44; 118; 122; 123; 144; 145; 148; 185 ST.020 40
P.4002 44; 45; 91; 178 ST.048 40
P.4003 44; 178 ST.049 40
P.4004 45; 178 ST.051 40
P.4005 45; 176; 178 ST.052 40
P.4006 44; 178 ST.053 40
P.4007 45; 178 ST.054 40
P.4008 45; 178 ST.055 40
P.4051 47 ST.056 40
P.4052 47 ST.057 40
P.4053 47 ST.058 40
P.4054 47 ST.059 40
P.4055 47 ST.060 40
P.4056 47 ST.061 40
P.4057 47 ST.062 40
P.4058 47 ST.063 40
P.6001 49 ST.064 40
P.6002 49 ST.065 40; 143
P.9501 184 ST.066 29; 40; 143
P.9502 179; 181 ST.068 40; 143
P.9503 127; 134; 136; 142 ST.069 40; 143
P.9504 111 ST.070 40; 143
P.9505 112 ST.071 40; 143
P.9506 92; 103; 136; 144; 149; 165; 187 ST.072 40; 143
P.9511 154; 156; 157; 159; 160; 163; 182 ST.073 40; 143
P.9512 154; 155; 156; 157; 160; 162; 164; 182 ST.074 40; 143
P.9513 142; 163 ST.075 40; 143
P.9514 155; 158; 189 ST.080 40; 125

xii MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 ST.081 40; 125 ST.167 41
ST.083 40; 125 ST.192 41
ST.084 40; 125 ST.193 41
ST.088 40; 127 ST.194 41
ST.089 40; 127 ST.195 41
ST.090 40; 127 ST.196 41
ST.091 40; 127 ST.197 41
ST.092 40; 127 ST.198 41
ST.093 40; 127 ST.199 41
ST.094 40; 127 ST.200 41
ST.095 40 ST.201 41
ST.096 40 ST.202 41
ST.097 40; 121 ST.203 41
ST.098 40; 121 ST.204 41
ST.099 40; 121 ST.205 41
ST.100 40 ST.206 41
ST.101 40 ST.207 41
ST.102 40 ST.208 41
ST.104 40 ST.209 41
ST.108 40 ST.210 41
ST.109 40 ST.211 41
ST.112 40 ST.212 41
ST.113 40 ST.213 41
ST.114 40 ST.214 41
ST.127 40 ST.215 41
ST.128 41 ST.224 42
ST.129 41 ST.225 42
ST.130 41 ST.226 42
ST.136 41 ST.227 42
ST.137 41 ST.228 42
ST.138 41 ST.229 42
ST.139 41 ST.230 42
ST.140 41 ST.231 42
ST.141 41 ST.232 42
ST.144 41 ST.233 42
ST.145 41 ST.234 42
ST.146 41 ST.235 42
ST.147 41 ST.236 42
ST.148 41 ST.237 42
ST.149 41 ST.238 42
ST.150 41 ST.239 42
ST.151 41 ST.240 42
ST.152 41 ST.241 42
ST.153 41 ST.242 42
ST.154 41 ST.243 42
ST.155 41 ST.244 42
ST.156 41 ST.245 42
ST.157 41 ST.246 42
ST.158 41 ST.247 42
ST.159 41 ST.248 42
ST.160 41 ST.249 42
ST.161 41 ST.250 42
ST.162 41 ST.251 42
ST.163 41 ST.252 42
ST.164 41 ST.253 42
ST.165 41 ST.254 42
ST.166 41 ST.255 42

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN xiii

 ST.256 42 ST.290 42
ST.257 42 ST.291 42
ST.258 42 ST.304 42
ST.259 42 ST.305 42
ST.260 42 ST.306 42
ST.261 42 ST.307 42
ST.262 42 ST.308 42
ST.263 42 ST.309 42
ST.272 42 ST.310 42
ST.273 42 ST.311 42
ST.274 42 ST.312 42
ST.275 42 ST.313 42
ST.276 42 ST.314 42
ST.277 42 ST.315 42
ST.278 42 ST.316 42
ST.279 42 ST.317 43
ST.288 42 ST.998 43
ST.289 42 ST.999 43

xiv MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 1
1.1
[1] SICES EAAM0609xx MC400 Parameters Chart.

[2] SICES EAAM0458xx - BoardPRG3.xx Manual.

[3] SICES S.r.l EAAS0341xx Serial communication and SMS protocol.

[4] SICES EAAS0610xx MC400 Modbus Registers.

[5] CANopen – Cabling and Connector Pin Assignment – CiA Draft Recommendation DR-
303-1

[6] BOSCH CAN Specification – Version 2.0 – 1991, Robert Bosch Gmbh.

[7] SICES EAAP0457xx USB driver Installation Guide

[8] SICES EAAM0199xx - DST4602/GC500/GC400/GC600 Parallel functions manual.

1.2
For the appropriate use of this manual, it is required knowledge of the use and of the
installation of generator groups.

WARNING!!!

Every intervention must be carried out by skilled personnel. There are dangerous voltages on
the terminals of the device; before carrying out any operation on them, make sure to open the
MCB and MGCB circuit breakers or to open the related fuses.

Do not remove or change any connection while the gensets are running (or more generally,
while the plant is operating).

Do not disconnect for any reason the terminals of the current transformers (CT)

Wrong operations on the connections can cause the disconnection of the loads from the mains
or the gensets.

Please read this manual carefully before using the device.

The device uses many configurable parameters and it is therefore impossible to

describe all their possible combinations and effects.

In this document, there is not a detailed description of all the programming parameters: to this
purpose, see documents [1]. Consider that document as part of this manual.

SICES S.r.l provides the devices with a generic “default” configuration; is at the
installer’s care to adjust the operating parameters to the specific application.

SICES S.r.l carries out a great effort to improve and update its products; therefore, they are
subject to both hardware and software modifications without notice. Some of the features
described in this manual may therefore differ from those present in your device.

1.3
Although most of the parameters and features can be accessed and configured by directly
operating on the device, some features or configurations, due to their nature, can only
be set or changed through the PC program SICES Board Programmer3 (hereinafter called
“BoardPrg3”), which can be downloaded for free after registration on the SICES S.r.l website
www.sices.eu.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 15

 It simplifies a lot the configuration of the device and we strongly suggest its use. It also allows
you to save the current configuration of the device on a file and to reuse it on other identical
devices.

The program also allows the configuration, saving or loading of the characteristic curves of
non-standard analogue sensors with resistive or voltage output.

BoardPrg3 supports all SICES devices; the connection to the PC can be direct via serial
RS232 or USB, or by remote via modem, serial RS845 or Ethernet. For the use of the program,
refer to the document [2].

1.4
This document uses the words “ALARM” and “UNLOAD” to indicate a fault that makes the
genset operation impossible; the MGCB circuit breaker or the GCBs circuit breakers are
immediately opened (without any power unload). The genset controllers will turn off the
engines with standard procedure (with cooling cycle).

This document uses the word “WARNING” to indicate a fault that requires an operator action
but does not require the opening of MGCB (or GCBs) circuit breakers, and that does not
require the shutdown of the gensets.
1.4.1 Acronyms
AIF It identifies a function for the configuration of the analogue inputs (“Analogue
Input Function”). The number that follows the caption “AIF.” is the code to set in
the parameter that configures the function of the desired analogue input.

AOF It identifies a function for the configuration of the analogue outputs (“Analogue
Output Function”). The number that follows the wording “AOF.” is the code to
be set in the parameter that configures the function of the desired analogue
output.

DIF It identifies a function for the configuration of the digital inputs (“Digital Input
Function”). The number that follows the caption “DIF.” is the code to set in the
parameter that configures the function of the desired digital input.

DOF It identifies a function for the configuration of the digital outputs (“Digital Output
Function”). The number that follows the caption “DOF.” is the code to set in the
parameter that configures the function of the desired digital output.

DTC It indicates a diagnostic code received from the engine control unit (ECU) via
CAN bus (“Diagnostic Trouble Code”).

ECU It indicates the engine electronic control unit (“Engine Control Unit”).

EVT It identifies an event stored within the historical records. The number that follows
the caption “EVT.” is the numeric code of the event.

GCB This term identifies the circuit breaker that connects the genset to the load (or
to the parallel bars in case of plants with more gensets) (“Genset Circuit
Breaker”).

MCB This term identifies the circuit breaker that connects the mains to the load
(“Mains Circuit Breaker”).

MGCB It indicates the circuit breaker that connects the parallel bars of the gensets to
the load (“Master Genset Circuit Breaker”).

MPM See the description of the type of plant in [8].

MPtM See the description of the type of plant in [8].

MPtM + MSB See the description of the type of plant in [8].

MSB See the description of the type of plant in [8].

16 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 MSB + MSTP See the description of the type of plant in [8].

PMCB It identifies the communication bus (by SICES) that allows all devices exchange
information to manage the parallel functions described in the document [8]
(“Power Management Communication Bus”).

SPM See the description of the type of plant in [8].

SPtM See the description of the type of plant in [8].

SPtM + SSB See the description of the type of plant in [8].

SSB See the description of the type of plant in [8].

SSB + SSTP See the description of the types of plant in [8].

1.5
In this manual, a vertical bar on the right of the paragraphs signals the modifications, with
respect to the previous version. The modifications on the fields of a table are highlighted with
a grey background.

1.6
Several parts of this manual refer to the controller's software revisions. These revisions are
marked with the assigned SICES code (shown on the rear panel of the controller). The format
of the code is EB0250275XXYY, where “XX” is the main version and “YY” is the minor version.
Thus, the code EB02502750100 refers to the controller software release "1.00". The page
“S.03” of the TFT display also shows the software revision.

MC400 is a “dual processor” device and uses two different firmwares:

• EB0250275XXYY: for the main processor that deals with the operation management
and the user interface (System controller).
• EB0250252XXYY: for the minor processor that deals with the electrical measurements
and the related protections (Measure Engine).

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 17

 2
MC400 Front view

MC400 Rear view

18 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 3

INFORMATION! GND refers to the potential of the terminal JD-1

Supply power voltage +VBATT.

Operation. From 7 to 32Vdc with continuous operation.
The device identifies the plant operation at 12 or 24V to manage its alarms when
powered up and whenever OFF/RESET mode is selected.
Protection against polarity reversal with built-in self-resetting fuse.
Resolution of the measurement of the battery voltage to 12 bits.
Power consumption in stand- 400mA @ Vbatt =13,5 Vdc display lamp on
by.
310mA @ Vbatt =13,5 Vdc display lamp off
210mA @ Vbatt =27,0 Vdc display lamp on
190mA @ Vbatt =27,0 Vdc display lamp off

Maximum power consumption Max 800mA @ 7,0 Vdc

during operation (relays, horn,
430mA @ 27,0 Vdc
digital inputs activated; static
outputs not activated). 480mA @ 13,5 Vdc

Mains and generators/bus voltage inputs.

Measurement of the L-N and L-L phases voltages.
Measurements of the neutral voltages referred to the device supply negative.
Sampling frequency. 10Khz.
Measuring range Mains: from 35Vac to 345Vac (L-N)
Generartor Bus: from 20Vac to 345Vac (L-N)
Type of measurement. True RMS measurements (TRMS).
Input impedance. >330 kΩ L-L
>150 kΩ L-N
>370 kΩ L-GND
>310 kΩ N-GND
Maximum voltages applicable. MAX 300Vac in CAT.IV for measures L-N
MAX 520Vac in CAT.IV for measures L-L
MAX 600Vac in CAT.III for measures L-L
Overvoltage category IV

Maximum pollution degree 2

Max tension in Common-Mode Max 100 Vac

from GND
Connection modes. 3 phases 4 wires.
3 phases 3 wires.
Single-phase 2 wires.

Aron insertion with 2 voltage transformers.

Measurement resolution. 12 bit.

Measurement accuracy. <0,5% F.S.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 19

 Current measurement inputs.
3 inputs with internal shunt (20mΩ) and common external CTs ratio.
1 independent input with internal shunt (20mΩ) and specific ratio that can be
used to measure current / power for mains / loads / gensets or for any other
auxiliary source.
It is required the use of current transformers with a secondary current from 1A to
5A.
It is mandatory to connect the return poles of the current transformers to the
negative power supply of the device.
Rated current 1Aac or 5Aac (automatically selected by parameter).
Measurement range. Up to 5,3Aac.
Type of measurement. True RMS measurements (TRMS).
Auto-consumption. < 1VA (20mΩ internal current shunts)
Maximum currents allowed. 5Aac nominal values; possible sinusoidal transient voltage surges up to 15Aac
with progressive loss of the measurement accuracy depending on the amplitude
of the surge.
Measurement resolution. 12 bit.
Measurement accuracy. <0,2% F.S.
Frequency measurements.
50 or 60Hz nominal frequencies measured by L1 phase voltage, for both the
mains and the generators’ bars inputs.
Measurements of the frequencies are referred to the device supply negative.
Frequency minimum sensitivity 35Vac L1-N @ 50Hz
on mains voltage inputs.

Frequency minimum sensitivity 10Vac L1-N @ 5Hz

on the generators’ bars voltage
inputs. 20Vac L1-N @ 50Hz

Measurement resolution. 0,1Hz ± 50ppm, 35ppm/C typical.

Digital inputs 01-08.
8 opto-insulated digital inputs with same supply, internal supply terminal
connected to the device positive (JD-2 +Vbatt.)

They are active when the input is connected to the supply negative GND. When
they are open, the inputs terminals voltage is like Vbatt.
Activation/deactivation 2,5VDC.
threshold.
Typical current with closed 6,5mA @ +Vbatt= 13,5Vdc
contact. 12mA @ +Vbatt= 27,0Vdc
Input signal delay. Adjustable by the related parameter for each input.
Digital outputs 01-04.
Type of output. 4 independent static outputs to battery positive.
The positive supply terminal of the device (JD-2 +Vbatt) supplies the output
current.

All relay outputs are adjustable by parameter.

Rated supply. Maximum 500mAdc @ 32Vdc for each output

Output resistor (status ON). Max 350mΩ.

Leakage current (status OFF). Max 5uA@32Vdc.
Protections. Internal current limited to about 4A maximum on transients >150us.
Thermal protection, short circuit, overvoltage and inverted polarity.

20 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 Digital outputs 5 and 6.
Type of output. 2 relays with NO contacts and one positive common terminal.
The positive common terminal has also the function of input for the emergency
stop (the function can not be disabled).
The page S.15 of the display shows the measurement of the voltage on the
common input (EM-S).
All outputs are adjustable by parameter.
Rated supply. Max. 3A @ 30Vdc for each output.

Protections. Self-restoring fuse and integrated opening power-surge protection diodes.

Digital outputs 7 and 8.

Type of output. 2 relays with dry contacts for the contactors command.
All relay outputs are adjustable by parameter.
Rated supply. Max. 10A @250Vac.

Analogue inputs 01-03 and Vreference

Type of input. 3 adjustable analogue inputs configurable as digital inputs with GND activation
or analogue resistive inputs.
If used as analogue resistive inputs, there’s an input for the measurement and
compensation of the reference potential respect to the sensor common negative
(Vref).
Digital inputs Activation threshold: 3,5 Vdc minimun
Deactivation threshold: 4,0 Vdc maximun
Typical current with closed contact: max 25 mA
Analogue resistive inputs Measurement range from 0 to 2kΩ with < 1% error
Voltage compensation range of the refernce point: from -2,7 Vdc to +5,0 Vdc

Frequency. 10kHz.
Resolution. 12 bit.
Digital outputs 01-02.
Type of output. 2 galvanically insulated ±10Vdc voltage outputs.
Each output can be limited as a voltage range (min and max value) by
parameters.
Output regulation range. From -10Vdc to +10Vdc (adjustable by parameters from 0% to 100%)
Resolution. 16 bit.
Minimum load impedance. >10 kΩ.
Insulation rated voltage. Max operating 560Vdc.
3KVdc on transient < 60s.
Insulation resistor. >1000MΩ @ 500Vdc.
RS232 Communication interface.
Type of interface. 1 RS232 serial port standard TIA/EIA, not insulated on DB connector 9 poles
male CANON.
Electrical signals. TX. RX, DTR, DSR, RTS, GND.
Settings. Baud rate selectable by parameter: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600*, 19200,
38400, 57600, 115200 bps.
Parity: None*, Even, Odd.
Stop bit: 1*,2.
* Default Setting.
Type of transmission. Modbus RTU Slave*, Modem AT
* Default Setting.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 21

 RS485 Communication interface.
Type of interface. 1 RS485 serial port standard TIA/EIA, with galvanic insulation.
Terminal resistor already available. Connect together pins 1 and 2.
Electrical signals. DATA+ (A), DATA– (B).
Settings. Baud rate selectable by parameter: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600*, 19200,
38400, 57600, 115200 bps.
Parity: None*, Even, Odd.
Stop bit: 1*,2.
* Default Setting.
Type of transmission. Modbus RTU Slave*.
* Default Setting
Insulation voltage. Max operating 560Vdc.
1KVdc on transient < 60s.
USB 2.0 Communication interface.
Type of interface. 1 USB2.0 serial port not insulated, usable in Function mode.
Function Mode. Connection to PC by Sices Driver.
USB Connector Type B.
Type of transmission Modbus RTU Slave.
Maximum distance. 6m (20 feet).
CAN bus Communication interface.
Type of interface. 2 CAN bus ports with galvanic insulation.
Terminal resistor available by connecting pins 1-2 e pins 4-5 together.
CAN bus0. CAN bus connection with protocol Sices for the communication with I/O
expansion modules.
CAN bus1. CAN bus connection with protocol Sices PMCBus for the communication with
other controllers.
Rated impedance. 120Ω.
Insulation voltage. Max operating 560 Vdc.
1KVdc on transient < 60s.
Ethernet Communication interface.
Type of interface. 1 Ethernet interface 10/100Mbps full-duplex 10T/100Tx Auto.
HP Auto-Mdix support.
Compliant IEE802.3/802.3u (Fast Ethernet).
Compliant ISO802-3/IEEE802.3 (10BASE-T).

Insulation voltage. 1500 VRMS.

Display.
Type of display. Graphic transflective LCD.
Resolution. 128 x 64 pixel
Pixel size. 0,52 x 0,52 mm.
Visual area dimensions. 70 x 38 mm.
Environmental conditions.
Operating temperature. From -25°C to +60°C; humidity ≤ 95% without condensation
Stock temperature. From -30°C to +80°C.

22 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 Relative humidity IEC 60068-2-30
Db Damp Heat Cyclic 20/55°C @ 95% RH 48 Hours
IEC 60068-2-78
Cab Damp Heat steady state 40°C @ 95% RH 48 Hours
Box.
Material. PC+ABS (plastic materials are self-extinguishing to UL94)
Size. 244(W) x 178(H) x 40(D) mm.
Weight. 650g.
Protection degree. IP65 with gasket for the front panel.
IP20 for the panel interior.

3.1
Mains and generators’ bars
1Vrms accuracy <0.5% F.S.
voltages.
Currents. Min. 0.1A (it depends on the CT ratio), accuracy <0.2% F.S.
Mains and generators’ bars
0.1Hz ± 50ppm, 35ppm/C typical.
frequencies.
Powers Min. 0.1 kW/kVA/kvar (it depends on the CT ratio).
Power Factors. 0.01.
Energies. 1 kWh/kvarh.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 23

 4
4.1
The device requires permanently mounting on a panel. The rear panel of the device must be
accessible only by keys or tools and only by authorized personnel for maintenance operations.
It must be impossible to remove the controller without tools.

The mounting dimensions for the installation are 218x159mm. Four hooks with screws carry
out the mounting: once the device is positioned, insert the hooks in the holes on the sides and
tighten the screws. Pay attention not to tighten excessively the screws in order not to damage
the hook on the device.

4.2
Due to the high voltages connected to the measurement circuits of the controller, all
conductive parts of the electrical panel should be connected to the protective earthing
through permanent connections.

The installation of an overcurrent protection device is required for each phase of the mains
and generator’s bars voltage inputs. You can use 1A fuses.

The section of the protective earthing conductor should be at least equal to the section of
cables used to wire mains or generators voltages to the control panel. In addition, it must
comply with the limit value of the overcurrent protection used.

For CAT.IV applications, the maximum phase-to-neutral voltage allowed is 300Vac, while the
phase-to-phase voltage is 520Vac. The maximum voltage related to the protective earthing is
300 Vac.

24 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 For CAT.III applications, the maximum phase-to-neutral voltage allowed is 345Vac, while the
phase-to-phase voltage is 600Vac. The maximum voltage related to the protective earthing is
600 Vac.

The device can operate in CAT.IV or CAT.III only if the supply negative terminal of the device
and the neutral terminal of the mains and generator’s bars are connected to the protective
earthing.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 25

 5

N. NAME DESCRIPTION CONNECTOR

1 JB USB 2.0 Function Interface. USB – B.

2 JD+JC Power supply + functional 2 poles x 2,5mm2 Screw terminal +
earth. faston.
3 JE Digital outputs 1-4. 4 poles x 1,5mm2 Screw terminal.
4 JF Current inputs 1-3 and 7 poles x 2,5mm2 Screw terminal.
auxiliary current input.
5 JG Generators’ bars voltages. 4 poles x 2,5mm2 Screw terminal.
6 JH Mains voltages. 4 poles x 2,5mm2 Screw terminal.
7 JI Digital outputs 7-8. 6 poles x 2,5mm2 Screw terminal.
8 JL Digital outputs 5-6. 4 poles x 2,5mm2 Screw terminal.

9 JM Analogue inputs 1-3. 7 poles x 1,5mm2 Screw terminal.

10 JN Digital inputs 1-8 8 poles x 1,5mm2 Screw terminal.
11 JO CAN bus for I/O expansions. 3 poles x 2,5mm2 Screw terminal.
12 JO RS485 Communication 3 poles x 1,5mm2 Screw terminal.
interface.
13 JP PCMBUS Interface for parallel 3 poles x 2,5mm2 Screw terminal.
functions.
14 JQ Analogue output 1. 3 poles x 2,5mm2 Screw terminal.
15 JR Analogue output 2. 3 poles x 2,5mm2 Screw terminal.
16 JA Communication interface 9 Poles Male Canon.
RS232.
17 JT Ethernet Interface. RJ45.

26 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 5.1

5.2
The connection to the functional earth JC is mandatory to guarantee the proper operation of
the device and the compliance with the EU Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulation.

The connection is functional and not protective; therefore, the cross-section of the wire can be
smaller. Connect the other end of the wire to a metal screw of the electrical panel (which must
be grounded) next to the JC or to a grounding line, using the shortest cable possible.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 27

 5.3

The JD connector is the supply connector: connect a DC supply (usually the engine starter
batteries) to the 1-GND terminal (negative) and to the 2-+BATT terminal (positive).

The minus terminal 1-GND is the reference and the common return of the digital inputs, outputs
and current and voltage measurements. It must be connected to the protection earth. The
systems that require insulation between the battery negative and the protection earth can be
used but can generate operating problems and may require care, as the use of insulation
transformers for the voltage measurements of the mains and of the generators’ bars.

Although a built-in self-resetting fuse protects the device, we recommend using a fuse for the
protection of the positive line 2-+BATT. The power supplied by the JD static outputs flows
through the 2 +BATT positive input, so you must pay attention to the fuse dimension.

At power on, the controller automatically detects if the supply nominal voltage is 12 or 24V for
managing the related logics and alarms. In addition, the controller repeats the detection each
time you switch to the OFF/RESET mode.

NOTE: when installing, connect the supply voltage positive only after opening all fuses
available in the panel.

5.4
The controller is equipped with a series of 8 opto-insulated digital inputs (JN), which are fully
configurable.

Besides these 8 inputs, it is possible to use the analogue inputs JM as digital inputs, if not
used as measurement inputs (see par. 5.6).

It is possible to share the same command signal of an input with different devices (for example,
one signal for three MC400). If you use the inputs of the JL connectors (positive common), it
is necessary to separate them with diodes, as in the figure below. This avoids the wrong
activation of the input when one of the devices is switched off.

It’s also possible to increase the number of digital inputs by adding up to two optional DITEL
16 IN modules (connected by CAN bus) for a total of 32 digital inputs (see par.5.8).

28 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 There are also 16 “virtual” digital inputs, which do not exist on the controller or on the
expansion modules, but they are represented by the result of the logic combination of physical
or virtual inputs, outputs, alarms or logical statuses, by means of the proper programming by
BoardPrg3. The virtual inputs can be configured as functions and used as physical inputs; see
par.5.4.2.

The status of the digital inputs, virtual inputs and inputs available through DITEL modules is
displayed at pages S.11 and S.12 (0=output not active, 1=output active).
5.4.1 JN - Digital inputs 1-8

They are a group of eight opto-insulated digital inputs with common terminal internally
connected to the positive supply terminal of the device +Vbatt. It is possible to activate the
inputs by connecting them to the battery negative (GND). When it is left floating, the input
brings itself to +Vbatt. Avoid situations where intermediate or undefined voltage levels can
occur.

The inputs are wholly configurable (see par. 5.4.3).

By default, the functions of the JN input on the MC400 controller are the following:

Terminal Digital input Default function

JN-1 01 DIF.3003 - “Status of MGCB circuit breaker”.

JN-2 02 DIF.3002 - “Status of MCB circuit breaker”.
JN-3 03 DIF.0000 - “Not used”.
JN-4 04 DIF.2702 - “Enables the load function”.
JN-5 05 DIF.0000 - “Not used”.
JN-6 06 DIF.0000 - “Not used”.
JN-7 07 DIF.0000 - “Not used”.
JN-8 08 DIF.0000 - “Not used”.

5.4.2 Virtual digital inputs

Besides 8 physical digital inputs and 32 available with the DITEL modules, the controller
manages 16 virtual digital inputs. They are managed by the controller exactly as they were
physical inputs (without limitations), but the virtual inputs status is not acquired by the
hardware, but determined via software. In fact, each virtual digital input can be associated to
an AND/OR logic that determines the status (see par. 5.5.5).

The status of the virtual inputs is displayed at pages S.11 (0=output not active, 1=output
active).

Example of the use of an AND/OR logic. Let us suppose we would like to activate a warning if
the mains exceed the tolerance thresholds while the MGCB is closed. Let us use the virtual
digital input #1 (as example).

 Using the BoardPrg3 software we associate an AND/OR logic configured as AND to

the virtual digital input #1, with the following list of conditions:

▪ ST.066 (“MGCB status”)

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 29

 ▪ ST.017 (“Mains absent or out of tolerance”).

 Therefore, the virtual digital input will be active when the MGCB is closed and the
mains is out of tolerance.

 Let us set the DIF.4001 function (“Generic warning”) within the P.2151 parameter.

 Let us set the desired delay (for example 0.5 s) within the P.2152 parameter.

 Let us set the alarm message (for example “mains voltage warning”) within the P.2153
parameter.
5.4.3 Digital inputs configuration
All digital inputs are considered “active” only when the related terminal is connected to the
supply negative of the controller; they are considered “not active” when the related terminal is
left open.

The logic status of the input can be reversed with respect to the physical status by
ticking the “Reversed polarity” box in the input configuration page on BoardPrg3.

The box is only visible if the function selected is other than DIF.0000 – “Not used”.

It is also possible to reverse the logic status (always individually for each input), directly by the
controller, using the parameters:
Parameter Inputs
P.2000 01...16
P.2100 Analogue inputs used as digital ones
P.2200 DITEL #01
P.2250 DITEL #02

Said parameters have a bit for each output:

 A bit set to zero means that the related input is “active” when it is connected to the
negative supply of the controller.

 A bit set to one means that the related input is considered “active” when it is not
connected to anything (it will become “not active” if it is connected to the supply
negative terminal of the controller).

By default, all bits are set to zero.

Each input (both physical and virtual) has three parameters associated:

 One parameter that configures its function (P.2001 for input 1).

 A parameter that configures the delay time (P.2002 for the input 1).

 A parameter that configures a message to show on the display (P.2003 for the input
1).

See document [1] for the parameters list.

The management of the physical and virtual inputs is the same, except that the virtual inputs
cannot be inverted.

The status of the digital inputs, virtual inputs and inputs available through DITEL modules is
displayed at pages S.11 and S.12 (0=output not active, 1=output active).

The controller uses the parameters that configure the delay and the message for an input only
for certain features of that input. The following table highlights when they are used.

NOTE: in BoardPrg3, the boxes for the delay and the message are always displayed,
even if they are not used by the controller.

30 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 The input functions that start with 3xxx are related to the functioning status; those that start
with 4xxx activate alarms (alarms, unloads or warnings).

Input function
Name Delay Message Description
xx.
DIF.0000 Not used. Input not used.
DIF.1001 Request for MGCB closure. It only acts in MAN mode, used to control the manual closing
of the circuit breaker. If there is no input configured with the
function DIF.1002, this input works as toggle: it commands
the closure of the breaker when the same is open and
commands the opening when the same is closed. The
controller closes the circuit breaker when the input becomes
active.
DIF.1002 Request for MGCB opening. It only acts in MAN mode, used to control the manual opening
of the circuit breaker. The controller opens the circuit breaker
when the input becomes active.
DIF.1003 MGCB controlled externally. It indicates to the controller that an external logic temporarily
controls the circuit breaker: the controller will acknowledge it
without activating faults.
DIF.1004 Synchronization request MGCB. It is used when an external device controls the circuit breaker:
the external device activates this input if it wants the controller
to carry out the synchronization and supply the
“synchronized” contact (or if the controller needs to manage
the analogue input connected to an external synchronizer).
DIF.1005 MGCB closure allowed. Yes This function allows an external logic to prevent or to delay
the circuit breaker closure. If this input is configured, the
controller activates an output configured as “ready to close”
(DOF.3083) and waits for external acknowledge. If a delay is
configured for this input, after this time the controller goes on
with closure command even without acknowledgement.
DIF.1006 MGCB opening allowed. Yes This function is used only when the opening of the circuit
breaker will result in a blackout on the loads. Before opening
MGCB, the device activates an output configured as “ready to
open” (DOF.3084) and waits for external acknowledge. If a
delay is configured for this input, after this time the controller
goes on with opening command even without
acknowledgement.
DIF.1031 Request for MCB closure. It only acts in MAN mode, used to control the manual closing
of the circuit breaker. If there is no input configured with the
function DIF.1002, this input works as toggle: it commands
the closure of the breaker when the same is open and
commands the opening when the same is closed. The
controller closes the circuit breaker when the input becomes
active.
DIF.1032 Request for MCB opening. It only acts in MAN mode, used to control the manual opening
of the circuit breaker. The controller opens the circuit breaker
when the input becomes active.
DIF.1033 MCB controlled externally. It indicates to the controller that an external logic temporarily
controls the circuit breaker: the controller will acknowledge it
without activating faults.
DIF.1034 Synchronization request MCB. It is used when an external device controls the circuit breaker:
the external device activates this input if it wants the controller
to carry out the synchronization and supply the
“synchronized” contact (or if the controller needs to manage
the analogue input connected to an external synchronizer).
DIF.1035 MCB closure allowed. Yes This function allows an external logic to prevent or to delay
the circuit breaker closure. If this input is configured, the
controller activates an output configured as “ready to close”
(DOF.3081) and waits for external acknowledge. If a delay is
configured for this input, after this time the controller goes on
with closure command even without acknowledgement.
DIF.1036 MCB opening allowed. Yes This function is used only when the opening of the circuit
breaker will result in a blackout on the loads. Before opening
MGCB, the device activates an output configured as “ready to
open” (DOF.3082) and waits for external acknowledge. If a
delay is configured for this input, after this time the controller
goes on with opening command even without
acknowledgement.
DIF.2001 Command for resetting alarms. When the input becomes “active”, the controller carries out a
reset of all faults. That is equivalent to change the controller
mode to OFF/RESET and back again to the desired mode.
DIF.2002 Command for alarm acknowledgment. When the input becomes “active”, the controller silences the
horn and recognizes the faults as the ACK button was kept
pressed on the device display.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 31

 Input function
Name Delay Message Description
xx.
DIF.2029 TEST without load (pulse). When the input becomes “active” with the controller in AUTO,
the test of the generators is performed without load, not
depending from the value set in parameter “P.0222 – Enable
generator supply on test”. The test has a configured duration
with parameter P.0420: if set to zero, this test is never
performed. If there is a second activation of the input during
the test, the test is immediately stopped.
DIF.2030 TEST with load (pulse). When the input becomes “active” with the controller in AUTO,
the test of the generators is performed with load, not
depending from the value set in parameter “P.0222 – Enable
generator supply on test”. The test has a configured duration
with parameter P.0420: if set to zero, this test is never
performed. If there is a second activation of the input during
the test, the test is immediately stopped.
DIF.2031 Request for TEST mode. When the input is “active”, the mode of the controller switches
from AUTO to TEST (the input does nothing if the controller is
not in AUTO or if the automatic intervention of the genset is
required). When it becomes inactive, the status changes back
to AUTO. The test will be performed with or without load
based on how configured with parameter P.0222.
DIF.2032 Request for REMOTE START mode. Yes If the input is “active”, the controller operating mode changes
from AUTO to REMOTE START (the input does nothing if the
controller is in OFF/RESET or MAN mode). When it becomes
inactive, the status changes back to AUTO.
DIF.2063 Full override protections. When the input activates, all protections (except some, see
[1]) that cause alarms or unloads become warnings.
DIF.2093 Select the import-export mode. When the input is active, the controller switches to the
“import/export” mode during the parallel with the mains,
whatever is the mode configured in P.0880.
DIF.2096 Transfer to the generators. When the input is active, the controller transfers the load from
the mains to the gensets, then it opens the MCB circuit
breaker.
DIF.2151 Select configuration 1. When the input becomes “active”, the parameter of the
alternative configuration 1 are copied into the work
parameters
DIF.2152 Select configuration 2. When the input becomes “active”, the parameter of the
alternative configuration 2 are copied into the work
parameters
DIF.2153 Select configuration 3. When the input becomes “active”, the parameter of the
alternative configuration 3 are copied into the work
parameters
DIF.2154 Select configuration 4. When the input becomes “active”, the parameters of the
alternative configuration are copied into the work parameters
DIF.2181 Immediate supply. It is used in plants composed by many gensets: if the input is
active, the switch of the users between mains and gensets is
carried out after the closing of the first GCB circuit breaker.
DIF.2251 Manual disconnection of loads. Each time this input become active, the “load shedding”
function disconnects one load (if possible). See the “load
shedding” description for more details.
DIF.2252 Manual re-connection of loads. Each time this input becomes active, the “load shedding”
function reconnects one load (if possible). See the “load
shedding” description for more details.
DIF.2271 Remote OFF. When this input is active, the operating mode of the controller
is forced to OFF-RESET, and it is not possible to use the
pushbuttons on the front panel to change it. Note: when this
input deactivates, if no inputs are configured with the
functions DIF.2272 and DIF.2273, the operating mode is
forced to the one set before the input activation.
DIF.2272 Remote MAN When this input is active, the operating mode of the controller
is forced into MAN and you cannot use the buttons on the
panel to change it.
DIF.2273 Remote AUTO When this input is active, the operating mode of the controller
is forced into AUTO and you cannot use the buttons on the
panel to change it.
DIF.2501 Inhibition of start. When the input is “active”, the automatic start of the
generators is inhibited. The “REMOTE START” mode is not
influenced by this function
DIF.2502 Inhibition of supply. Automatically, when this input is “active”, the opening of the
MGCB circuit breaker is forced (or the opening of all GCBs if
MGCB does not exist or is externally managed), and the
closing of MCB too.
DIF.2701 Enables remote start request. If this input is not active, the controller does not accept to go
to the “REMOTE START” mode.

32 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 Input function
Name Delay Message Description
xx.
DIF.2702 Enables the load function. Used in the “load management”. See document [8].
DIF.2704 Disables protections on the 4° current. When this input is “active”, the auxiliary current protection
(normally used for differential protection) is disabled.
DIF.2705 Disables protections on analogue When this input “activates”, the thresholds set on the
measures. analogue measures with bit 13 ON, in the third or sixth
configuration parameter (see par. 5.6.2) don’t cause the
intervention of the relative protections.
DIF.2706 Enables serial port commands. If this input is not “active”, the commands sent by means of
Modbus registers HOLDING REGISTER 101 and 102 are not
accepted.
DIF.2708 Enables PPR thresholds ‘1’. If this input exists but it is not active, the protections for the
parallel with the mains configured with parameters P.0922 e
P.0924 are disabled. See document [8].
DIF.2712 Enables protection 27T (PPR). If this input exists and it is not active, the protection for the
parallel with the mains “27T” is disabled.
DIF.2713 Enables protection 27Q (PPR). If this input exists and it is not active, the protection for the
parallel with the mains “27U & Q” is disabled.
DIF.2721 Enable load shedding. If this input is configured but not active, the “load shedding”
function is disabled.
DIF.2722 Enable peak shaving/lopping. If this input is configured but not active, the “peak
shaving/lopping” function is disabled.
DIF.3002 Status of MCB circuit breaker. Yes It acquires the circuit breaker status which connects the
mains to the users. An input configured in this way is used to
activate a warning in the event of a discrepancy between the
controls to the circuit breaker given by the board and the
status of the same circuit breaker. Warning can be also
issued in this case or, even, depending on the configuration,
the generators can be started in case of MCB closure failure.
It is also used to detect the status of the circuit breaker when
it is commanded by external devices.
DIF.3003 Status of MGCB circuit breaker. It acquires the general circuit breaker status, which connects
the genset parallel bars to the users. It is used for the parallel
logics and to disable the “load management” if the loads are
not connected to the gensets.
DIF.3004 Status of GCB of other gen-sets. Use this input if the gensets must work in parallel with other
gensets controlled by “not Sices” controllers: indicates MC400
that at least another genset has its own GCB closed.
DIF.3101 External sensor for mains. When the input is “active”, the mains is considered “in
tolerance”
DIF.3102 No voltages on parallel bars. Used in parallel plants, where the controller cannot directly
measure the voltage on the parallel bars. The active input
indicates that there is no voltage on the bars.
DIF.3103 External protections for parallel to mains Connect the external device, which manages the protections
of parallel with the mains, to this input. The input must be
active when no protection has triggered.
DIF.3104 No voltages on loads. Used in parallel plants, where the controller cannot directly
measure the voltage on the loads. The active input indicates
that there is no voltage on the loads.
DIF.3201 General status (page 1). Yes When this input is “active”, the controller displays the text set
in the parameters associated to the input on page S.08.
DIF.3202 Important status (page 1). Yes When this input is “active”, the controller displays the text set
in the parameters associated to the input on page S.08, which
is immediately shown.
DIF.3203 General status (page 2). Yes When this input is “active”, the controller displays the text set
in the parameters associated to the input on page S.09.
DIF.3204 Important status (page 2). Yes When this input is “active”, the controller displays the text set
in the parameters associated to the input on page S.09, which
is immediately shown.
DIF.3205 General status (page 3). Yes When this input is “active”, the controller displays the text set
in the parameters associated to the input on page S.10.
DIF.3206 Important status (page 3). Yes When this input is “active”, the controller displays the text set
in the parameters associated to the input on page S.10, which
is immediately shown.
DIF.4001 Generic warning. Yes Yes When the input is active, a warning is issued: the message
shown is the one set in the parameters associated to the
input.
DIF.4002 Generic unload. Yes Yes When the input is active, an unload is issued: the message
shown is the one set by means the related “text” parameter.
DIF.4004 Generic alarm. Yes Yes When the input is active, an alarm is issued: the message
shown is the one set by means the related “text” parameter.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 33

 Input function
Name Delay Message Description
xx.
DIF.4005 Warning transmitted to gen-sets. Yes Yes When the input is active, a warning is issued: the message
shown is the one set in the parameters associated to the
input. All the connected genset controllers will activate the
warning “warning from master device”.
DIF.4008 Alarm transmitted to gen-sets. Yes Yes When the input is active, an alarm is issued: the message
shown is the one set by means the related “text” parameter.
All the connected genset controllers will activate the alarm
“alarm from master device”.
DIF.4021 Warning (forces MCB open). Yes Yes When the input is “active” a warning is issued: the message
shown is the one set in the parameters associated to the
input. The controller forces MCB opened.
DIF.4022 Unload (forces MCB open). Yes Yes If the input is active, an unload is issued: the message shown
is the one set in the parameters associated to the input. The
controller forces MCB opened.
DIF.4024 Alarm (forces MCB open). Yes Yes When the input is “active”, if the GCB command is active, a
warning is issued: the message shown is the one set in the
parameters associated to the input. The controller forces
MCB opened.
DIF.4062 Unload (subject to override). Yes Yes When the input is “active”, an unload is normally activated. If
the Override function of the protections is activated, a warning
activates. The message shown is the one set on the
parameters associated to the input.
DIF.4064 Alarm (subject to override). Yes Yes When the input is “active”, an alarm is normally activated. If
the Override function of the protections is activated, a warning
activates. The message shown is the one set by means of the
related parameters.
DIF.4261 Production line opened. Yes When the input is “active”, the controller realises to be no
more in parallel with the mains and stops the genset with an
alarm.

5.5
The controller has eighteen digital outputs: four relay outputs (JI and JL) and four positive
static outputs (JE). It is possible to add two DITEL modules 16 IN, each of which manages up
to two DITEL 8 OUT relay modules, for 32 additional outputs, in addition to the one on the
controller.
5.5.1 JL - Digital outputs 5-6
The outputs of the JL connector are free (not configured) as default, and can be freely
configured by means the parameter of the controller.

The status of these outputs is displayed at pages S.13 (0=output not active, 1=active output).

The default functions of the JL outputs are:

Terminal Digital output Type Default function
JL-1 5 Normally open contact, of the relay 5. DOF.0000 – “Not used”.
JL-2 - Terminal positive common input
JL-3 6 Normally open contact, of the relay 6. DOF.0000 – “Not used”.
JL-4 - -

In detail:
5.5.1.1 JL-2 COMMON PLUS Common positive
Positive input common for outputs 5 and 6, internally protected by self-reset fuse: it is therefore
suggested to protect it with a correct range external fuse. It must be connected to the positive
of the power supply by means of a contact of the emergency button: that is, this connection
must be interrupted by keeping the emergency button pressed. Several emergency buttons
may be used by series connecting them to each other. This function can not be disabled.

Without voltage on that input (that is, pressing the emergency button,), in operational
modes (MAN, AUTO, TEST, etc.) the device generates the alarm AL.048 “A048
Emergency Stop”. It is not possible to configure the controller to deactivate the alarm
for emergency stop.

34 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 The voltage at terminal JL-2 is measured for the management of the relative alarm and is
displayed on page S.15 at EM-S

Attention: do not use the terminal as common negative for the two relays outputs. Inside, in
effect, are damper diodes for the opening over voltages that would enter in conduction and
could be immediately damaged.
5.5.1.2 JL-1 Digital output 5
Positive relay output, with maximum capacity of 3A @30VDC. Integrated internal diode for
damping opening over voltages. This terminal shows the battery voltage present on connector
JL-2; although one is already present inside, with particularly inductive loads (remote control
switches, electromagnets, etc.) it is advisable to use a damper diode for opening over voltages.

Attention: for currents over the nominal one use an external restart relay.

The output can be freely configured by means of parameter P.3005, see paragraph 5.5.4 and
document [1] for the parameters list.
5.5.1.3 JL-3 Digital output 6
Positive relay output, with maximum capacity of 3A @30VDC. Integrated internal diode for
damping opening over voltages. This terminal shows the battery voltage present on connector
JL-2; although one is already present inside, with particularly inductive loads (remote control
switches, electromagnets, etc.) it is advisable to use a damper diode for opening over voltages.

Attention: for currents over the nominal one use an external restart relay.

The output can be freely configured by means of parameter P.3006, see paragraph 5.5.4 and
document [1] for the parameters list.
5.5.2 JI - Digital outputs 7-8: outputs for the command on the loads switching

The controller uses two 10A@250Vac relays in clean contact for the switching commands of
the loads. On JI connector, a clean contact in exchange for each of the two relays is available.

The default functions of the outputs on the controller are:

Terminal Digital output Type of output Default function
JI-1 Normally open contact of the relay 7. DOF.2034 - “Stable
JI-2 7 Normally closed contact of the relay 7. closing command for
MGCB”
JI-3 Common contact of the relay 7.
JI-4 Normally open contact of the relay 8. DOF.2004 - “Stable
JI-5 8 Normally closed contact of the relay 8. opening command for
MCB”
JI-6 Common contact of the relay 8.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 35

 The output 7 is necessary to (as default) connect the loads to bus bar of the generators. The
output 8 is necessary to (as default) connect the loads to the mains. Both the relays can be
used for other functions.

The normally closed contact of output 8 and the normally open contact of output 7 should be
used; in this way, even with deactivated controller, however the loads remain connected to the
electric mains.

For the circuit breakers management see par. 7.9.

If there is only one circuit breaker, the MCB output (terminals 4... 6 of JI) is not used, it can be
therefore associated to a different function (see par. 5.5.4).
5.5.3 JE - Digital outputs 1-4

They are four digital outputs, wholly programmable. When activated, they bring themselves to
the positive supply voltage which is on the JD-2 supply terminal. The nominal capacity of each
single output is 500mA: the total current is therefore 2A. Do never overpass these values.
The outputs are independent and individually protected from overloads, short circuits, polar
inversion and overheating. The protection of overload intervenes limiting the current peak at
an instantaneous value of 4A, to allow the activation of loads which need a higher transitory
current than the nominal. When this condition is lasting, after 150us the gradual intervention
of the thermal protection begins, until the output is turned off.
With inductive loads (power relays, electro-magnetic actuators), although already internally
present, it is advisable to use damping diodes of the opening over voltages.
All the current supplied by the outputs must be kept available by means of JD-2 +BATT;
ensure that the eventual protection fuse on the supply positive have adequate capacity
and intervention time to protect both the outputs and the device in any usage condition.
The default functions of these outputs are:
Type of Default function
Terminal Digital output
output
JE-1 01 DOF.0000 - “Not used”.
JE-2 02 Static output DOF.0000 - “Not used”.
at battery
JE-3 03 positive DOF.0000 - “Not used”.
JE-4 04 DOF.0000 - “Not used”.

5.5.4 Digital outputs configuration

All digital output of the controller and those of the additional DITEL modules, are individually
totally programmable.

The status of the digital outputs is displayed at pages S.13 and S14 (0=output not active,
1=output active).

As default, all outputs activate when required by the relative function (e.g. the load shedding
outputs operates when a load must be disconnected).

Using BoardPrg3 it is possible to invert the activation by simply selecting the box “Inverted
polarity”, on the top of the configuration page of each output.

However, operating directly on the controller it is possible to invert the outputs logics (still
individually for each outputs) using the parameters:

36 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 Parameter Outputs
P.3000 01...18
P.3200 DITEL #01
P.3250 DITEL #02

A bit to zero means that the output is normally at rest. It operates when it is required by the
associated function.

A bit to one means that the output is normally activated. It goes at rest when it is required by
the associated function.

The map of the outputs on the controller is:

BIT Hexadecimal value Digital output Terminal
1 0001 Output 01 JE-1
2 0002 Output 02 JE-2
3 0004 Output 03 JE-3
4 0008 Output 04 JE-4
5 0010 Output 05 JL-1
6 0020 Output 06 JL-2
7 0040 Output 07 JI-3
8 0080 Output 08 JI-4

While the map for the outputs on the four DITEL 8 OUT modules is:
Bit Hexadecimal value Digital output
1 0001 Output 01
2 0002 Output 02
3 0004 Output 03
4 0008 Output 04
5 0010 Output 05
6 0020 Output 06
7 0040 Output 07
8 0080 Output 08
9 0100 Output 09
10 0200 Output 10
11 0400 Output 11
12 0800 Output 12
13 1000 Output 13
14 2000 Output 14
15 4000 Output 15
16 8000 Output 16

Basically, if you want to invert the logic of an output it is necessary to add in the relative
parameter its corresponding value: e.g. If you want to invert the outputs 3 and 4 on the
controller, it is necessary to set P.3000 = 000C (thus 0004+0008); if you want to invert the
outputs 5 and 10 of the DITEL (16 IN + 16 OUT) second group, it is necessary to set P.3250
= 0210 (thus 0010+0200).

By default, all bits are set to zero.

The digital outputs can be used directly as command for external devices of the controller or
as signalling of operation conditions.

The following three function, not directly linked to the operation sequences of the controller,
are selectable for any digital output:

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 37

 • DOF.0102 - “Commanded by the serial ports”. The controller does not command the
output with own internal logics, but with the commands received by means of the serial
ports.

• DOF.0103 - “Logics AND/OR”. See 5.5.5.

Following the configurable functions on digital outputs.

Output
Name Description
function xx.
DOF.0000 Not used. Output not used.
DOF.0102 Managed by the serial ports. The controller does not command the output with own internal logics, but with the
commands received by means of the serial ports.
DOF.0103 AND/OR logics. The output status is the result of the combination of the logics AND/OR, see par. 5.5.5
DOF.1005 Request to start. This output is active when the controller needs to start generators.
DOF.2001 Minimum voltage coil for MCB (NC). See par. 7.9.
DOF.2002 Coil for opening of MCB. See par. 7.9.
DOF.2003 Coil for closure of MCB. See par. 7.9.
DOF.2004 Stable opening command for MCB. See par. 7.9.
DOF.2031 Minimum voltage coil for MGCB. See par. 7.9.
DOF.2032 Coil for opening of MGCB. See par. 7.9.
DOF.2033 Coil for closure of MGCB. See par. 7.9.
DOF.2034 Stable closing command for MGCB. See par. 7.9.
DOF.2251 Load shedding 1. This output is related to the “load shedding” function. The output is activated when the
load must be disconnected from the generators. See the “load shedding” description for
more details.
DOF.2252 Load shedding 2. This output is related to the “load shedding” function. The output is activated when the
load must be disconnected from the generators. See the “load shedding” description for
more details.
DOF.2253 Load shedding 3. This output is related to the “load shedding” function. The output is activated when the
load must be disconnected from the generators. See the “load shedding” description for
more details.
DOF.2254 Load shedding 4. This output is related to the “load shedding” function. The output is activated when the
load must be disconnected from the generators. See the “load shedding” description for
more details.
DOF.3001 Off/Reset. It activates when the controller is in OFF/RESET mode.
DOF.3002 Manual. It activates when the controller is in MANUAL mode.
DOF.3003 Automatic. It activates when the controller is in AUTOMATIC mode.
DOF.3004 Test. It activates when the controller is in TEST mode.
DOF.3005 Remote start. It activates when the controller is in REMOTE START mode.
DOF.3011 Not in Off/reset. It activates when the controller is in MAN or AUTO mode.
DOF.3012 One of the automatic modes. It activates when a controller is in an automatic operation mode, that is AUTO, TEST, or
REMOTE START.
DOF.3030 Voltages on loads. It activates when there is voltage on the loads.
DOF.3031 Voltage on generators. It activates when there is voltage on the bars of the generators.
DOF.3033 Mains in tolerance. It activates when the mains parameters are inside the window “mains live”.
DOF.3034 PPR ok. This output deactivates when an anomaly is diagnosed on the mains voltage which
requires the interruption of the parallel with the mains itself.
DOF.3035 First command for 27Q. It is the first command of the 27Q protection for the parallel with the mains.
DOF.3036 Second command for 27Q. It is the second command of the 27Q protection for the parallel with the mains.
DOF.3037 Parallel to mains allowed. This output activates when the mains status allows the parallel with the mains itself.
DOF.3062 Ready to supply. This output is active when loads can be connected to generators.
DOF.3081 Ready to close MCB. This output is activated before the closing of the circuit breaker only if one input is
configured as “MCB closure allowed” (DIF.1035): it is deactivated (and so the circuit
breaker will be closed) when that input is active or after the delay configured for the
input elapses.
DOF.3082 Ready to open MCB. This output is activated before the opening of the circuit breaker only if one input is
configured as “MCB opening allowed” (DIF.1036): it is deactivated (and so the circuit
breaker will be opened) when that input is active or after the delay configured for the
input elapses.
DOF.3083 Ready to close MGCB. This output is activated before closing the circuit breaker only if one digital input is
configured as “MGCB closure allowed” (DIF.1005): it is deactivated (and so the circuit
breaker will be closed) when that input is active or after the delay configured for the
input.
DOF.3084 Ready to open MGCB. This output is activated before opening the circuit breaker only if one digital input is
configured as “MGCB opening allowed” (DIF.1006): it is deactivated (and so the circuit
breaker will be opened) when that input is active or after the delay configured for the
input.
DOF.3091 Synchronisation for MGCB. It activates during the synchronisation for the closure of the MGCB circuit breaker.
DOF.3092 Synchronisation for MCB. It activates during the synchronisation for the closure of the MCB circuit breaker.
DOF.3093 Synchronization in progress. It activates during the synchronisation for the closure of the MCB or MGCB circuit
breakers.

38 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 Output
Name Description
function xx.
DOF.3094 Synchronized. It activates during the synchronisation for the closure of the MCB or MGCB circuit
breakers, when the gensets are synchronous with the mains.
DOF.3096 In parallel with the mains. It activates when the gensets are supplying in parallel with the mains.
DOF.3151 Reset of the anomalies. The board activates this output for one second when the internal sequence for the
cancellation of anomalies is carried out.
DOF.3152 External horn. It activates together with the internal siren.
DOF.3153 Lamp test. It activates in OFF/RESET mode, pressing STOP button; it can be used to turn on
internal control lights of the controller, and there is one only procedure to test the control
lights.
DOF.3154 Acknowledge of the anomalies. The board activates this output for one second when the internal sequence for the
acknowledge of the anomalies is carried out.
DOF.4001 Warnings. It activates when there are warnings.
DOF.4002 Unloads. It activates when there are unloads.
DOF.4004 Alarms. It activates when there are alarms.
DOF.4005 Alarms and unloads. It activates when there are alarms or unloads.
DOF.4035 Anomalies of circuit breakers It activates when there are anomalies on the MGCB or MCB circuit breakers, that is:

013: MCB not closed.

014: MGCB not closed.
023: MCB not open.
024: MGCB not open.

5.5.5 AND/OR logics

The AND/OR logics are basically a list of boolean conditions (true/false - on/off - 1/0),
configurable by the operator (programming), evaluated by the controller and the result of which
can be assigned to a digital output or to a virtual digital input. To use the AND/OR logics with
one digital output, use the function DOF.0103.

Note: the configuration of the AND/OR logics cannot be carried out directly from the
controller display, but it must be carried out by PC with the BoardPrg3 software.

First, the operator must decide whether the conditions list must be evaluated as AND (they
must be all verified) or as OR (at least one condition verified). It is not possible to have
mixed AND/OR logics (it is possible to do it using virtual digital inputs, see below).

Up to 30 conditions can be added. Each condition can be individually denied: in the previous
picture, for example, the controller will check the digital input 2 and the digital output 17 to be
both not active. The following conditions can be added:

 DI_XXX: logic statuses of all digital inputs (physical and virtual).

 DO_XXX: logic statuses of all digital outputs.

 AL_XXX: presence of warning/alarms.

 ST.XXX: internal statuses of the controller.

 AT_XXX: statuses connected to the thresholds on analogue measures (see par.

5.6.2).

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 39

 The following chart shows the list of the internal statuses available for the AND/OR logics.
Status Description
ST.000 OFF_RESET.
ST.001 MAN.
ST.002 AUTO.
ST.003 TEST.
ST.004 AVVIAMENTO REMOTO.
ST.006 Acknowledgment of anomalies in progress.
ST.007 Reset of anomalies in progress.
ST.008 Warnings.
ST.009 Unloads.
ST.011 Alarms.
ST.012 Not recognized warnings.
ST.013 Not recognized unloads.
ST.015 Not recognized alarms.
ST.016 Mains present (voltages/frequency).
ST.017 Mains absent or out of thresholds.
ST.018 Delay for mains in thresholds.
ST.019 Mains in thresholds.
ST.020 Delay for mains absent or out of thresholds.
ST.048 Load bus-bars live (voltages).
ST.049 Generators bus-bars live (voltages).
ST.051 Protection 27Q activated.
ST.052 Mains fault protections activated (mains absent).
ST.053 Protection 27 activated (U<<, 1° threshold).
ST.054 Protection 59 activated (U>>, 1° threshold).
ST.055 Protection 81< activated (f<<, 1° threshold).
ST.056 Protection 81> activated (f>>, 1° threshold).
ST.057 Protection ROCOF activated.
ST.058 Protection VECTOR JUMP activated.
ST.059 Protection 27 activated (U<, 2° threshold).
ST.060 Protection 59 activated (U>, 2° threshold).
ST.061 Protection 81< activated (f<, 2° threshold).
ST.062 Protection 81> activated (f>, 2° threshold).
ST.063 Protection 27T activated.
ST.064 GCB status.
ST.065 MCB status.
ST.066 MGCB status.
ST.068 MGCB closure command (stable).
ST.069 MCB closure command (stable).
ST.070 MGCB minimum voltage coil.
ST.071 MGCB opening pulse.
ST.072 MGCB closure pulse.
ST.073 MCB minimum voltage coil.
ST.074 MCB opening pulse.
ST.075 MCB closure pulse.
ST.080 Start inhibited by contact.
ST.081 Start inhibited by clock/calendar.
ST.083 Start inhibited because it's not possible to supply without mains and mains is absent.
ST.084 Start inhibited because another genset has the GCB not opened.
ST.088 GCB closure inhibited by contact.
ST.089 GCB closure inhibited because it's not possible to supply without mains and mains is
absent.
ST.090 GCB closure inhibited by serial port.
ST.091 GCB closure inhibited because another genset has the GCB not opened.
ST.092 MGCB closure inhibited because MCB parallel failure.
ST.093 MGCB closure inhibited because no gensets available.
ST.094 MGCB closure inhibited by TEST without load.
ST.095 GCB closure inhibited by reverse synchronization.
ST.096 Ready to supply.
ST.097 MCB synchronization in progress.
ST.098 MGCB synchronization in progress.
ST.099 Synchronized.
ST.100 Ramp up in progress.
ST.101 Ramp down in progress.
ST.102 Supplying in parallel with mains.
ST.104 Supplying.
ST.108 Emergency plant.
ST.109 Parallel to grid plant.
ST.112 Sync per second.
ST.113 Sync per minute.
ST.114 Sync per hour.
ST.127 Daylight Save Time.

40 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 Status Description
ST.128 Generator automatic start request.
ST.129 Generator automatic start request for MCB closing failure.
ST.130 Generator automatic start request by "peak shaving".
ST.136 Generator stop request for none automatic start request.
ST.137 Generator stop request for unloading.
ST.138 Generator stop request for alarms.
ST.139 Manual stop request.
ST.140 Stop request for island mode inhibit.
ST.141 Stop request for some GCBs "not open".
ST.144 GCB closed on genset 01.
ST.145 GCB closed on genset 02.
ST.146 GCB closed on genset 03.
ST.147 GCB closed on genset 04.
ST.148 GCB closed on genset 05.
ST.149 GCB closed on genset 06.
ST.150 GCB closed on genset 07.
ST.151 GCB closed on genset 08.
ST.152 GCB closed on genset 09.
ST.153 GCB closed on genset 10.
ST.154 GCB closed on genset 11.
ST.155 GCB closed on genset 12.
ST.156 GCB closed on genset 13.
ST.157 GCB closed on genset 14.
ST.158 GCB closed on genset 15.
ST.159 GCB closed on genset 16.
ST.160 GCB closed on genset 17.
ST.161 GCB closed on genset 18.
ST.162 GCB closed on genset 19.
ST.163 GCB closed on genset 20.
ST.164 GCB closed on genset 21.
ST.165 GCB closed on genset 22.
ST.166 GCB closed on genset 23.
ST.167 GCB closed on genset 24.
ST.168 GCB closed on genset 25.
ST.169 GCB closed on genset 26.
ST.170 GCB closed on genset 27.
ST.171 GCB closed on genset 28.
ST.172 GCB closed on genset 29.
ST.173 GCB closed on genset 30.
ST.174 GCB closed on genset 31.
ST.175 GCB closed on genset 32.
ST.192 Unloading on genset 01.
ST.193 Unloading on genset 02.
ST.194 Unloading on genset 03.
ST.195 Unloading on genset 04.
ST.196 Unloading on genset 05.
ST.197 Unloading on genset 06.
ST.198 Unloading on genset 07.
ST.199 Unloading on genset 08.
ST.200 Unloading on genset 09.
ST.201 Unloading on genset 10.
ST.202 Unloading on genset 11.
ST.203 Unloading on genset 12.
ST.204 Unloading on genset 13.
ST.205 Unloading on genset 14.
ST.206 Unloading on genset 15.
ST.207 Unloading on genset 16.
ST.208 Unloading on genset 17.
ST.209 Unloading on genset 18.
ST.210 Unloading on genset 19.
ST.211 Unloading on genset 20.
ST.212 Unloading on genset 21.
ST.213 Unloading on genset 22.
ST.214 Unloading on genset 23.
ST.215 Unloading on genset 24.
ST.216 Unloading on genset 25.
ST.217 Unloading on genset 26.
ST.218 Unloading on genset 27.
ST.219 Unloading on genset 28.
ST.220 Unloading on genset 29.
ST.221 Unloading on genset 30.
ST.222 Unloading on genset 31.
ST.223 Unloading on genset 32.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 41

 Status Description
ST.224 Calendar 1.
ST.225 Calendar 2.
ST.226 Calendar 3.
ST.227 Calendar 4.
ST.228 Calendar 5.
ST.229 Calendar 6.
ST.230 Calendar 7.
ST.231 Calendar 8.
ST.232 Calendar 9.
ST.233 Calendar 10.
ST.234 Calendar 11.
ST.235 Calendar 12.
ST.236 Calendar 13.
ST.237 Calendar 14.
ST.238 Calendar 15.
ST.239 Calendar 16.
ST.240 Genset 01 available.
ST.241 Genset 02 available.
ST.242 Genset 03 available.
ST.243 Genset 04 available.
ST.244 Genset 05 available.
ST.245 Genset 06 available.
ST.246 Genset 07 available.
ST.247 Genset 08 available.
ST.248 Genset 09 available.
ST.249 Genset 10 available.
ST.250 Genset 11 available.
ST.251 Genset 12 available.
ST.252 Genset 13 available.
ST.253 Genset 14 available.
ST.254 Genset 15 available.
ST.255 Genset 16 available.
ST.256 Genset 17 available.
ST.257 Genset 18 available.
ST.258 Genset 19 available.
ST.259 Genset 20 available.
ST.260 Genset 21 available.
ST.261 Genset 22 available.
ST.262 Genset 23 available.
ST.263 Genset 24 available.
ST.264 Genset 25 available.
ST.265 Genset 26 available.
ST.266 Genset 27 available.
ST.267 Genset 28 available.
ST.268 Genset 29 available.
ST.269 Genset 30 available.
ST.270 Genset 31 available.
ST.271 Genset 32 available.
ST.272 CAN 0 BUS-OFF.
ST.273 CAN 0 ERR-PASSIVE.
ST.274 CAN 0 ERR-ACTIVE.
ST.275 No communication on CAN 0.
ST.276 CAN 1 BUS-OFF.
ST.277 CAN 1 ERR-PASSIVE.
ST.278 CAN 1 ERR-ACTIVE.
ST.279 No communication on CAN 1.
ST.288 Timer 1.
ST.289 Timer 2.
ST.290 Timer 3.
ST.291 Timer 4.
ST.304 START key pressed.
ST.305 STOP key pressed.
ST.306 MGCB key pressed.
ST.307 MCB key pressed.
ST.308 MODE_UP button pressed.
ST.309 MODE_DOWN button pressed.
ST.310 UP button pressed.
ST.311 DOWN key pressed.
ST.312 LEFT key pressed.
ST.313 RIGHT key pressed.
ST.314 ENTER key pressed.
ST.315 EXIT button pressed.
ST.316 SHIFT key pressed.

42 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 Status Description
ST.317 ACK button pressed.
ST.998 Always ON.
ST.999 Always OFF.

Using the virtual digital inputs, it is possible to create mixed AND/OR logics (composed by
AND or OR together). Let’s suppose we want to activate the digital output #1 when the digital
inputs #1 and #2 are active, or if the digital input #3 is active.

Fist, we must associate to the virtual digital input #1 e.g. an AND/OR logic configured as AND,
which checks that the first two inputs are both active. Then we must associate to the digital
output #1 an AND/OR logic configured as OR, which checks that the virtual digital input #1, or
the digital input #3 are active. Basically, we should use the virtual digital input #1 as “support”
for the AND condition. In this case, it is not necessary to associate any function to the virtual
digital input.

5.6
The device is equipped by three resistive analogue inputs available on terminal JM.

All these inputs can also be configured individually as digital inputs (function AIF.0100 in
parameter P.4001 or equivalent). In this case, the analogue inputs from 1 to 3 will be additional
digital inputs from 9 to 11. The status of the virtual inputs is displayed at page S.11 (0=output
not active, 1=output active). The inputs not configured as digital will be displayed with a dash.
If set as digital (function AIF.0100 in parameter P.4001 or equivalent), the inputs are
considered active when the measured voltage is higher than 4.0Vdc; they are considered not
active when the measured voltage is lower than 3.5Vdc. They cannot therefore be activated
as the other inputs by connecting it to the mass:

It is also possible to use a DIVIT expansion modules and two DIGRIN or DITHERM optional
expansion modules, connected via CAN bus to acquire further 4 signals of voltage/current and
up to 6 temperatures.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 43

 5.6.1 JM - Analogue inputs 1-3

The device is equipped with three inputs designed for the connection to resistive-type sensors
JM-2, JM-3, JM-4. There is also an input for the measurement of their common ground
potential JM-1. The three values of the voltage measured on terminals, and their related value
of sensors resistance, are displayed on page S.15.

The default functions of the outputs are:

Terminal Analogue input Default function
JM-2 Analogue input 1 AIF.0000 - “Not used”.
JM-3 Analogue input 2 AIF.0000 - “Not used”.
JM-4 Analogue input 3 AIF.0000 - “Not used”.

5.6.2 Configuration of digital inputs (AI_CONTROLLER)

The analogue inputs can be used for the acquisition of several predefined values or to acquire
generic sensors (therefore user-adjustable). Some values can be only acquired by some
inputs (see following chat in this paragraph).

It is possible to apply to all physical analogue inputs (JM e DIVIT) a conversion curve (not to
the virtual analogue inputs and to DIGRIN and DITHERM).

To each analogue input (JM, DIGRIN, DITHERM, DIVIT and virtual) a set of 8 parameters is
associated, to define the function type, an alternative denomination and a series of generic
thresholds and configurations usable for different functions. Following are listed, as examples,
those relative to the JM-2 input. For parameters of other inputs, refer to document [1] or to
configuration page I/O of BoardPrg3.

NOTE: On BoardPrg3 the parameters are all displayed only when the input is configured as
analogue, and not as digital. The analogue inputs of the expansion modules are only displayed
if the module is configured.

You will have:

 One parameter which configures its function (P.4001 for input JM-2).

 A parameter that configures a message to show on display (P.4002 for the input JM-
2).

 Two thresholds consisting of three parameters each:

▪ A parameter which configure the threshold value (P.4003 and P.4006 for input
JM-2).

44 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 ▪ A parameter which configure the delay to manage the “out of threshold”
(P.4004 and P.4007 for input JM-2).

▪ A parameter which configure the checking options and the actions in case of
“out of threshold” (P.4005 e P.4008 for the input JM-2).

The parameter which contains a message for a given analogue input (in the example
parameter P.4002), it is displayed by the controller each time the thresholds are used to
activate alarms and/or warnings (see after). It is also used for the following functions of the
analogue inputs AIF.2001, AIF.2003 e AIF.2005. In this case, the measurement acquired will
be displayed on pages M.14, M.15 and M.16, preceded by the configured message. NOTE: it
is also possible to use function AIF.2051 instead of the three preceding ones. In this
case, the measurement acquired will be not displayed; it can be used with the
thresholds to manage digital outputs and activate warnings/alarms.

The two thresholds are completely independent on each other. The third parameter of each
threshold is a “bit” parameter that allows you to associate to each threshold the following
options:

 Bit 0. If this bit is “OFF”, the controller checks if the measurement is higher than the
threshold. If this bit is “ON”, the controller checks if the measurement is lower than the
threshold.

 Bit 1. If this bit is “OFF”, the controller sets to OFF the internal status related to this
analogue measurement, if the measurement is out of threshold. If this bit is “ON”, the
controller sets to ON the internal status related to this analogue measurement, if the
measurement is out of threshold.

 Bit 3. If this bit is “ON”, the controller transmits the anomaly to generators also.

 Bit 4. If this bit is “ON”, the controller activates a warning if the measurements is out
of threshold.

 Bit 5. If this bit is “ON”, the controller commands an unload if the measurements is out
of threshold.

 Bit 7. If this bit is “ON”, the controller activates an alarm if the measurements is out of
threshold.

 Bit 8. If this bit is “ON”, the controller checks that MCB is closed to activate eventual
warnings/alarms configured with the preceding bits.

 Bit 9. If this bit is “ON”, the controller checks that MGCB is closed to activate eventual
warnings/alarms configured with the preceding bits.

 Bit 13. If this bit is “ON”, to activate eventual warnings/alarms configured with the
preceding bits, the controller checks the status of eventual digital inputs configured
with function “DIF.2705 – Disable the protections on analogue measurements”. The
warnings/alarms will be activated if no digital input is configured like that, or if they are
all OFF.

 Bit 15. If this bit is “ON”, the anomaly is subject to override of the protections.

It is possible to set any combination of these bits.

Using together the two thresholds and the AND/OR logics, it is possible to activate a digital
output related to the value of an analogue measurement, with hysteresis. See the example in
the next chapter for the virtual analogue inputs.

The following chart shows the list of functions matchable with the analogue inputs of the
controller.
Analogue
Controller DIGRIN /
Input function Name Message Thresholds DIVIT
(JM) DITHERM
xx.
AIF.0000 Not used. X X X
AIF.0100 Used as digital input. X
AIF.2001 Generic sensor (page 1). X X X X X

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 45

 Analogue
Controller DIGRIN /
Input function Name Message Thresholds DIVIT
(JM) DITHERM
xx.
AIF.2003 Generic sensor (page 2). X X X X X
AIF.2005 Generic sensor (page 3). X X X X X
AIF.2051 Generic sensor. X X X X X
AIF.2101 Speed offset. X X
AIF.2201 Voltage offset. X X
AIF.2103 External synchronizer. X X
AIF.2105 External MCB synchronizer. X X
AIF.2107 External MGCB synchronizer. X X
AIF.2303 Power on the mains. X X
AIF.2307 Setpoint for system BASE LOAD. X X
AIF.2309 Setpoint for system IMPORT/EXPORT. X X
AIF.2405 Setpoint for system power factor. X X

All the AIF.XXXX odd functions require the use of program BoardPrg3 for the definition or the
load of the characteristic curve of the sensor (see par. 0). The measures acquired from
DITHERM/DIGRIN modules that are already expressed in °C and don’t need any conversion
are exceptions.
5.6.3 Virtual digital inputs (AI_VIRTUAL)
The controller, besides the physical analogue inputs, also manages 8 virtual analogue inputs.
They are managed by the controller exactly as they were physical inputs (without limitations),
but the virtual inputs status is not acquired by the hardware, but determined via software.

The purpose of the virtual analogue inputs is multiple:

 To allow the activation of warnings/alarms related to the internal available

measurements.

 To activate digital outputs based on the value of the internal available measurements.

It is possible to operate in two ways to assign a value to the virtual analogue inputs:

• Assigning a value which is major or equal to 4001 (AIF.4001) to the parameter

“function” of the virtual analogue input. In this case, the controller “copies” the value
of the measurement identified from the previous parameter in the virtual analogue
input: on this measurement, it is then possible to manage the thresholds to activate
digital outputs and anomalies.

The following chart shows the list of functions matchable with the analogue inputs of the
controller.
Virtual Analogue
Name Message Thresholds
Input function xx.
AIF.0000 Not used
AIF.4001 Generators/bus frequency. X X
AIF.4006 Generators/bus voltage L1-L2. X X
AIF.4007 Generators/bus voltage L2-L3. X X
AIF.4008 Generators/bus voltage L3-L1. X X
AIF.4009 Generators/bus voltage L-L average. X X
AIF.4012 Mains frequency. X X
AIF.4017 Mains voltage L1-L2. X X
AIF.4018 Mains voltage L2-L3. X X
AIF.4019 Mains voltage L3-L1. X X
AIF.4020 Mains voltage L-L average. X X
AIF.4023 Current L1. X X
AIF.4024 Current L2. X X
AIF.4025 Current L3. X X
AIF.4026 Auxiliary current (or neutral current). X X
AIF.4031 Active power L1. X X
AIF.4032 Active power L2. X X
AIF.4033 Active power L3. X X
AIF.4034 Total active power. X X
AIF.4041 Total apparent power. X X
AIF.4047 Total reactive power. X X
AIF.4058 Total power factor (calculated from kW and kVA). X X
AIF.4059 Total cos(Φ) (calculated from kW and kvar). X X
AIF.4063 Generators/bus active energy (partial) X X

46 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 Virtual Analogue
Name Message Thresholds
Input function xx.
AIF.4065 Generators/bus reactive energy (partial) X X
AIF.4069 Mains active exported energy (partial) X X
AIF.4071 Mains reactive exported energy (partial) X X
AIF.4099 Mains active imported energy (partial) X X
AIF.4101 Mains reactive imported energy (partial) X X
AIF.4105 Battery voltage X X

It is not possible to use functions major than 4000 for the configuration of physical
analogue inputs.

Using together the two thresholds and the AND/OR logics, it is possible to activate a digital
output related to the value of an analogue measurement, with hysteresis. Let’s assume to
activate a digital output if the mains frequency goes over 50.5 Hz. It is first necessary to
manage a minimum hysteresis on the threshold. Otherwise when the mains frequency is next
to the threshold, the output would keep on activating and deactivating for minimum variation
of the frequency itself. Let’s assume to activate the output if the frequency goes over 50.5 Hz
and turn off the output if the frequency is lower than 50.3 Hz. To do so, we use for example
the virtual analogue input #1 which has been configured to contain the mains frequency.

Let’s set the parameters as follows:

 P.4051 (function #1): 4001 (AIF.4001).

 P.4052 (message #1): “”.

 P.4053 (threshold #1): 50.5 Hz

 P.4054 (delay #1): 0.5 sec

 P.4055 (configuration #1): 0002 (bit 1 OFF, bit 2 ON)

 P.4056 (threshold #2): 50.3 Hz

 P.4057 (delay #2): 0.5 sec

 P.4058 (configuration #2): 0001 (bit 1 ON, bit 2 OFF)

The first threshold is used to activate the internal status associated to the analogue input.
Having a look to the configuration parameter, we can see that:

 Bit 0 OFF (checks that the measurement is higher than the threshold).

 Bit 1 ON (activates the internal status in “out of Threshold” condition).

The second threshold is used to deactivate the internal status associated to the analogue
input. Having a look to the configuration parameter, we can see that:

 Bit 0 ON (checks that the measurement is lower than the threshold).

 Bit 1 OFF (deactivates the internal status in “out of Threshold” condition).

With the previous program, therefore, the controller will activate the internal status related to
the analogue input when the measurement is higher than 50.5 Hz per 0,5 seconds; it will
deactivate the internal status when the measurement is lower than 50.5 Hz per 0,5 seconds.

Using AND/OR logics (see par. 5.5.5), it is possible to “copy” the internal status on a physical
output.
5.6.4 Conversion curves
The conversion curves are a tool which allows to convert a numeric value in another numeric
value. They can be used for analogue inputs and for the analogue outputs, for two purposes:

 To convert the acquired value from an analogue input (physical) which is on the
controller or on the optional expansion modules from electric value to real unit of
measure of the sensor.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 47

  To convert an internal measurement of the controller to a percentage value before
writing it on an analogue output.

Note: the configuration of the AND/OR logics cannot be carried out directly from the
controller display, but it must be carried out by PC with the BoardPrg3 software.

The curves, once created, can be saved on a file to use them later even on other
controllers.

The figure above shows a conversion curve associated to an analogue output. The analogue
output has been configured with function AOF.3101 (“Frequency of the generators/bus”). With
this configuration, the output will be 10% for a generators frequency lower than or equal to 45
Hz, 90% for a frequency higher than or equal to 55 Hz; for frequency values included between
45 Hz and 55 Hz, the output will take a value between 10% and 90%.

You can add up to 32 points in the graph, thus creating also non-linear curves. Note, in the
example, that the configured curve has two horizontal segments at the beginning and at the
end, obtained inserting two equal values in column “After”, corresponding to two different
values in column “Before”. This is not mandatory, but it allows you to set a saturation limit on
one end or on both ends of the curve. In fact, the controller extends to infinity the first and last
segments of the curve. Being horizontal, whatever value the measure “to convert” assumes,
you will obtain the same value of the “converted” measure. In the previous example, for any
frequency lower than 45 Hz, the analogue output will be set at 10%. If from the example above
you remove the first point (44 Hz 10%), the horizontal segment would not be at the beginning
of the curve: in this case, if the frequency should drop below 45 Hz, the analogue output would
drop below the 10%.

The BoardPrg3 software allows you (by means of the first buttons on top left) to save the curve
on file to be able to use it again in other applications. It is therefore possible to make an archive
of the conversions associated to the sensors used.

In case the curve is associated to a physical analogue input configured with functions
AIF.2001, AIF.2003 e AIF.2005 (“generic sensor”), the measurement converted will be
displayed on pages M.14, M.15 and M.16: in this case, it is also possible to specify (through

48 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 the conversion curve) how many decimal digits the displayed value and its unit of measure
must have.

5.7

On GC400x only, there are two ANALOGUE outputs to allow the interface with the majority if
the devices that need a current or voltage as input signal. To define the function of these
outputs there are two parameters available, P.6001 for the output JQ and P.6002 for the output
JR. in order to know which from the functions available to assign to parameters.
The outputs are galvanically insulated, so both outputs terminals must be used. The total
variation goes from -10Vdc to +10Vdc. If it is necessary to reduce the variation, you need to
add some specific conversion curves to the outputs configuration (see par. 5.6.4); if the outputs
are configured with the functions AOF.1000 and AOF.1002, it is possible to use the controller
parameters (without conversion curves) to reduce the output variation:
• AOF.1000 Function: use parameters P.0856 and P.0857.
• AOF.1002 Function: use parameters P.0862 and P.0863.

The following description refers to P.0856 and P.0857, but the explanation is valid for P.0862
and P.0863 too.
• To delimit the output from 0Vdc to 10Vdc:
o P.0856 = 50%
o P.0857 = 100%
• To delimit the output from 0Vdc to 5Vdc:
o P.0856 = 50%
o P.0857 = 75%
• To delimit the output from -2Vdc to +2Vdc:
o P.0856 = 40%
o P.0857 = 60%

The minimum load impedance is 10 kOhm.

The default functions of the outputs on the controller are:

Terminal Digital output Type of output Default function
VO1+: Analogue signal in voltage with AOF.1000 – “Not used”.
JQ-1
positive polarity.
01
VO1-: Analogue signal in voltage with
JQ-2
negative polarity.
VO2+: Analogue signal in voltage with AOF.1000 – “Not used”.
JR-1
positive polarity.
02
VO2-: Analogue signal in voltage with
JR-2
negative polarity.

5.7.1 Configuration of the analogue outputs

Each analogue output (the two of MC400 controller and the four of the DANOUT module) are
all completely configurable. To each output a parameter is associated (e.g. P.6001 for output
1), which configure the function (see doc.[1]).

To all analogue outputs, it is possible to apply a conversion curve.

The following functions, not directly linked to the operation sequences of the controller, are
selectable for any digital output:

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 49

 • AOF.0102 - “Managed by serial ports”. The controller does not command the output
with own internal logics, but with the commands received by means of the serial ports.

The following chart shows the list of functions matchable with the analogue outputs:
Analogue output function
Name
xx.
AOF.0000 Not used.
AOF.0102 Managed by serial ports.
AOF.1000 Speed governor.
AOF.1001 Speed governor (with curve).
AOF.1002 Voltage regulator.
AOF.1003 Voltage regulator (with curve).
AOF.3101 Frequency of the generators/bus.
AOF.3111 Voltage of the generators/bus.
AOF.3121 Active power of the generators/bus.
AOF.3201 Frequency of the mains.
AOF.3211 Voltage of the mains.
AOF.3221 Active power of the mains.

When functions AOF.3101 and following are used, you must configure the proportion between
the selected measure (voltage, frequency, etc.) and the % value by means of the conversion
curves (see par. 5.6.4).

5.8
Using the connection CAN bus-0 EXBUS (JM) it is possible to connect the following optional
additional modules to the device:

• 2 DITHERM/DIGRIN modules:

o DITHERM: 3 galvanically insulated thermocouples for the temperature

measurement.

o DIGRIN: 3 galvanically insulated Pt100 sensors for the temperature

measurement.

• 1 DIVIT modules: 4 galvanically insulated analogue inputs 0...5V/0...10V –

0...10mA/0...20mA

• 1 DANOUT modules: 4 galvanically insulated analogue outputs 0...5V/0...10V –

0...10mA/0...20mA

• 2 DITEL 16IN modules: 16 digital inputs optoinsulated (total 32 inputs). To each DITEL
16IN module it is possible to connect 2 DITEL modules 8 OUT relays for a total of 32
digital outputs. It is not possible to use the output modules without their relative input
module.

For configurations to do on the modules, refer to the relative user manuals.

Below we use the name DITEMP to refer to a temperature measurement module (DITHERM
or DIGRIN).

To use the modules on it is necessary to set the number of modules which are with the
parameters.

• P.0141: number of modules DITEL 16 IN (with eventual modules OUT) (max. 2).

• P.0142 the number of DITEMP modules (i.e. DITHERM or DIGRIN) (maximum 2).

• P.0143: the number of DIVIT modules (maximum 1).

• P.0144: the number of DANOUT modules (maximum 1).

Once configured the presence of the modules, they look like digital or analogue inputs or
outputs and are managed as those present on the controller.

For the relative parameters see doc [1].

50 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 In program BoardPrg3, once the presence of a module is configured, it appears on menu I/O
in the left column, with single inputs/outputs ready to be configured.

It is necessary, though, to clarify about DIVIT modules. They can measure any value: it is
necessary to convert the measure done (Volt or mA) to the real unit of measure of the acquired
value. Such a conversion can be done directly in the module (DIVIT), or on the MC400. Ensure
you don’t have a double conversion.

It is suggested to:

• Configure the module DIVIT to transmit a percentage value. In the example below, a
channel configured to acquire a signal 0-10 mA, will transmit “0” at 0 mA and “100” at
10 mA.

• On the MC400, use a conversion curve to convert from a % value to the real unit of
measure.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 51

 5.9
The connection to the public grid happens though the JH connector of the controller. The
connection to the generators bus happens though the JG connector of the controller.

The controller uses phase L1 (terminals JG-3/JH-3) to measure the frequency.

For CAT.IV use, the maximum working voltage is 300Vac (phase-neutral) and 520Vac
(phase to phase). The maximum voltage compared to the protection earth is 300Vac.

If working voltages are greater than these values, step-down transformer must be used to
respect the specified limits. The nominal voltages on the primary and secondary of the VT are
configurable with parameters P.0117 and P.0118 for the mains and parameters P.0103 and
P.0104 for the generators bus. It is suggested to use voltage transformers having a nominal
voltage of 400V on the secondary (this solution can preserve the best available measurement
precision of the board).

In alternative, it is possible to use VT, with secondary sides of 100V. In this case, it is
necessary to configure parameter P.0152 (for the mains) and P.0151 (for the generators bus)
for the operation at 100V.

It is also possible to use the Aron insertion of the VTs, which uses only two transformers,
instead of three (see par. 5.9.4). In this case, it is necessary not to use the neutral connection.

Attention! Do not connect JG/JH measurement input to TA with 400V secondary sides
or directly to the voltage 400V when the device is configured to read at 100V nominal
voltage (parameters P0.152/P.0151 set to 1). The device could be damaged.

The following chapters show all the possible wirings for the alternator. In the example, it is
supposed that each internal winding provides 115 Vac. The possible connections are:
5.9.1 Star or Wye (three phases, four wires)

This kind of wiring assumes the presence of the Neutral line. If the alternator is Wye-wired but
the neutral line is not distributed, leave terminal JH-4 / JG-4 unconnected: the controller
internally creates a virtual Neutral point; in this case, if the L-N voltage measures are not
required, set P.0129 or P.0128 to zero.

Pages M.02/M.03 normally show the line-line voltages. Press the ENTER pushbutton to see
the line-neutral voltages, press it again to go back to line-line voltages.

52 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 5.9.1.1 High Wye

Parameters:

Mains Generators bus Value Description

P.0119 P.0101 3 Number of phases

P.0129 P.0128 1-Yes Is the neutral connected to the controller?

P.0116 P.0102 400 Nominal voltage (L-L)

2
(115 × 2) × √3

Available voltage measures:

Measure Nominal value Page for mains Page for generators bus

L1-L2 400 M.02 M.03

L2-L3 400 M.02 M.03

L3-L1 400 M.02 M.03

L1-N 230 M.02 M.03

L2-N 230 M.02 M.03

L3-N 230 M.02 M.03

N-GND - M.02 M.03

5.9.1.2 Low Wye

Parameters:

Mains Generators bus Value Description

P.0119 P.0101 3 Number of phases

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 53

 P.0129 P.0128 1-Yes Is the neutral connected to the controller?

P.0116 P.0102 200 Nominal voltage (L-L)

2
115 × √3

Available voltage measures:

Measure Nominal value Page for mains Page for generators bus

L1-L2 400 M.02 M.03

L2-L3 400 M.02 M.03

L3-L1 400 M.02 M.03

L1-N 230 M.02 M.03

L2-N 230 M.02 M.03

L3-N 230 M.02 M.03

N-GND - M.02 M.03

5.9.2 Delta (three phases, three wires)

54 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 5.9.2.1 High Delta

Parameters:

Mains Generators bus Value Description

P.0119 P.0101 3 Number of phases

P.0129 P.0128 0 - No Is the neutral connected to the controller?

P.0116 P.0102 400 Nominal voltage (L-L)

2
(115 × 2) × √3

Available voltage measures:

Measure Nominal value Page for mains Page for generators bus

L1-L2 400 M.02 M.03

L2-L3 400 M.02 M.03

L3-L1 400 M.02 M.03

5.9.2.2 Low Delta

Parameters:

Mains Generators bus Value Description

P.0119 P.0101 3 Number of phases

P.0129 P.0128 0 - No Is the neutral connected to the controller?

P.0116 P.0102 200 Nominal voltage (L-L)

2
115 × √3

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 55

 Available voltage measures:

Measure Nominal value Page for mains Page for generators bus

L1-L2 200 M.02 M.03

L2-L3 200 M.02 M.03

L3-L1 200 M.02 M.03

5.9.3 Single phase (one phase, two wires)

5.9.3.1 High Single Phase

Parameters:

Mains Generators bus Value Description

P.0119 P.0101 1 Number of phases

P.0129 P.0128 1-Yes Is the neutral connected to the controller?

P.0116 P.0102 230 Nominal voltage (L-N)

115 × 2

Available voltage measures:

56 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 Measure Nominal value Page for mains Page for generators bus

L1-N 230 M.02 M.03

N-GND - M.02 M.03

5.9.3.2 Low Single Phase

Parameters:

Mains Generators bus Value Description

P.0119 P.0101 1 Number of phases

P.0129 P.0128 1-Yes Is the neutral connected to the controller?

P.0116 P.0102 115 Nominal voltage (L-N)

115

Available voltage measures:

Measure Nominal value Page for mains Page for generators bus

L1-N 115 M.02 M.03

N-GND - M.02 M.03

5.9.4 Aron insertion of voltmetric transformers
Both for the generators bus and for the mains voltage measurement inputs, it is possible to
use the Aron insertion of the voltmetric transformers; this allows to use two transformers
instead of three. The connection is possible both with the measurement inputs set to 100Vac
and with 400Vac nominal voltage.

The diagram of the Aron connection is the following:

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 57

 The diagram is the same both for the generators bus and for the mains; it is necessary to
select the Delta connection mode (see above).

5.10
The currents measurement must be carried out exclusively by external current
transformers (CTs) with an appropriate isolation level: a REINFORCED (DOUBLE)
insulation for the use of the device in Overvoltage Category IV.

5.10.1 JF - Currents measurement inputs 1-3

The current measurement must happen by means of external current transformers (CTs). Do
not connect mains voltage conductors to JF.

Currents transformers having a nominal current of approximately 5 Aac on the secondary side
are the solution that preserves the best available measurement precision of the controller
board. Any current measurement needs a power of about 1VA; however, CTs of 5VA are
recommended, to compensate for leaks along the connection cables.

The maximum current that the device can measure directly is of 5.3Aac, beyond which the
measurement circuit gets saturated. The controller board is still able to measure, but with
gradually decreasing precision, down to about 15Aac only for transient situations , such as
measuring overcurrents or short circuit currents on the system, using an algorithm to
compensate for the saturation of the measurement circuits.

The CTs for the measurement of the three currents have only one terminal clip for the return
current, i.e. the JF-4; the fourth auxiliary current has a return separated from the other three
through the JF-7 terminal clip.

The measurement is carried out by internal shunt (20mΩ).

NOTE: the returns of all CTs (including the auxiliary JF-7) must also be connected to
the negative power supply of the device.

If the CTs have to be connected to other devices in addition to the controller, it must be the
last in the series. For acquiring the currents of the three phases of the generator, the JD
connector is used:

• Connect to terminal JF-1 one terminal of the phase L1 C.T.

• Connect to terminal JF-2 one terminal of the phase L2 C.T.

• Connect to terminal JF-3 one terminal of the phase L3 C.T.

58 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 • Connect to terminal JF-4 a common connection of the remaining terminals of C.T.s

For single phase connection, terminals JF-2 and JF-3 should not be connected.

The P.0107 and P.0139 parameters are used for setting the current values of the CTs primary
and secondary.

Normally, JF connector is used for the measurement of the currents (and the powers) on the
the point of interchange with the mains; its use is however configurable by means parameter
P.0124:

• 0: the CTs are located on the generators bus.

• 1: the CTs are located on the loads lines.

• 2 (default): the CTs are located on the mains lines.

Parameters P.0107 and P.0139 allows to configure the transformation ratio of the external
current transformers. For example, if we use 50/5 current transformers, set P.0107=50 and
P.0139=5.
5.10.2 JF Auxiliary currents measurement (fourth current)
The device allows to acquire a fourth current measurement, usable e.g. for a power
measurement. By default, the fourth measure is not used.

The parameters P.0108 and P.0135 define the currents of the CTs primary and secondary for
the auxiliary current.

The board is configured for the connection of a current transformer (C.T.) for the measure of
the current: if it is required to use a toroid (instead of a C.T.) it is necessary to ask for the
special option in phase of order (E6202111000XX).
5.10.2.1 Controller without option E620215011000
Parameter P.0109 must be set to “0 - CT”.

The current measurement must happen only by means of external current transformers (CT).
Do not connect voltage conductors to JI. The measurement is carried out by internal shunt
(20mΩ).

To these terminals, external current transformers with 5Aac or 1Aac secondary can be
connected.

The current measurement requires a power of about 1VA: however, 5VA CTs are suggested
to compensate the losses along the connection cables.

The maximum current measurable directly from the device is 5,3Aac. Over this threshold the
measure circuit saturates. The controller can measure (with progressively decreasing
precision) up to 15Aac though, e.g. to measure overcurrents or short circuit currents on the
plant, using an algorithm of compensation of saturation of the circuits of measurement.

To acquire the current the connector JI is used:

• Connect to JI-1 terminal the hot pole of external CT.

• Connect to JI-2 terminal the cold pole of external CT.

Parameters P.0108 and P.0135 allows to configure the transformation ratio of the external
current transformers. For example, if we use 50/5 current transformers, set P.0108=50 and
P.0135=5.
5.10.2.2 Controller with option E620215011000
Parameter P.0109 must be set to “1 - Toroid”.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 59

 The current measurement must happen only by means of an external toroid. Do not connect
voltage conductors to JI and JE.

The maximum current measurable directly from the device is 0,1Aac. Over this threshold the
measure circuit saturates. Use one toroid with a transformation ratio which guarantees
currents lower than this threshold on the secondary.

To acquire the current the connector JI is used:

• Connect to JI-1 terminal the hot pole of external toroid.

• Connect to JI-2 terminal the cold pole of external toroid.

Parameters P.0108 and P.0135 allows to configure the transformation ratio of the external
toroid. For example, if we use 500/1 toroid, set P.0108=500 and P.0135=1.

The cold pole of the toroid (JI-2) must also be connected to the supply negative of the
controller.
5.10.2.3 Use of the fourth current
Parameter P.0130 allows to tell the controller where is located the transformer which acquires
this measurement.

• 0: the CT is located on the generators bus.

• 1: the CT is located on the loads lines.

• 2 (default): the CT is located on the mains lines.

The most important parameter to be configured is parameter P.0131 though, that allows to
establish which use of current measurement you want to do:

• P.0131 = 0 (“Not used”) The controller disables the measurement of the fourth current,
which will not be shown on display.

• P.0131 = 1 (“General purpose”). The controller displays the current measurement

done on page M.04 with the lettering “Ax”.

• P.0131 = 2 (“Neutral”). The controller displays the current measurement done on page
M.04 identifying as “An”.

• P.0131 = 4 (“Power measure”). The controller interprets the measurement like the
current circulating on L1 phase of the selected source (P.0130) and shows it on page
M.04 with the lettering “Ax”. The controller also calculates the active power (kW)
circulating on L1 phase of the selected source. Finally, for three-phase systems, it
multiplies the calculated power by three, assuming that the load is uniformly shared
on the three phases. If it was not like this, it is possible to apply a correction factor
(P.0132), which allows to increase the calculated power (if P.0132 > 1) or to decrease
it (if P.0132 < 1), to let it the closest to real. The calculated active power is shown on
page M.01.

Settings 1 and 2 allow to establish a threshold on the auxiliary current (P.0367 e P.0368). It is
possible to configure a digital input with function DIF.2704 - “Disable protections on fourth
current”. If the input is active, the thresholds, even if set, are ignored and do not activate
anomalies in case of overpassing.

5.11
The device is equipped with many communication ports for the connection to PC, modem,
mains, etc.

MC400 is provided with:

• One USB 2.0 serial port not insulated (Function mode) used to connect a PC for FW
update and programming of device parameters

60 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 • One RS232 (JA) serial port with DB9 male connector usable for the interfacing with
an external device equipped with RS232 interface. The maximum length of the cable
is 12 mt.

• One RS485 serial port (JO) with galvanic insulation; the maximum connection length
in optimal conditions is 1200 mt. The 120ohm terminal resistor is integrated and can
be inserted through S5 selector. The use of a shielded cable with 120ohm impedance
is required (e.g. BELDEN 3105A Multi-conductor-EIA Industrial RS-485PLT/CM).

• One CAN bus port (JO) with galvanic insulation for the communication with additional
optional modules (DITEL, DITHERM, DIGRIN e DIVIT). The 120ohm terminal resistor
is integrated and can be inserted by a simply connection through the pins 4 and 5 of
JO. The specific use of the shielded cable is required (e.g. HELUKABEL 800571).

• One CAN bus port (JP) with galvanic insulation for the communication with other
devices for genset/mains/tie breaker control. The 120ohm terminal resistor is
integrated and can be inserted by a simply connection through the pins 1 and 2 of JP.
The specific use of the shielded cable is required (e.g. HELUKABEL 800571).

• One Ethernet port (JS) with RJ45 connector for 10/100 Mbps Ethernet nets
connections.

For details related to the communications see specific paragraphs and document [3].

For CAN bus connections see documents [5] e [6].

5.11.1 JA - Serial port 1 RS232

RS232 JA connector (serial port 1) can be used for the interfacing with an external device
equipped with RS232 interface, e.g. a modem or a PC. The maximum distance of the
connection is 12 mt.

The connection can be used for the device parameter programming through BoardPrg3
program or for the connection to a supervision program as SicesSupervisor3.

For the functions and protocols implemented, refer to document [3]. Connector diagrams as
follows:

• JA_01: not connected

• JA_02 RXD

• JA_03 TXD

• JA_04 DTR

• JA_05 GND

• JA_06 DSR

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 61

 • JA_07 RTS

• JA_08: not connected

• JA_09: not connected

To configure the use of the serial port 1 it is necessary to set the following parameters:

• P.0451: use of serial port 1

• P.0452: Modbus address serial port 1

• P.0453: Baud rate serial port 1

• P.0454: Setting serial port 1

• P.0470: Modbus register orders for serial port 1

The description of these parameters is on document [3].

5.11.1.1 GSM analogue Modem
The analogue/GSM modem must be connected to serial port 1 (JA connector). The modem
must be selected among the types tested by SICES.

For the use of a GSM modem it is necessary that the operator inserts a SIM card of any phone
operator. It is important that on the SIM card the PIN code is disabled: insert the SIM into
a phone and disable the PIN code before inserting it into the phone.

The SIM type to insert depends on the use of the modem:

• If you want to use only SMS messages, any SIM is suitable.

• If you want to use the data exchange with a pc through an analogue modem (classic
modem 56k for example), it is necessary a SIM which allows that kind of data. The
data exchange happens through the phone channel, but the mobile operators can
enable/disable the passage of the data on phone both on the calls done and on those
received. Normally, the passage of the data on phone is available on SIM M2M
(machine to machine), but it is better to check with your own operator anyway.
Attention: if you talk about data with your phone operator, he would mean the
data on TCP/IP protocol (those of the Smartphone), but they are not the data
needed, though.

In any case, the connection of the GSM antenna is necessary.

For the use of SMS or data transmission through phone see document [3].
5.11.2 JO - Serial port 2 RS485

62 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 The device is equipped with a RS485 serial port (serial port 2) galvanically insulated and
independent from serial port 1 (RS232), usable to connect via Modbus to a PC or other
devices.

For details on RS485 connections, its usage and its parameter programming, refer to
document [3].

Connections:
• JO-3 Connection RS485 A
• JO-2 Connection RS485 B

The RS485 connection needs a 120Ohm termination resistor on both ends of the cable. The
device has integrated resistor; to insert it, it is necessary to act on selector S5. The galvanic
insulation guarantees the operation security of the connection also among distant devices and
with different mass potentials compared with the controller. The maximum connection length
is 1200m: it is also function of the set transmission baud rate, though. The use of a special
shielded cable is provided (see 4.2) with shielded filter connected to earth.

To configure the use of the serial port 2 it is necessary to set the following parameters:

• P.0451: use of serial port 2

• P.0472: Modbus address serial port 2

• P.0473: Baud rate serial port 2

• P.0474: Setting serial port 2

• P.0475: Modbus register orders for serial port 2

The description of these parameters is on document [3].

On serial port 2 cannot be connected a modem; for the rest, it is possible to use it for the same
connections possible from RS232 serial port using RS485/RS232 adaptors or RS485/USB
when necessary.
5.11.3 JB - USB Serial port

The USB protocol specifications don’t allow its use in the permanent industrial field due to the
limited length of the cable and of the elevated sensibility to electric disturbs also on PC side.
For this reason, the USB connection cable must be inserted only when it is necessary
to operate on the device and can be removed from the JNA connector when the
operation has finished.

The USB connection with a PC is used for two purposes:

• Firmware upgrade.

• Parameter configuration.

Upgrading the device firmware is a specific operation of SICES srl; besides the FW to be
inserted, it requires a procedure and special programs. Also, it must not be done by the
installator, except for specific cases previously agreed with Sices.

The USB port can be used for the programming of parameters with BoardPrg3 program, in
alternative to the RS232/RS485 serial connection or Ethernet.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 63

 It is necessary that on the PC to be connected the driver CDC_Sices_Win.inf supplied by
SICES is installed; for the driver installation, refer to document [7].

Once installed the driver, the PC will detect the controller as a new serial port, to be used
exactly as it was a RS232 serial port.

The configuration parameters are:

• P.0478: Modbus address USB serial port.

• P.0479: Modbus registers order for USB serial port.

5.11.4 JS - Ethernet port 10 100Mbps

The Ethernet port with RJ45 connector is provided for data connection via LAN. For details on
net connection and protocol, refer to document [3].

It is possible to connect the device inside a LAN or directly to a PC (point to point connection).
The connection makes possible the use of SicesSupervisor3 supervision SW, BoardPrg3
configuration and all available functionalities through the TCP/IP Modbus protocol.

The connection of the device inside a LAN also allows to maintain updated the internal
calendar with UTC, besides the possibility to assign a public IP address (static or dynamic)
directly to the device itself.

Parameters for the configuration.

Parameter Name Default
P.0500 IP Address. Set it only if DHCP protocol is not 192.168.0.1
required (otherwise this field is filled by the DHCP
server): set the IP address assigned to the
controller.
P.0501 Subnet mask. Set it only if DHCP protocol is not 255.255.255.0
required (otherwise this field is filled by the DHCP
server): set the value used by the network the
controller is connected to.
P.0502 Network Gateway. Set it only if DHCP protocol is 0.0.0.0
not required (otherwise this field is filled by the
DHCP server): set the value used by the network
the controller is connected to.

P.0503 Modbus/TCP Port. Indicate the port on which the 502

controller can accept incoming Modbus/TCP
communications. The port 502 is standard for
Modbus/TCP protocol: change it only when
required.
P.0505 Order of the Modbus registers. When 32-bit 0-LSWF
information is required, it establishes if the 16 more
significant bits must be sent first, or those less
significant.

P.0504 Web server Port. Indicate the port on which the 80

controller can accept incoming HTTP
communications. The port 80 is standard for HTTP
protocol: change it only when required. Currently
not supported.

64 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 P.0509 NTP server address. Set the IP address of the 0.0.0.0
server that provides updated date/time.
P.0508 NTP Server port. Set the port on which the NTP 123
server is listening. The port 123 is standard for NTP
protocol: change it only when required.

P.0510 Primary DNS server. Set it only if DHCP protocol is 0.0.0.0

not required (otherwise this field is filled by the
DHCP server): set the IP address of the primary
DNS server (server who provides the translation
service among names and IP addresses).
P.0511 Secondary DNS server. Set it only if DHCP protocol 0.0.0.0
is not required (otherwise this field is filled by the
DHCP server): set the IP address of the secondary
DNS server (server who provides the translation
service among names and IP addresses).

P.0514 DHCP server address. Set to “255.255.255.255” if 0.0.0.0

DHCP protocol is required (any other value disables
that protocol).
P.0513 DHCP server port. Set the port on which the DHCP 67
server is listening. The port 67 is standard for
DHCP protocol: change it only when required.
P.0456 Plant name. If DHCP protocol is used, the controller
can be contacted from the Network using this
name.

To reach the device inside a LAN net, it is necessary to configure at least parameters P.0500,
P.0501 e P.0502. It is possible to proceed in two ways:

• It is possible to manually configure the three above mentioned parameters, with

congruent values with the network to which we connect (the sub-net mask and the
router/gateway are specific of each network, the IP address must be univocal in the
network). To proceed this way, it is necessary that parameter P.0514 is set to 0.0.0.0.

• It is possible to dynamically acquire from the network the values for the three above
mentioned parameters. To do so, it is necessary that the controller can connect to a
DHCP server (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). To proceed this way, it is
necessary that parameter P.0514 is set to 255.255.255.255 and that parameter
P.0513 is set to 67 (67 is the standard port for the DHCP server, if your server uses a
different port, set it in P.0513). Also, parameter P.0456 must contain the name to
which server DHCP will match the IP address (see after DNS description).

Once the controller has valid values for parameters P.0500, P.0501 and P.0502 (see page
S.05), can be contacted through Modbus-TCP protocol on the assigned IP address and on
TCP port configured with P.0503, for example with the supervision SW (SicesSupervisor3)
and of configuration (BoardPrg3). When using DHCP protocol, the controller will be reachable
through the Modbus-TCP protocol both on IP address and on the configured name, on P.0503
port.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 65

 The controller also supports the DNS protocol (Domain Name System). The DNS system is a
system used for the conversion of the names of the network knots in IP addresses and vice-
versa. To use the DNS system, it is required:

• If you don’t use a DHCP server (see above), it is necessary to set the IP address of
the DNS server in P.0510 (it is possible to set the address of a secondary DNS server
in P.0511).

• If you use a DHCP server (see above), the IP address of the DNS server is acquired
by the controller directly from the DHCP server.

Parameters P.0508 and P.0509 allows to set the IP address and the port to be used to connect
to a NTP server (Network Time Protocol), in such way to keep synchronized and updated the
internal calendar with date and time of the reference time zone (that is, of the UTC time).
Setting one or both parameters to zero the function will be disabled. For more details refer to
the document 9.2.1.

The real IP addresses (those configured manually or those obtained by DHCP server) are
visible on page S.05.

5.12
For the connections below mentioned, use a cable suitable for CAN bus (see documents [5]
[6]).
5.12.1 JO - CAN bus port 0

This interface is used for the connection to expansion modules DITHERM, DIGRIN, DIVIT,
DITEL, DANOUT.

The CAN bus interface is galvanically insulated.

Connections:

• Connect terminal JO-5 to terminal CAN_H of the expansion modules.

66 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 • Connect terminal JO-6 to terminal CAN_L of the expansion modules.

Connect the shielding mesh of the shielded cable to the protective earth or to signal on both
sides.

The CAN bus connection needs a 120Ohm termination resistor on both ends of the cable. The
terminal resistor is integrated in our controller; to insert it, you need to act on switch S1. NOTE:
the termination must always be inserted, unless the connection carries on towards other
devices and the controller is not one of the two extremes.

We recommend the use of a proper shielded cable (e.g. HELUKABEL 800571).

For the configuration of the additional expansion modules, see par. 5.8.
5.12.2 JP - CAN bus port 1

This CAN bus interface must be used to connect among themselves all SICES
genset/mains/bus coupler controllers): through this communication channel (PMCB – Power
Management Communication Bus), the controllers exchange all necessary data to manage
the parallel functions (see document [8]).

The CAN bus interface is galvanically insulated.

Connections:

• Connect terminal JP-2 to terminal CAN_H of the other SICES controllers.

• Connect terminal JP-3 to terminal CAN_L of the other SICES controllers.

Connect the shielding mesh of the shielded cable to the protective earth or to signal on both
sides.

The CAN bus connection needs a 120Ohm termination resistor on both ends of the cable. It
is therefore necessary to insert such resistance only on the first and on the last SICES
controller. Note: the connection of the controllers can never be star but it must be daisy chain.
The terminal resistor is integrated in our controller; to insert it, you need to act on switch S6.

We recommend the use of a proper shielded cable (e.g. HELUKABEL 800571).

Use the parameters of menu 8 for the parallel functions (parameter P.0800 enables/disables
this CAN bus interface).

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 67

 6
6.1

Fig. 1 - Front Panel

The controls consist of 12 buttons.

The front panel also has some luminous indicators.

68 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 6.2

Pushbutton Function
The controller is disabled; all anomaly signals are disabled. The MGCB circuit
OFF/RESET breaker is opened (if it exists and is managed by the controller). The MCB
PROGRAM circuit breaker is closed (if it exists and is managed by the controller).
You can program the parameters.
The controller is set for manual generators control.
MODE UP
Press the START button to start the generators (if MGCB circuit breaker exists
and is opened, the generators close their GCB and work in parallel).
Press the STOP button to stop the generators (that will stop after GCB has
MAN been opened and the engine has been cooled).
Press the MCB button for manual opening/closing of the circuit breakers that
connects the mains to the loads.
Press the MGCB button for manual opening/closing of the circuit breakers that
connects the generators bus to the loads.
MODE The controller automatically manages the gensets operation, so they will be
DOWN started if required by the operating conditions.
By pressing the START button it is possible to activate/deactivate the TEST
AUTO TEST mode. If not otherwise configured, it does not close the MGCB circuit breaker.
The STOP button, if not otherwise configured, causes the stop of the gensets
and the activation of an alarm.
In programming mode, it cancels the changes made to a variable value, brings
up the previous menu level, or exits programming mode. If it is pressed for at
least two seconds in any menu, you exit the programming mode retaining the
current menu position for further programming access.
If it is pressed in any window, it displays the status information on the upper
line (displaying them cyclically).
Depending on the selected page, if pressed together with the ENTER button
for at least 5 seconds while in OFF/RESET mode, it can reset counters to
zero, reload default values of the programming parameters or cancel history
logs, force exit from BUS OFF mode of the CAN bus.
When used during the keyboard regulation function, it aborts the function.
Navigation buttons of the multifunction display. These buttons let you select
the previous or next page on the display in all modes, except in the
PROGRAM AND HISTORY LOG mode.
Horizontal navigation buttons: in PROGRAM mode, they are used to
position the cursor when entering the strings. Used in combination with the
ESC/SHIFT button, they allow to adjust the contrast:
ESC/SHIFT + LEFT: to decrease the contrast (lighten).
ESC/SHIFT + LEFT: to increase the contrast (darken).
Vertical navigation buttons: in PROGRAM and HISTORY LOG they allow
to scroll the menus and the variables / registrations. You can
increase/decrease the value of the variable. Used in combination with
ESC/SHIFT button, they allow to scroll through the menus ten entries at a time
or increase/decrease the variables ten units at a time.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 69

 Pushbutton Function
In the PROGRAM menu, you can enter the programming mode and open a
submenu, change a variable or parameter, and confirm the operation.
In ARCHIVE menu, it allows to activate the HISTORY LOG menu and allows
the entrance in the selected archive.
It allows to “accept” eventual anomaly signalling on the memory while turning
on.
When there is an alarm, by pressing the button you deactivate the siren. A
further press of the button recognises the presence of an anomaly and resets
any alarm signals if the operating conditions have returned to normal. Alarms
can only be reset by activating the "OFF/RESET" mode.
The pushbutton only works in manual.
It allows to command the opening and the closing of the MCB circuit breaker
(if it exists and is managed by the controller). If the synchronization is required
for closing, by pressing the pushbutton the synchronization sequence is
activated. By pressing it during the paralleling with the mains, it allows to open
the MCB circuit breaker: if it is possible, the controller transfers the load to the
gensets before opening of the circuit breaker.
The pushbutton only works in manual.
It allows to command the opening and the closing of the MGCB circuit breaker
(if it exists and is managed by the controller). If the synchronization is required
for closing, by pressing the pushbutton the synchronization sequence is
activated. By pressing it during the paralleling with the mains, it allows to open
the MGCB circuit breaker: if it is possible, the controller transfers the load to
the mains before opening of the circuit breaker.
If MGCB does not exist or is externally managed, it is possible to use this
button for opening /closing the GCB circuit breakers of the generators: this
function must be enabled by means bit 3 of parameter P.0495.
In MAN mode, it can be used to start all the gensets “controlled by MC400”.
In AUTO mode, if automatic gensets start is not required, it changes the
operating mode to TEST. If automatic gensets start is required, it can be used
to restart gensets controlled by MC400 that are stopped for a low load
condition.
In TEST mode, it changes the operating mode from TEST to AUTO.
Together with the STOP pushbutton, at the power up it allows entering the
controller special functions.
In OFF/RESET mode, the pushbutton turns all leds on (to check if there are
any faults).
In MAN mode, it is used to stop all the gensets “controlled by MC400”.
In AUTO, TEST and REMOTE START modes, the controller normally issues
an alarm (A007) and stops all gensets “controlled by MC400” (this behaviour
can be disabled by means bit 0 of parameter P.0495).
Together with the START pushbutton, at the power up it allows entering the
controller special functions.

70 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 6.3
It is possible to modify the brightness of the light indicators (all together) using parameter
P.0496: the higher the parameter value, the brighter the light indicators. The value can be set
between 1 to 10 (default value = 5).

LED OFF LED steady ON LED flashing

  

Signalling Function
 The controller is in the OFF/RESET operating mode.
Flashing at 50% on: it indicates that you are accessing the

PROGRAMMING menu.
 The controller is in another operating mode.

 The controller is in the MANUAL operating mode.

 The controller is in another operating mode.

 The controller is in the AUTOMATIC operating mode.

Flashing at 50% on: the controller is in the TEST operating
mode.

Flashing at 90% on: the controller is in the REMOTE START
operating mode.
 The controller is in another operating mode.
 There is at least one active alarm or unload.

 Flashing at 50% on: there is at least one active warning.

 There are no anomalies.

At least one Modbus or Modbus/TCP communication is running


over the serial ports, the USB port or the ETHERNET port.

 No Modbus nor Modbus/TCP communications are running.

 The CAN bus interface is active and in ERROR-ACTIVE mode.

Flashing at 25% on: there are communication errors, the CAN

bus interface is in ERROR-PASSIVE mode.

Flashing at 75% on: there are communication errors, the CAN
bus interface is in BUS-OFF mode.
 Mains voltages are steadily within the tolerance range.
 No mains voltages.
Flashing at 50% on: during transition between the previous two
statuses.
Flashing at 25% on: mains voltages under tolerance thresholds.


Flashing at 75% on: mains voltages above tolerance thresholds.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 71

 Signalling Function

 The MCB circuit breaker is opened (or it does not exist).

 The MCB circuit breaker is closed.

Flashing at 25% on: MCB opened after a closing command.

 Flashing at 75% on: MCB closed after an opening command.

Flashing at 50% on: during synchronization (it flashes in

alternation with the BUS LIVE).
 Voltages are present on the loads.
 No voltages on the loads.
Flashing at 50% on: during the synchronization (it flashes in
alternance with MGCB during the direct synchronization,

flashes in alternance with MCB during the reverse
synchronization).
 The MGCB circuit breaker is opened.
 The MGCB circuit breaker is closed (or it does not exist).
Flashing at 25% on: MGCB opened after a closing command.
Flashing at 75% on: MGCB closed after an opening command.

Flashing at 50% on: during synchronization (it flashes in
alternation with the BUS LIVE).
 Voltages are present on the generators bus.

 No voltages on the generators bus.

72 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 6.4
6.4.1 LCD lighting
The back-light lamp is managed by the controller, which switches it off the after a
programmable time (P.0492) if no buttons are pressed in the meantime. Press any button to
switch the lamp on again, (we recommend using the ESC/SHIFT button as it has no function
when used alone). This function can be disabled by setting parameter P.0492 to 0.

Using parameter P.0493 it is possible to force the lamp always on when at least one generator
is running.
6.4.2 Contrast adjustment
Depending on the environmental temperature conditions, the contrast may require adjustment
to correctly view the display.

Press in sequence the ESC/SHIFT + LEFT buttons to reduce the contrast (lighten), press the
ESC/SHIFT + RIGHT buttons to increase it (darken).
6.4.3 Mode navigation
The display has different visualization modes composed by different pages.

Mode Description Page

identifier

PROGRAMMING Programming P.XX

STATUS Status information S.XX

MEASURES Electrical measurements M.XX

PMCB Pages related to parallel functions. B.XX

HISTORY History logs H.XX

Generally, the navigation among the modes happens through UP and DOWN buttons.

To view the pages inside the mode, use the LEFT and RIGHT buttons.

In some modes (P.XX and H.XX), to view the pages press the ENTER button first, and then
use the UP and DOWN buttons to navigate between pages.

Fig. 3 - Mode navigation

If the UP and DOWN buttons must be used to manage the functions within the page, the
ENTER button must be pressed to activate the said functions, and the ESC/SHIFT button to
deactivate them.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 73

 6.4.4 Display area layout (ref. to fig. 4)

KEY: M.07 ENERGY _

1 - Status bar 1 kWh (part): 0
2 - Data area kvarh(par): 0

kWh (tot.): 0
2 kvarh(tot): 0

Exported energy
Fig. 4 - Display areas

6.4.5 Top status bar (ref. to fig. 5)

The top status bar contains information on navigation and/or some status information.
KEY:
1a - Mode identifier
1b - Page identifier M.07 ENERGY METERS _
1c - Page title
1c
1a
1b

Fig. 5 - Top status bar

The current mode is shown in the relevant field of the top status bar (1a). The mode identifier
(1a), and the page identifier (1b) identify and refer to the page so there is no chance of error.
The title (1c) provides a description in the current language of the content of the page.

Pressing the ESC/SHIFT button, the controller replaces the title (while the button is held) with
a status message. By double clicking the ESC/SHIFT button, the title is replaced with a status
message so long as you remain on that page. If the bit 6 of parameter P.0495 is activated, the
controller automatically replaces the title with a status message if there is at least one pending
status message with a waiting time (countdown); if the operator selects a new page, the
controller shows the title for two seconds, then it shows the status message again.

74 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 6.5
6.5.1 Programming (P.XX)
The controller manages a relevant number of parameters, which allows the constructor, the
installator and the final customer to configure it based on plant specific needs. This document
does not contain the list of parameters (even if many of them are mentioned in the description
of the different controller functions), but refer to document [1], for a detailed description. Here
is described the general structure of the programming and the operating procedure which
allows to read and/or modify the parameters.

To access the parameter modification mode, select page P.02 with UP and DOWN vertical
scroll buttons, then press ACK/ENTER to activate it.

To exit the programming menu and go back to the main window, press button ESC/SHIFT.

WARNING: Assigning an incorrect value to one or more parameters can cause

malfunctions, damage to things or injury to people. The parameters must only be
changed by qualified personnel. Parameters may be password protected (see par.
6.5.1.2).
6.5.1.1 Organization

1 P.05 PROGRAM _
KEY:
1 - Status bar 2.1 Mains sensor_ 4/12
2 - Current menu
3 - Current parameter 2 0236-Mains low freq.
4 - Parameter value
5 - Equivalent value
threshold (%)
[90.0]
3 (45.00 Hz)

4 5
Fig. 6 - Display areas

The first line under the top status bar identifies the current menu (2) with the menu number and the
relevant text. A pair of numbers is displayed on the right of this line (4/12 in the example). The first
indicates which entry of the menu is selected or which page is displayed, the second indicates how
many entries or pages can be displayed in the present menu/submenu.

Each programming parameter (3) has a 4-digit numeric code (e.g. P.0236) to identify the variables
regardless of the language used. The current value of the parameter is displayed below the description
(4), between brackets. If the parameter configures a value that is a percentage of another item, the
controller shows the equivalent value in the measurement unit of the reference item (5).
6.5.1.2 Protection password
Access to the programming mode can be controlled by 4 different password levels, which are
listed in order of priority.

• SICES password.

• MAKER password.

• INSTALLER password.

• USER password.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 75

 Each parameter of the controller is associated to a protection level (in document [1] this
association is indicated in column “ACC” with a letter “S” to indicate SICES level, “C” for
constructor, “I” for installator and “U” for final user).

A parameter associated to SICES level is modifiable only setting SICES password. A

parameter associated to the maker level can be modified only by the maker himself (or with
the SICES password). A parameter associated to the installer level can be modified by the
maker and the installer (or with the SICES password). A parameter associated to the end user
lever can be modified by the maker, the installer, and the end user (or with the SICES
password).

The general rule says that the parameters are modifiable only when the controller is in
“OFF/RESET” mode. Some parameters are an exception and can be modified regardless of
the status of the controller board, including when the generators are running. Generally, if a
parameter cannot be modified, its value will be between “<” and “>”, whilst if modifiable, it is
between “[” and “]”: this is valid also for the password restrictions.

The operator who should modify a parameter, must first let the controller recognise him as
“SICES”, “maker”, “installer” or “user”, dialling the right password in parameter P.0000 (menu
“1.1.1 - Authentication”). After this operation, he will be able to modify the parameters. The set
access code remains in P.0000 memory for about 10 minutes after programming has been
completed. After this time, it will be automatically reset and it should be set again to enter a
new programming.

It is possible to customize the password through parameters P.0001 (maker), P.0002 (installer)
and P.0003 (user), available on menu “1.1.2 Password configuration”. The value “0” for these
parameters indicates password not set. The SICES password instead, it is a special password,
pre-assigned and supplied together with the controller. The password supplied with the
controller is always valid. On demand, SICES can provide a second password, only valid for
2 hours’ operation, though. After this time, a new password must be asked to SICES.

To obtain the password, the operator should ask SICES, indicating the “Serial number” of the
controller, together with the “Internal code” displayed on page S.03, as shown below:

S.03 SCHEDA _
Lingua: [ITALIANO]
Ven 26/06/15 08:52:23
Battery: 12.0V

Cod. ID: 00001BB294AF

SW: EB02502750100
Codice interno: 2415

If a password gets lost, it is possible to reconfigure it by logging in with the higher-level

password. For this reason, we advise against not setting at least the “maker” password
(P.0001): is, in effect, someone else sets it or another lower password (even only for
distraction) without communicate it, it will no longer be possible to modify any
parameter. By knowing the “maker” password, it will be possible to nullify or modify
the other passwords. Contact our service centre if the “maker” password is lost.

The following examples show all combinations of password assignment.

Example 1: P.0001 =0 P.0002 =0 P.0003 =0

Any operator is considered “maker”, without setting anything in P.0000. Therefore, all
parameters, except for the special ones, can be changed by anyone (this is the default
mode).

Example 2: P.0001 =0 P.0002 =0 P.0003 =UUU

No parameter is modifiable. When the user enters the “UUU” code in P.0000, he would be
considered “user”, but as no password is associated to the “installer” and the “maker”, the

76 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 controller considers him as “maker”. After entering this code, all parameters, except for the
special ones, can be modified.

Example 3: P.0001 =0 P.0002 =III P.0003 =UUU

No parameter is modifiable. When the user enters “UUU” in P.0000, he is considered “user”
and can modify only the parameters associated to “user”. If user enters “III” the board
considers it “maker” because there is no password for “maker”. After entering this code, all
parameters, except for the special ones, can be modified.

Example 4: P.0001 =CCC P.0002 =III P.0003 =UUU

No parameter is modifiable. When the user enters “UUU” in P.0000, he is considered “user”
and can modify only the parameters associated to “user”. If the user enters “III”, he can
modify all parameters associated to “installer” and “user”. When entering “CCC”, the
operator is identified as “maker” and can modify all parameters, excluding the critical ones
of the controller.

Example 5: P.0001 =CCC P.0002 =0 P.0003 =0

No passwords are associated to the user and the installer. The parameters associated to
user and installer are free programmable, without entering any code in P.0000. To modify
maker associated parameters you must enter “CCC” in P.0000.

Example 6: P.0001 =0 P.0002 =III P.0003 =0

As no password is associated to the user, the parameters associated are freely

programmable, without entering any code in P.0000. When the user enters “III” in P.0000,
he can modify all parameters because there is no password for “maker”. After entering this
code, all parameters, except for the special ones, can be modified.

Example 7: P.0001 =CCC P.0002 =III P.0003 =0

As no password is associated to the user, the parameters associated are freely

programmable, without entering any code in P.0000. When the user enters “III” in P.0000,
he can modify all parameters associated to “installer” and “end user”. When entering “CCC”
in P.0000, the operator is identified as “maker” and can modify all parameters, excluding
critical ones.

Example 8: P.0001 =CCC P.0002 =0 P.0003 =UUU

No parameter is modifiable. When the user enters the “UUU” code in P.0000, the controller
considers him “user”, but as no password is associated to “installer”, it considers him
“installer”. He can modify all parameters associated to the end user and the installer. When
entering “CCC” in P.0000, the operator is identified as “maker” and can modify all
parameters, excluding critical ones.

The parameter value can always be read, but the modification can be carried out only if
P.0000 contains a proper password. Parameters P.0001, P.0002, P.0003 and P.0469 are
excluded: they are not displayed in case P.0000 does not contain a proper password.

Parameter P.0469 (password for serial ports) is viewable and/or modifiable only from
operator panel and, at least, with installer rights.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 77

 6.5.1.3 Operating procedure
This procedure will describe the keyboard and display use.

P.07 PROGRAMMING _
Main Menu 1/06

1 System
2 Sequence
3 Protections
4 Auxiliary functions
5 Communication

 1 (SYSTEM). The menu 1-SYSTEM allows first to indicate how the controller is connected
to the mains and to the generator bus, and the plant type. It is most important to correctly
set these parameters as nearly all thresholds for the protection activation are expressed
in percentage compared to them.

 2 (SEQUENCE). Working sequence configuration can be modified through the menu 2-

SEQUENCE. In this menu, the threshold percentages can be set, the time of acquisition
and enabling/disabling of the functions related to the operation sequences.

 3 (PROTECTIONS). Protections management is accessible through the menu 3-

PROTECTION. As to this, it is important to know that, to enable/disable a protection, you
may simply modify the associated time, leaving the threshold unchanged: by setting the
time to zero, the protection is disabled. However, this general rule provides some
exceptions. Refer to the chapter dedicated to the anomalies, par. 0, which describes each
disabling mode.

 4 (AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS). All that is not about the configuration of the system, the
sequence and protections is configurable from menu 4-AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS. In this
menu are other menus which configure calendars and history logs.

 5 (COMMUNICATION): In this menu are the communication settings for the serial ports,
for the ETHERNET port, for the USB port and the configuration for the modem.

 8 (PARALLEL): The menu 8-PARALLEL allows to configure all the functions related to
the parallel with the mains or among gensets.
6.5.1.3.1 Access to programming

The programming is accessible in any operation status of the controller, while the parameter
modification is generally possible only with the controller in OFF/RESET. To enter in
programming mode, it is required to act on ▲ and ▼ pushbuttons until the programming
screen appear (P.02).

If you are in a mode which puts some limitation in the use of the vertical scroll pushbuttons, it
might be necessary to press one or more times the ESC/SHIFT pushbutton (e.g. when viewing
history logs or during operations).

Then press ENTER to enter programming.

At the start of the procedure, the menu o the variable used at the last exit from programming
is shown (at first entrance the main menu is shown). This is true if the programming procedure
has been previously abandoned changing the operation mode of the controller in MAN or
AUTO or after a maximum time of permanence without operating in programming or keeping
ESC/SHIFT pressed for more than two seconds.
6.5.1.3.2 Menu selection

The name of the current menu is always shown in the first line, followed by the numeric ID of
the selected item and the number of menu items. The further lines of the display are used to
view the menu items, that is, the submenus. The item selected is drawn in REVERSE. Using

78 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 ▲ and ▼ pushbuttons, the menu scrolls respectively towards the top or bottom index items,
in a cyclical way (that is, pressing ▲ from the first item you pass to the last and vice-versa).

Pressing ACK/ENTER button, you enter a selected submenu (the one highlighted), pressing
ESC/SHIFT you leave the menu (going back to the previous menu or leaving the programming
to the basic screen if you were already on the main menu).
6.5.1.3.3 Parameters selection

The name of the current menu is always shown in the first line, followed by the numeric Id of
the selected item and the number of menu items. The next display lines are all used to view a
single parameter:

• Fourth and fifth rows show the univocal parameter code (four decimal digits) followed
by the description in the current language.

• The seventh line shows, aligned on the right, the value of the variable, enclosed
between square brackets or “< >”.

• For some parameters, on the ninth line, a value someway connected to the current
value of the parameter is shown. For example, in the case of the low mains frequency
threshold (P.0236), the equivalent voltage is shown, calculated from the mains
nominal voltage (P.0116) and by the parameter itself (%). This additional value is often
displayed when the parameter is expressed as percentage compared to some other
value to show the absolute value.

• The last line of the display shows the protection level given to the operator (SICES,
maker, installer or user).

Using ▲ and ▼ buttons, the menu scrolls respectively towards the top or bottom index items,
in a cyclical way (that is, pressing ▲ from the first item you pass to the last and vice-versa).
Pressing ACK/ENTER button, the modification procedure of the parameter activates (see next
paragraph), pressing ESC/SHIFT button you leave the menu (going back to the previous
menu).
6.5.1.3.4 Modification of a parameter

A parameter can be modified only if shown between squared brackets ([]); if between “<>”, it
cannot be modified. In this case, it could be necessary to set a suitable password or to put the
controller in OFF/RESET mode.

Once visualized a parameter, to start modifying it, it is necessary to press the ACK/ENTER
pushbutton. To confirm the new value, it is necessary to press ACK/ENTER; to cancel the
modification and go back to the original value just press ESC/SHIFT.

There are the following types of parameter:

• Bits: Some parameters are managed in bit. Each bit at 1 enables a function and each
bit at 0 disables a function. Up to 16 bit can be used. A hexadecimal value is attributed
to each bit. The parameter must be set with the result of the sum of the hexadecimal
values linked to the functions to be enabled. The setting happens as described for the
strings, with the exception that it is possible to select only hexadecimal characters
(0...9, A....F).

In the description of these parameters, there will be a chart like the following:
Bit Value Description
1 0001 Enable function 1
2 0002 Enable function 2
3 0004 Enable function 3
4 0008 Enable function 4
5 0010 Enable function 5
6 0020 Enable function 6
7 0040 Enable function 7
8 0080 Enable function 8

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 79

 9 0100 Enable function 9
10 0200 Enable function 10
11 0400 Enable function 11
12 0800 Enable function 12
13 1000 Enable function 13
14 2000 Enable function 14
15 4000 Enable function 15
16 8000 Enable function 16

If the operator wants to:

 Disable all functions: he must set 0000 in the related parameter.

 Enable the functions from 1 to 8: the value to be set is given by the hexadecimal
sum 0001+0002+0004+0008+0010+0020+0040+0080 = 00FF.

 Enable e.g. functions 3, 4, 6 and 8: the value to be set is given by the sum of
0004+0008+0020+0080 = 00AC.

 Numeric: the value is modifiable using ▲▼ buttons, respectively to increase or

decrease the value of one unit (if these buttons are pressed together with ESC/SHIFT,
the value will be increased or decreased of ten units at a time). The modification is
cyclical: trying to increase the value when it is already at the maximum, it passes to
the minimum, and vice-versa.

 Numerical with selection among a default list (e.g. the number of phases of the
mains): it is valid what said for the numerical parameters, considering that the ▲▼
buttons allows to pass to the following /previous value in the default list (pressed with
ESC/SHIFT button, allow to pass to the value which follows/precedes the current one
of ten positions).

 Numeric selected in a number-string couples list (e.g. the function of a digital

input): same as the previous point.

 Time: it is valid what said for the numeric parameter, except for the fact that the
controller manages the increasing/decreasing keeping valid values (e.g. increasing
from 00.59” to “01.00” and not to "00.60").

 Strings (e.g. phone numbers): in this case the visualizer highlights (in reverse) the
character selected on the string. The ▲▼ pushbuttons work on the selected character
(passing to next/previous character of the ASCII table or jumping by ten positions
ahead/back if ESC/SHIFT is pressed too), whereas ◄► pushbuttons allow selecting
the character to modify. Characters ASCII from 32 (space) to 127 (escape) are
settable. Characters ASCII (over 127) and those of control (from zero to 31) are
not settable.

 Hexadecimal strings (e.g. the bit polarity of the outputs): as for string parameters,
but the selectable parameters are only “0-9” and “A-F” (these last in capital letters
only).
6.5.1.3.5 Set up limits

The operator does not have to worry about verifying that the set value is acceptable for the
controller since it is not possible to set not acceptable values.

This is valid for each single parameter; it is possible, though, to set two or more parameters in
contradictory or incompatible way. The operator must verify that this does not happens.
6.5.1.3.6 Exit from programming

There are three ways to exit the programming:

• Press ESC/SHIFT n times to climb up again to the main menu and then press it again
to exit the programming. Coming a next time into programming, it will be show main
menu.

80 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 • Keep ESC/SHIFT pressed for two seconds from any position: you will exit immediately
the programming and you will find yourself exactly at the same point at the next
entrance.

• Changing the controller mode to AUTO or MAN: next entry will be exactly in same
point.
6.5.1.4 Loading default values

WARNING: This procedure reloads in a permanent way the default parameters in

function of the access rights.

In certain situations, it can be useful to reload the default parameters. To do so, it is necessary
to select first the OFF/RESET mode, enter programming, then keep the ACK/ENTER and
ESC/SHIFT buttons pressed at the same time and consecutively for five seconds. A message
on the display will indicate to the operator the happened reloading of the default values. The
default values are only reloaded for those parameters for which you have access rights.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 81

 6.5.2 Status information (S.XX)
In this mode, the information on the system status are supplied. You can scroll through the
various pages using the LEFT and RIGHT buttons.
6.5.2.1 S.01 STATUS
Page S.01 (STATUS) shows system status information. Part of this information is displayed in
the upper title bar if you press and hold the ESC/SHIFT button. It contains:

 Working mode of the controller (MAN, AUTO, etc.).

 The status of the operation sequence (idle, starting the gensets etc.).

 The status of protections for the parallel with the mains.

 The electric mains status (absent, low, high, etc.).

 The eventual presence of inhibition to start the generators.

 The eventual presence of inhibition to connect the loads to the generators.

 The eventual activation of protections override.

 The signalling of some genset in condition of “GCB not open”.

For many information, a time is also shown; for example, during the generators stopping cycle
the lasting time is shown at the end of that cycle.
6.5.2.2 S.02 ANOMALIES
The page S.02 (ANOMALIES) is automatically displayed in case a new anomaly arises. For
every anomaly, it is shown:

 A letter identifying the type of it:

o “A”: alarm.

o “U”: unload.

o “W”: Warning.

 A three-digit numeric code that uniquely identify the anomaly. This code flashes if the
anomaly has not been acknowledged yet with ACK/ENTER.

 An alphanumeric description, based on the currently selected language and that in

some cases can be customized through the controller parameters.

Each anomaly uses two lines of the display. The anomaly shown on the top is the more recent
in chronological order. If space is not sufficient to show all the pending anomalies, only the
most recent ones are shown. To see also the other, you must:

 Press the ACK/ENTER pushbutton.

 Use the ▲▼ pushbuttons to scroll the anomalies.

 Press ESC/SHIFT to leave the mode.

Some anomalies can show additional diagnostic information. This information is automatically
viewed if an anomaly is active: if there are many anomalies active, use the procedure
described above to select the single anomalies and see the eventual additional diagnostic
information regarding the selected anomaly. The anomalies with additional diagnostic
information are:

• 273 (Parameters not coherent or not set). It shows an additional message helping to
understand the problem.

82 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 • 252 (EXBUS: some modules are missing). It shows an additional message that
identifies the configured expansion module, that does not communicate with MC400.

• 253: (EXBUS: some measures are missing). It shows an additional message that
identifies the acquisition channel and the expansion module from which we expect to
receive a measure, which is lacking instead.

• 254 (EXBUS: duplicated address). It shows an additional message that identifies the
type and the address of the expansion module that is connected twice to MC400.

• 255 (EXBUS: sensor disconnected). It shows an additional message that identifies the
channel of acquisition and the expansion module which is sending the information of
“broken wire”.
6.5.2.3 S.03 BOARD STATUS
This page is dedicated to the information of the device and contains:

 The current date and hour in extended format (flashing is the clock is not valid).

 The serial number univocal for the controller.

 The code of the software currently uploaded on the controller (see par. 1.6).

 The internal code necessary to obtain a temporary SICES level password (see 6.5.1.2).

 The power supply voltage.

 The language currently used by the device. It is also possible to select a different
language: press ACK/ENTER button, select the language with buttons ▲ and ▼ and
confirm with ACK/ENTER button. Note: MC400 is supplied only with ENGLISH and
PORTUGUESE languages. With BoardPrg3 program it is possible to transfer other
languages to the controller.
6.5.2.4 S.04 SERIAL COMMUNICATION
This page is dedicated to the status of the communication towards the serial ports and the
USB port. In the case of operating problems, check the information in this page.

For each port the status (stand-by, communicating, etc.) and the counter of receiving errors
are displayed. To reset an error counter, you must:

 Press ACK/ENTER: the controller highlights the error counter of the serial port
COM1.

 Use the vertical arrows to highlight the counter to be reset.

 Press ACK/ENTER + ESC/SHIFT for 5 seconds: at the end, the controller resets the
counter.

 Press ESC/SHIFT.

If a modem is connected to the controller, is also shown:

 The modem model.

 In case of a GSM modem:

o The name of the telephone provider.

o The GSM signal level.

6.5.2.5 S.05 NETWORK
This page is dedicated to the status of the connection and communication on the ETHERNET
interface.

The controller shows:

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 83

  The status of the connection:

o “idle”: no communication running, and Ethernet cable disconnected.

o “idle-linked”: no communication running, and Ethernet cable connected.

o “Communic. In progress”: communication running.

 The MAC address of the physical net interface.

 The IP address of the controller, the address of the router/gateway, the Subnet-mask
and the DNS server address. Those values can be the ones set with the parameters
of the controller, or those dynamically acquired by server DHCP (see 5.11.4).
6.5.2.6 S.07 CAN bus
This page displays the status of the CAN bus interfaces of the controller. MC400 has two
interfaces. Each interface displays

 The communication status of the bus. There are three possible signalling:

o ERROR-ACTIVE: normal operation.

o ERROR-PASSIVE: communication is working despite faults (errors).

o BUS-OFF: Gen-set has interrupted the connection to the bus due to too many
errors.

 Communication error counters are displayed. The counters of the instantaneous

transmission/reception errors and the maximum values reached are displayed. It is
possible to reset the maximum values (and force the output status of BUS-OFF) by
pressing for 5 seconds the buttons ACK/ENTER and ESC/SHIFT. Since two CAN
interfaces are present, it is necessary to select the desired CAN interface first and
then reset the counters: to select an interface press ACK/ENTER digit and use ▲ and
▼ digits.
6.5.2.7 S.08-09-10 GENERIC STATUS
These pages are dedicated to the view of the generic statuses acquired through the digital
inputs, configured with functions DIF.3201 and DIF.3202 (page 1), DIF.3203 and DIF.3204
(page 2), DIF.3205 and DIF.3206 (page 3).

The page uses one line for each configured input. If more than 6 inputs are configured, the
controller will display all of them in rotation (6 at a time) every 2 seconds: keeping ESC/SHIFT
button pressed you stop the rotation. If there are no configured inputs on a page, the page is
not displayed.

On each line, the controller shows the configured text for the digital input and the logical status
of it.

If you use functions DIF.3202, DIF.3204 and DIF.3206, when the input changes from non-
active to active, the controller forces the view of the relative page.
6.5.2.8 S.11 DIGITAL INPUTS
This page shows the status of:

 Digital inputs of the controller.

 Analogue inputs used as digital (if they are not used as digital they are displayed with
dashes).

 Virtual digital inputs.

Pressing ACK/ENTER button, it is possible to change (cyclically) the ways the controller
shows the inputs:

84 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

  LOGICAL STATE: the controller shows the input’s logic level (active or inactive) used
in the management of the operating sequence.

 PHISICAL STATE: the controller shows the electrical level (active or inactive, or high
or low) present on the input; this can be the opposite in comparison to the
corresponding logic state. Displayed in REVERSE.

 FOR FUNCTION: the controller shows a list of functions associated to the digital
inputs, showing the logic status (1/0) relative to each function, independently from the
input associated to the functions. If more than 8 functions are configured, the controller
will display all of them in rotation (8 at a time) every 2 seconds: keeping ESC/SHIFT
button pressed you stop the rotation.
6.5.2.9 S.12 DIGITAL INPUTS
This page is only shown if some DITEL modules have been configured (see 5.8). It displays
the status of the digital inputs acquired from DITEL digital modules. If a DITEL module does
not communicate correctly, the controller will display some dashes in place of the input’s
status. Pressing ACK/ENTER button, it is possible to change (cyclically) the ways the
controller shows the inputs:

 LOGICAL STATE: the controller shows the input’s logic level (active or inactive) used
in the management of the operating sequence.

 PHISICAL STATE: the controller shows the electrical level (active or inactive, or high
or low) present on the input; this can be the opposite in comparison to the
corresponding logic state. Displayed in REVERSE.
6.5.2.10 S.13 DIGITAL OUTPUTS
This page shows the status of the digital outputs of the controller. Pressing the ACK/ENTER
button, it is possible to change (cyclically) the ways the controller shows the outputs:

 LOGICAL STATE: the controller shows the output’s logic level (active or inactive)
used in the management of the operating sequence.

 PHISICAL STATE: the controller shows the electrical level (active or inactive, or high
or low) present on the output; this can be the opposite in comparison to the
corresponding logic state. Displayed in REVERSE.

 FOR FUNCTION: the controller shows a list of functions associated to the digital
outputs, showing the logic status (1/0) relative to each function, independently from
the output associated to the functions. If more than 6 functions are configured, the
controller will display all of them in rotation (6 at a time) every 2 seconds: keeping
ESC/SHIFT button pressed you stop the rotation.
6.5.2.11 S.14 DIGITAL OUTPUTS
This page is only shown if some DITEL modules have been configured (see 5.8). It displays
the status of the digital outputs acquired from DITEL digital modules. If a DITEL module does
not communicate correctly, the controller will display some dashes in place of the output’s
status. Pressing ACK/ENTER button, it is possible to change (cyclically) the ways the
controller shows the outputs:

 LOGICAL STATE: the controller shows the output’s logic level (active or inactive)
used in the management of the operating sequence.

 PHISICAL STATE: the controller shows the electrical level (active or inactive, or high
or low) present on the output; this can be the opposite in comparison to the
corresponding logic state. Displayed in REVERSE.
6.5.2.12 S.15 ANALOGUE INPUTS
The page shows the value of the analogue inputs of the controller (connector JM) and of the
emergency stop (EM-S). Pressing ACK/ENTER button, it is possible to change (cyclically) the
ways the controller shows the inputs:

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 85

  PHYSICAL STATE: Foe each input a measure in Volt is displayed.

 FOR FUNCTION: the controller shows a list of functions associated to the analogue
inputs, showing the real acquired value, independently from the input associated to
the functions. If more than 6 functions are used for the analogue inputs, the controller
will display all of them in rotation (6 at a time) every 2 seconds: keeping the
ESC/SHIFT button pressed you stop the rotation.
6.5.2.13 S.16 ANALOGUE INPUTS
This page is only shown if some DITHERM or DIGRIN modules have been configured (see
5.8).
On the left side, the type of module connected is shown ((DIGRIN, DITHERM or DITEMP if
the module does not communicate correctly). On the right side, it shows the temperatures
acquired by the modules. They can be replaced by:
 “------“: if the expansion module does not transmit the measurement.
 “OPEN”: if the module signals that the sensor is disconnected.
 “+OVER”: if the module signals that the input signal has a too high value, symptom of
a fault.
 “-OVER”: if the module signals that the input signal has a too low value, symptom of
a fault.
6.5.2.14 S.17 ANALOGUE INPUTS
This page is only shown if some DIVIT modules have been configured (see 5.8).
On the right side, it shows the measures acquired by the modules (without any conversion).
They can be replaced by:
 “------“: if the expansion module does not transmit the measurement.
 “OPEN”: if the module signals that the sensor is disconnected.
 “+OVER”: if the module signals that the input signal has a too high value, symptom of
a fault.
 “-OVER”: if the module signals that the input signal has a too low value, symptom of
a fault.
6.5.2.15 S.18 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
This page shows the percentage value currently associated to the two analogue outputs of the
controller.

Pressing ACK/ENTER you arrive to a view per function: the controller shows a list of the
functions associated to the analogue outputs, displaying the analogue value relative to each
function, independently from the output associated to the functions. If more than 6 functions
are used for the digital outputs, the controller will display all of them in rotation (6 at a time)
every 2 seconds: keeping the ESC/SHIFT button pressed you stop the rotation.
6.5.2.16 S.19 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
This page is only shown if some DANOUT modules have been configured (see 5.8).
It shows the percentage value currently associated to the four analogue outputs of each
DANOUT module (the real corresponding electrical measure depends on the configuration
done inside the module DANOUT). The values are shown in reverse if the DANOUT module
is not communicating correctly.
6.5.2.17 S.20 MAINS PROTECTIONS
The page is displayed only if the type of plant considers the parallel with the mains.

It displays the status of all protections of parallel with the mains. The disabled protections are
not displayed. For each protection enabled, the controller displays the initial (for example
“27<<”): it is displayed in reverse if the protection has trip (mains out of tolerance).

86 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 Possible codes are: “27<<”, “27<”, “27T”, “27Q”, “59>”, “59>>”, “81<<”, “81<”, “81>”, “81>>”,
“81R”, “VJ”, “DI” (by contact). See document [8].

6.5.3 Electrical measurements (M.XX)

In this mode, all the measurements taken by the controller on the electric lines are shown. You
can scroll through the various pages using the LEFT and RIGHT buttons.
6.5.3.1 M.01 SYSTEM
This page displays a wiring diagram of the system, highlighting:

 The mains. The symbol of the mains is solid if the mains is within the tolerance range
and flashing if the mains is missing or if it exceeds the tolerance range.

 The generator. The symbol of the generator is in “reverse” if the engine is started and
if the generator is powered.

 The loads. The symbol of the load is displayed in “reverse” if the loads are powered
from the mains or from the generator.

 The GCB, MCB and MGCB circuit breakers. The symbol of the circuit breaker shows:

o The open/close status.

o The discrepancy between the status and the circuit breaker command (in this
case, the two circuit breaker’s points of contacts flash).

o The possibility to use the synchronization to close the circuit breaker (if the
synchronization can be used, the two circuit breaker’s points of contacts are
empty squares, otherwise they are full).

 The power flows, displayed as arrows, in all the parts of the plant. Each arrow points
to the power direction. The arrow flashes (to indicate an anomaly) of negative power
on the loads and on the generators bus.

 The active power measurement and of the power factor in the different parts of the
plant.

 The active power and the power factor setpoints for the operation in parallel with the
mains.

With parameter P.0494 it is possible to customise the page, hiding one or more of the previous
information.

6.5.3.2 M.02 MAINS

This page shows the Phase-Phase concatenated voltages and the frequency of the electrical
mains, in addition to the rotation direction of the phases (clockwise or counter clockwise). For
three-phase systems, the phase-to-phase voltages are displayed; for the one-phase systems,
the single-phase voltage is displayed (the others are replaced by dashes) and the rotation
direction is not displayed.

To the bottom right there is an icon that allows immediate identification of the fact that the page
is related to the MAINS measures.

6.5.3.3 M.03 MAIN 2

This page shows only for three-phase systems and only if the system is configured to use the
neutral connection (see par. 5.11.1). The three vphase-neutral voltages are shown and the
negative of the battery, in addition to the rotation direction of the phases (clockwise or
counterclockwise).

To the bottom right there is an icon that allows immediate identification of the fact that the page
is related to the MAINS measures.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 87

 6.5.3.4 M.04 GENERATORS BUS
This page shows the Phase-to-Phase concatenated voltages and the frequency of the
generators bus, in addition to the rotation direction of the phases (clockwise or counter
clockwise). For three-phase systems, the phase-to-phase voltages are displayed; for the one-
phase systems, the phase-to-neutral voltage and the voltage between neutral and negative
battery are displayed and the rotation direction is not displayed.

To the bottom right there is an icon that allows immediate identification of the fact that the page
is related to the GENERATOR measures.

6.5.3.5 M.05 GENERATORS BUS 2

This page is only shown for the three-phase systems and only if the system is configured to
use the neutral connection (see par. 5.12.1). The three phase-to-neutral voltages are shown
and the voltage between the neutral and the battery negative are displayed, in addition to the
rotation direction of the phases (clockwise or counter clockwise).

To the bottom right there is an icon that allows immediate identification of the fact that the page
is related to the GENERATOR measures.
6.5.3.6 M.06 CURRENTS
In this page, phase currents are displayed (one or three) measured by the controller. At the
bottom-right corner, the controller shows one symbol which immediately permits to identify the
real source of the currents (mains, loads or generators bus).

Under each phase current, the controller also displays a bar showing graphically the current
measure with respect to the nominal current: on the bar are also represented eventual
thresholds. The colour with which the bar is filled is green if the current is in tolerance, red if it
is out of tolerance.

For three-phase systems also the negative sequence current is displayed.

If the fourth current is suitably configured, the controller will also display:

 Ax: auxiliary current (visible if P.0131=1 or P.0131=4).

 An: neutral current (visible if P.0131=2).

6.5.3.7 M.07 POWERS
The active powers and power factors are shown, total and phase by phase (for single-phase
systems only the total values are shown).

At the bottom-right corner, the controller shows one symbol which immediately permits to
identify the real source of the powers (mains, loads or generators bus).
6.5.3.8 M.08 POWERS 2
The apparent and reactive powers are shown, total and phase by phase (for single-phase
systems only the total values are shown).

At the bottom-right corner, the controller shows one symbol which immediately permits to
identify the real source of the powers (mains, loads or generators bus).
6.5.3.9 M.09 ENERGY METERS
In this page the active and reactive energy counters (partial and total) exported by the plant
to the mains are shown.

On this page, you can reset to zero the partial counters individually. To do so, it is necessary
to:

 Press the ACK/ENTER button: one of the counters will result highlighted.

 Use the vertical scrolling UP and DOWN buttons to select the counter to be reset.

88 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

  Press the ACK/ENTER button and ESC/SHIFT buttons for 5 seconds.

 Press the ESC/SHIFT pushbutton.

At the bottom to the right, the display shows an icon which identifies the mains, to allow you
to easily distinguish this page from the next, which have an identical structure.
6.5.3.10 M.10 ENERGY COUNTERS
In this page the active and reactive energy counters (partial and total) imported from the
mains to the plant are shown.

On this page, you can reset to zero the partial counters individually. To do so, it is necessary
to:

 Press the ACK/ENTER button: one of the counters will result highlighted.

 Use the vertical scrolling UP and DOWN buttons to select the counter to be reset.

 Press the ACK/ENTER button and ESC/SHIFT buttons for 5 seconds.

 Press the ESC/SHIFT pushbutton.

At the bottom to the right, the display shows an icon which identifies the mains, to allow you
to easily distinguish this page from the next, which have an identical structure.
6.5.3.11 M.11 ENERGY METERS
In this page the active and reactive energy counters (partial and total) exported by the
generators to the plant are shown.

On this page, you can reset to zero the partial counters individually. To do so, it is necessary
to:

 Press the ACK/ENTER button: one of the counters will result highlighted.

 Use the vertical scrolling UP and DOWN buttons to select the counter to be reset.

 Press the ACK/ENTER button and ESC/SHIFT buttons for 5 seconds.

 Press the ESC/SHIFT pushbutton.

At the bottom to the right, the display shows an icon which identifies the generators, to allow
you to easily distinguish this page from the previous, which have an identical structure.
6.5.3.12 M.12 ENERGY METERS
In this page the reactive energy counters (partial) imported by the generators from the plant
are shown.

On this page, you can reset to zero the partial counters individually. To do so, it is necessary
to:

 Press the ACK/ENTER button: one of the counters will result highlighted.

 Press the ACK/ENTER button and ESC/SHIFT buttons for 5 seconds.

 Press the ESC/SHIFT pushbutton.

At the bottom to the right, the display shows an icon which identifies the generators, to allow
you to easily distinguish this page from the previous, which have an identical structure.
6.5.3.13 M.13 REGULATIONS
This page is useful in the parallel applications. It displays the generators bus and mains
voltages and frequencies at the same time. It is then possible to modify the offsets for the
speed and voltage:

 Press the ACK/ENTER button: one of the values is highlighted.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 89

  Using the ACK/ENTER button or ◄► buttons, you select the other value (cyclically).

 Using ▲ and ▼ buttons, it is possible to modify the selected value (if pressed together
with ESC/SHIFT the modification is quicker).

 Press the ESC/SHIFT button to end the modification.

The modification is automatically interrupted if you don’t press any digits for 10 seconds.

Note: some of these setpoints can be acquired from the analogue inputs: in this case
on this page they are shown, but it is not possible to modify them.
6.5.3.14 M.14 SYNCHRONISATION
This page shows the necessary information for the synchronization.
On the right side, the controller displays a gauge which graphically shows a synchronoscope,
indicating the current phase through a needle.
On the left side, the controller displays the current phase difference through a horizontal bar,
which act as a synchronoscope. Usually it shows phase angles between -180° and +180°.
When the phase error falls below 20°, the bar is reduced to show angles between -20° and
+20° (in this case the bar is on black background). Under the bar 5 small rectangles are shown.
The first three indicate if the voltage, frequency and phase differences allow the closure of the
circuit breaker (if the rectangle is grey, the difference is too high and the circuit breaker cannot
be closed, if it is green the difference is in tolerance). The fourth one indicates a possible
mismatch of phase-rotation direction (also in this case the grey rectangle indicates that the
circuit breaker cannot be closed). When all the first four rectangles are entirely “green”, the
status of the system is correct to close the circuit breaker: so, the fifth rectangle becomes
green and the board controls the closing of the circuit breaker.
Still on the left side, the controller displays numerically the difference of phase, frequency and
voltage between gensets and mains.
On the bottom of the page there are offsets for the speed and voltage. If these values are not
related to an analogue input, it is possible to directly modify them from this page (see previous
paragraph). In this way, it is possible to make a manual synchronization.
6.5.3.15 M.15 SETPOINTS
This page shows and allows to modify (in a unique point) all the applicable setpoints for the
plant, relative to the frequency, to the voltage, to the active power and to the power factor. It
is useful because on page M.01 are instead shown only the significant setpoints in a given
moment. For example, if a plant can operate both in BASE LOAD mode and in
IMPORT/EXPORT mode, on page M.01 only the setpoints relative to the active operation
mode will be shown, while on page M.15 they will all be shown: in this way, the operator can
set the setpoints before changing the operation mode. The displayed and modifiable setpoints
(if not acquired from analogue inputs) are:

 Offset of speed (P.0840).

 Offset of voltage (P.0867).

 Setpoint of active power for the SYSTEM BASE LOAD (P.0858) and for the SYSTEM
IMPORT EXPORT (P.0859) modes.

 Setpoint of power factor for the SYSTEM BASE LOAD and for the SYSTEM IMPORT
EXPORT modes (P.0860).

The setpoints are only shown if they are not acquired from analogue inputs and if they are
included in the plant configuration.
6.5.3.16 M.16-17-18 EXTERNAL MEASURES
These pages are dedicated to the displaying of the measurements acquired from the analogue
inputs configured as "generic sensor". The operator has the option to acquire measures that
are not in any way linked to the controller, and to show them on the display. It can also group
them (by any standard), and display them on one of the 3 available pages.

90 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 The division of the measures on the different pages is done via the function configured in the
analogue inputs:

 AIF.2001: page M.16.

 AIF.2003: page M.17.

 AIF.2005: page M.18.

The controller shows one measurement per line: it shows the text configured for the analogue
input (P.4002 for the analogue 1), followed by the unit of measure and by the measure itself.
If more than 6 measurements are associated to one of these pages, the controller shows them
all, rotating them every 2 seconds: keep the ESC/SHIFT button pressed to stop the rotation
on the current view.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 91

 6.5.4 Measurement from CAN bus PMCB (B.XX)
These pages show the measurement and the statuses acquired by the CAN bus PMCB, which
connects among them all SICES devices.
6.5.4.1 B.01 MC/BTB DEVICES ON PMCB
This page shows the list of the mains controllers and of the tie breaker controllers recognised
on the CAN bus PMCB connection. It is useful for diagnostic purposes.

On the top, the PMCB addresses of all mains controllers (MCxxx) are displayed. On the
bottom, the PMCB addresses of all tie breaker controllers (BTBxxx) are displayed.

The board shows the message "MC" in “reverse” if is working on MC200 mode (P.9506 = 1).
6.5.4.2 B.02-03-04-05 GENSETS
These pages show the significant data of each genset controller that operates on the PMBC
CAN bus. Each page shows up to 6 gensets. Only the relevant pages are shown. It is used
one line for each genset, which contains:

• The PMCB address of the genset. MC400 shows the PMCB address in “reverse” if,
now, it is not able to manage this genset (for example if the related genset controller
is in OFF_RESET mode or has some alarms).

• The active power supplied by the genset.

• The reactive power supplied by the genset.

If the parameter P.9506 is set to zero, MC400 acts as the old MC100 controller:

In AUTO mode, MC400 starts and stops the generators as required by the loads. Using
these pages, the operator can modify this behaviour. For each generator, the operator can
select one of these operating modes:

• Automatic management (default). MC400 starts/stops the generator as required

by load. In this case, a “blank field” is shown on the display between PMCBUS
address and nominal power of the selected generator.

• Generator always working. Whatever the load is, this generator must work. In this
case, a “full square” is shown on the display between the genset address and the
nominal power of the selected genset.

• Generator always stopped. Whatever the load is, this generator must be stopped.
In this case, an “empty square” is shown on the display between the genset
address and the nominal power of the selected genset.

It is possible to choose the desired operating mode for each generator directly from these
pages:

• Press ACK/ENTER pushbutton:

• By using ▲▼pushbuttons, select the desired genset.

• Change the desired operating mode using ◄►pushbuttons.

• Press ESC/SHIFT to exit selection mode.

Note: if no buttons are pressed for 60 seconds, the selecting procedure is automatically
finished.
6.5.4.3 B.06 TOTALS ON PMCB
This page shows the totals calculated on all the genset controllers connected on CAN bus
PMCB. The following are shown:

 The total nominal power of the supplying gensets (MDPt, kW).

92 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

  The current load ratio of the generators bus (DPRt, %).

 The total active power supplied (kW).

 The total reactive power supplied (kvar).

 The total active energy (kWh, sum of energy counters of all genset control boards).

 The total reactive energy (kvar, sum of energy counters of all genset control boards).
6.5.4.4 B.07 LOAD FUNCTION
This page is dedicated to the functions of “load management” (see [8]). By the term “load
management” is intended the capacity of the system to start/stop the gensets to only have the
strictly necessary gensets running to supply the load (with a small margin, but not too much).
This page shows some information relevant for this function.

The information shown is:

 The enabling for this controller of the “load management” function.

 The “load management” mode currently selected (it establish the criteria with which
the genset to be started are chosen).

 The “master” (it is the primary genset, the one which would not be ever stopped). For
some “load management” modes this information is not displayed.

 Based on the selected mode, the controller can show in how many hours (or at which
time) the system will select a new “master” genset.

 The list of the genset controllers, ordered based on the priority (first the genset with
major priority, the last to be stopped). For some “load management” modes this
information is not displayed.

It is possible to manually select the “master” genset directly from this page:

 Press the ACK/ENTER button.

 Use ▲▼buttons to select the address of the “master” genset selected.

 Confirm with ACK/ENTER button.

6.5.4.5 B.08 LOAD MANAGEMENT
This page is dedicated to the functions of “load management” (see [8]). By the term “load
management” is intended the capacity of the system to start/stop the gensets to only have the
strictly necessary gensets running to supply the load (with a small margin, but not too much).
This page shows some information relevant for this function.

The information shown is:

 The power supplied by the gensets (percentage with respect to the maximum power
the gensets currently running can afford).

 The threshold (%) to compare with the power calculated at the previous point, over
which a new genset must be started (or it is necessary to pass to a combination of
gensets with a higher nominal power).

 The power supplied by the gensets (percentage relative to the maximum) calculated
in case the less priority genset is stopped (or combination of gensets with less nominal
power).

 The threshold (%) to compare with the power calculated at the previous point, under
which a new genset must be started (or it is necessary to pass to a combination of
gensets with a lower nominal power).

Some of these measurements can be viewed in reverse to indicate an “out of threshold”

situation (which can require the start or stop of the genset).

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 93

 When possible, the controller displays also the remaining time to the start of a new genset or
to the stop of one of the running gensets.
6.5.4.6 B.09 LOAD SHEDDING
This page is dedicated to the functions of “load shedding”. By the term “load shedding” is
intended the capacity of the system to disconnect/re-connect part of the loads if the generators
are not able to supply them. This page shows some information relevant for this function:

 The status of each group of loads (connected/disconnected). The function can

manage up to four groups.

 The status of this function (enabled/disabled).

 The power (%) supplied by the gensets, related to the thresholds for the disconnection
and re-connections of the groups of loads.

Some of these measurements can be shown in reverse to indicate an “out of threshold”

situation (which can require the disconnection or the re-connection of a group of loads).

When possible, the controller displays also the remaining time to the disconnection or the re-
connection of a group of loads.
6.5.4.7 B.10 PEAK SHAVING
This page is dedicated to the functions of “peak shaving” or “peak lopping”. By these terms is
intended the capacity of the system to start/stop the gensets when the consumption of the
loads from the mains is too high, in a way to limit the loads consumption from the mains. This
page shows some information relevant for this function:

 The status of this function (enabled/disabled).

 The power (%) of the loads, related to the thresholds for starting/stopping the
generators.

Some of these measurements can be viewed in reverse to indicate an “out of threshold”

situation (which can require the start or stop of the gensets).

When possible, the controller displays also the remaining time to the start of a new genset or
to the stop of one of the running gensets.

94 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 6.5.5 History logs (H.xx)
During the operation, apart from the OFF/RESET mode, the controller makes periodic
registration or on event, partially configured with the programming parameters.

The controller manages three types of archive:

1. Events.

2. Analogue measures.

3. Maximum peaks.

These archives can be accessed in any function mode and status of the controller. To select
the function, use the buttons ▲ and ▼ until the HISTORY ARCHIVE (H.01) base page is
shown.

If you are in a mode which limits the use of vertical scrolling buttons, it might be
necessary to press ESC/SHIFT button one or more times.

Then press the ACK/ENTER button to activate the mode (pass to page “H.03”). At the starting
of the procedure, the menu with the different archive function is shown.
6.5.5.1 Archive selection

H.03 LOGS _
HISTORY LOGS 1/05

1 EVENTS
2 FAST ANALOGUES
3 SLOW ANALOGUES
4 MAX. PEAKS

The second line always shows the numeric indication of the function selected and the number
of functions in the menu. The next lines are all used to show the selectable functions. The
selected item is highlighted in negative (REVERSE).
Using ▲ and ▼ buttons, the menu scrolls respectively towards the top or bottom index items,
in a cyclical way (that is, pressing ▲ from the first item you pass to the last and vice-versa).

Pressing ACK/ENTER button the selected function activates (the one highlighted in negative),
pressing ESC/SHIFT you go back to page “H.01”.
6.5.5.2 Pages for events
In the moment in which some events happen (previously configured), the controller adds a
registration in this archive. The registration always contains date/hour, numeric code which
identifies the event and the controller status. Through BoardPrg3 program, it is possible to
select which other information must be registered at every event. It is possible to add maximum
44 information. The capacity of the archive depends on how many information are memorized
at every event: with default configuration, by the way, the total capacity is 523 registrations. If
the archive is full and a new event occurs, the less recent is overwritten.

Parameter P.0441 allows to select which events must be registered. It is a parameter

configurable at bit:
Bit Hexadecimal Firmware Description
value version
0 01 01.00 Board operating mode.
1 02 01.00 Mains status.
2 04 01.00 Generators bus status.
3 08 01.00 Mains fault protections.
4 10 01.00 Circuit breakers status.
5 20 01.00 Circuit breakers commands.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 95

 6 40 1.00 Start/stop requests.
7 80 01.00 Load disconnect.
8 100 01.00 Diagnostics.

A chart follows with the codes for all possible events.

Version Even if Registration cause.
Code
blocked.
EVT.1001 01.00 Yes OFF_RESET.
EVT.1002 01.00 Yes MAN.
EVT.1003 01.00 Yes AUTO.
EVT.1004 01.00 Yes TEST.
EVT.1005 01.00 Yes REMOTE START.

EVT.1010 01.00 Mains not present.

EVT.1011 01.00 Mains present.
EVT.1012 01.00 Mains in tolerance.

EVT.1013 01.00 Inhibition for start active (from configurable input).

EVT.1014 01.00 Inhibition for start not active (from configurable input).

EVT.1020 01.00 Genset not present.

EVT.1021 01.00 Genset present.
EVT.1022 01.00 Generator in tolerance.

EVT.1030 01.00 MGCB close command.

EVT.1031 01.00 MGCB open command.
EVT.1032 01.00 MGCB closed.
EVT.1033 01.00 MGCB open.

EVT.1035 01.00 MCB close command.

EVT.1036 01.00 MCB open command.
EVT.1037 01.00 MCB closed.
EVT.1038 01.00 MCB open.

EVT.1050 01.00 Manual start command.

EVT.1051 01.00 Manual stop command.
EVT.1052 01.00 Automatic start command.
EVT.1053 01.00 Automatic stop command.
EVT.1054 01.00 TEST start command from digital input.
EVT.1055 01.00 TEST stop command from digital input.
EVT.1056 01.00 TEST start command from communication port.
EVT.1057 01.00 TEST stop command from communication port.
EVT.1058 01.00 TEST start command from clock/calendar.
EVT.1059 01.00 TEST stop command from clock/calendar.
EVT.1060 01.00 TEST start command from SMS.
EVT.1061 01.00 TEST stop command from SMS.
EVT.1062 01.00 Automatic start command for failure to close MCB.

EVT.1074 01.00 Yes Reset

EVT.1075 01.00 Not valid clock (but used by some functions).
EVT.1076 01.00 Yes Update clock/calendar.
EVT.1077 01.00 Yes New power on of the controller.
EVT.1078 01.00 Yes Default values of parameters reloaded.

EVT.1080 01.00 Inhibition for supply activated (from configurable input).

EVT.1081 01.00 Inhibition for supply not activated.

EVT.1082 01.00 Protection override activated.

EVT.1083 01.00 Protection override deactivated.

96 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 EVT.1086 01.00 Yes Clock updated for daylight saving time.
EVT.1087 01.00 Yes Clock updated for standard time.

EVT.1091 01.00 Mains loss protection “27 U<<” tripped.

EVT.1092 01.00 Mains loss protection “59 U<<” tripped.
EVT.1093 01.00 Mains loss protection “81 f<<” tripped.
EVT.1094 01.00 Mains loss protection “81 f<<” tripped.
EVT.1095 01.00 Mains loss protection “81 R” (Df/Dt) tripped.
EVT.1096 01.00 Mains loss protection “Vector Jump” tripped.
EVT.1098 01.00 Mains loss protection (from contact) tripped.
EVT.1099 01.00 Mains loss protection restored.
EVT.1100 01.00 Mains loss protection “27 U<” tripped.
EVT.1101 01.00 Mains loss protection “59 U>” tripped.
EVT.1102 01.00 Mains loss protection “81 f<” tripped.
EVT.1103 01.00 Mains loss protection “81 f>” tripped.
EVT.1104 01.00 Mains loss protection “27T” tripped.
EVT.1105 01.00 Mains loss protection “27 U<& Q?" tripped.

EVT.1151 01.00 Mains loss protection “27 U<” restored.

EVT.1152 01.00 Mains loss protection “59 U>>” restored.
EVT.1153 01.00 Mains loss protection “81 f<<” restored.
EVT.1154 01.00 Mains loss protection “81 f>>” restored.
EVT.1155 01.00 Mains loss protection “81 R” (Df/Dt) restored.
EVT.1156 01.00 Mains loss protection “Vector Jump” restored.
EVT.1158 01.00 Mains loss protection (by contact) restored.
EVT.1160 01.00 Mains loss protection “27 U<” restored.
EVT.1161 01.00 Mains loss protection “59 U>” restored.
EVT.1162 01.00 Mains loss protection “81 f<” restored.
EVT.1163 01.00 Mains loss protection “81 f>” restored.
EVT.1164 01.00 Mains loss protection “27T” restored.
EVT.1165 01.00 Mains loss protection “27 U<& Q?” restored.

EVT.1201 01.00 Inhibition for supply activated (from mains out of

thresholds).
EVT.1202 01.00 Inhibition for supply activated (from communication
ports).
EVT.1203 01.00 Inhibition for supply activated (for some GCB not
opened).
EVT.1204 1.00 Inhibition for supply activated (for reverse
synchronization).

EVT.1221 01.00 Inhibition for start active (from clock/calendar).

EVT.1222 01.00 Inhibition for start not active (from clock/calendar).
EVT.1223 01.00 Inhibition for start active (for mains out of tolerance for
SPtM and MPtM plants).
EVT.1224 01.00 Inhibition for start not active (for mains out of tolerance
for SPtM and MPtM plants).
EVT.1225 01.00 Inhibition for start active (for GCB not opened).
EVT.1226 01.00 Inhibition for start not active (for GCB not opened).

EVT.1291 01.00 Load function: new master genset.

EVT.1321 01.00 Load shedding: load #1 disconnected.

EVT.1322 01.00 Load shedding: load #1 re-connected.
EVT.1323 01.00 Load shedding: load #2 disconnected.
EVT.1324 01.00 Load shedding: load #2 re-connected.
EVT.1325 01.00 Load shedding: load #3 disconnected.
EVT.1326 01.00 Load shedding: load #3 re-connected.
EVT.1327 01.00 Load shedding: load #4 disconnected.
EVT.1328 01.00 Load shedding: load #4 re-connected.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 97

 EVT.1321 01.00 Number of gensets connected to bus PMCB varied

EVT.1331 01.00 Peak shaving: request to start the generators.

EVT.1332 01.00 Peak shaving: request to stop the generators.

The column “even if blocked” indicates which events are anyway recorded even if the records
are blocked (see 6.5.5.4)

All the anomalies are recorded into the events log. They are recorded with their own numerical
code, added to:

• 2000: if the anomaly is a warning.

• 3000: if the anomaly is an unload.

• 5000: if the anomaly is an alarm.

For example, anomaly 273 will be recorded as "2273" when it is activated as a warning, as
"5273" if it is activated as an alarm. By viewing the event directly from the controller, the event
code "2273" is automatically displayed as "W273", the code 5273 is displayed as "A273".

With the default configuration, each time that an event is recorded, the controller also records
the following info (this list can be modified by means of the BoardPrg3 program):

• Date/Time.

• Event code.

• Operating mode of the controller.

• Presence of voltage on the generators bus.

• Mains status.

• MGCB circuit breaker status.

• MCB circuit breaker status.

• Mains phase-to-phase voltages and frequency.

• Generators bus phase-to-phase voltages and frequency.

• The three phase currents.

• The total (apparent, active and reactive) powers and the total power factor.

• The power supply voltage and the auxiliary current.

Using the ▲▼ buttons to scroll cyclically trough all recordings. Each event has many
information pages (depending on the configuration). Pressing the ◄► buttons allows you to
scroll through the pages related to the event.

The structure of the upper part of the pages is the same for all pages. The following figure
shows the first page.

H.09 LOGS _
1 EVENTS 10/86

17/03/2014 14:37:55
►
EVENT code 0024

W024 GCB not open

98 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 The common part contains:

• The second line shows which event is currently displayed, the total number of
recorded events and the maximum size of the archive. The most recent event is
associated to the highest number.

• The next line shows the date/time of the recording.

• The next line shows the numeric code of the event and its description (variable
depending on the selected language).

The content below the dashed line depends on the information configured for the record; with
the default configuration, five pages are used:

Page 1. It shows the statutes of the system at the time when the event was recorded: the
controller operating mode, the statutes of the generators and of the mains.

Page 2. It shows the statutes of the circuit breakers.

Page 3. It shows the frequency and the phase-to-phase voltages of the mains.

Page 4. It shows the frequency and the phase-to-phase voltages of the generators bus.

Page 5. It shows the phase currents, the total active power (kW), the total reactive power
(kvar), the total apparent power (kVA) and the total power factor.

Page 5. It shows the power supply voltage and the auxiliary current.

The information that were not available at the time of recording are displayed with dashes.
6.5.5.3 Pages for analogues
The controller records the ANALOGUE magnitudes described below; the recording frequency
is configured with the parameter P.0442 (seconds) and P.0443 (minutes):

• Date/Time.

• Mains phase-to-phase voltages and frequency.

• Generators bus phase-to-phase voltages and frequency.

• The three phase currents.

• The total (apparent, active and reactive) powers and the total power factor.

• The nominal power, the active power and the reactive power of the generators with
GCB closed (totals).

• The power supply voltage and the auxiliary current.

Using the ▲ and ▼ buttons to scroll cyclically trough all recordings. Each record has a variable
number of information pages (based on the configuration). By pressing ◄► buttons it is
possible to navigate on the pages related to recording.

The structure of the upper part of the pages is the same for all four. The following figure shows
the first page.

H.15 HISTORY _
2 FAST ANALOGUES
29/40
---------------------
17/03/2014 17:38:31
►
Mains:
398 V 50.0 Hz
399 V
396 V

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 99

 The common part contains:

• The second line shows which record is currently displayed, the total number of
recorded registrations and the maximum size of the archive. The most recent record
is associated to the highest number.

• The next line shows the date/time of the recording.

The content below the dashed line depends on the information configured for the record; with
the default configuration, 5 pages are used:

Page 1. It shows the frequency and the phase-to-phase voltages of the mains.

Page 2. It shows the frequency and the phase-to-phase voltages of the generators bus.

Page 4. It shows the phase currents, the total active power (kW), the total reactive power
(kvar), the total apparent power (kVA) and the total power factor.

Page 5. It shows the power supply voltage and the auxiliary current.

The information that were not available at the time of recording are displayed with dashes.

6.5.5.4 Fast ANALOGUEs logs

The fast ANALOGUEs are recorded at a pace configurable by means of the parameter P.0442
(interval in seconds) and the default interval is 60 seconds. This archive provides a total
storage capability of 42 records. Every following record overwrites the older one. The controller
records the ANALOGUE values described in par. 6.5.5.3.

6.5.5.5 Slow ANALOGUEs logs

The slow ANALOGUEs are recorded at a pace configurable by means of the parameter
P.0443 (interval in minutes) and the default interval is 30 minutes. This archive provides a total
storage capability of 64 records. Every following record overwrites the older one. The controller
records the ANALOGUE values described in par. 6.5.5.3.
6.5.5.6 Locked recordings
The controller does not perform recordings in the archive of analogues and in the archive of
events if it is in OFF/RESET mode and when a shutdown or an unload have been activated.
Exceptions are some event codes (highlighted by the wording “Yes” in the column “even if
blocked” of the table in 6.5.5.2) and all anomalies. When the recordings are locked, all the
windows of the History logs display an intermittent “Locked” message. To unlock the
recordings, it is necessary cancel all anomalies and set the board in MAN or AUTO.
6.5.5.7 Pages for peaks
The controller makes a series of maximum and minimum peaks for some significant values.

 Total active power: the maximum peak is recorded, having the date/ associated.

 Currents: the maximum peaks of individual phases are recorded, having the date/time
and power factor of that phase associated.

To display all records, the controller uses only one page of the display.

100 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 H.27 HISTORY _
4 MAX. PEAKS 1/07
---------------------
Maximum power

26/03/2018 15:35:54
345.4 kW
( 88 °C)

The second line shows the record currently displayed, out of the total number of records (the
maximum number of records is 6).

The fourth line shows a description of the peak record currently displayed.

• Maximum power.

• Maximum current (L1).

• Maximum current (L2).

• Maximum current (L3).

The sixth line shows the date and the time of the record, the value of the record (power,
current, etc.) On the eighth line a second value can be recorded together with the main value:

• The power factors on single phases are recorded together with the currents.

The information that were not available at the time of recording are displayed with dashes.

Using the ▲ and ▼ pushbuttons it is possible to scan all the records. The buttons ◄
and ► are not used because the controller uses only one page of the display.
6.5.5.8 Exit from archives visualization
There are two ways to exit from archive visualization:

 Press ESC/SHIFT n times to go to page H.01

 Changing operating mode of the controller.

In both cases, it will be shown the page H.01, from which it is possible to pass to the status
and measurements visualization with ▲ and ▼ pushbuttons.
6.5.5.9 Reset of archives
To reset an archive, it is first necessary to show it and then keep ACK/ENTER and ESC/SHIFT
pressed for 5 seconds up to when the controller shows a message of happened reset on the
display. The archive of maximum peaks does not reset: when ACK/ENTER and ESC/SHIFT
are pressed for 5 seconds on this archive, the controller forces as maximum peak the current
value of the measurements.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 101

 6.6
The device allows to select the language to use for all writings displayed on the multifunctional
viewer. Currently, 5 languages are supported: Italian, English, Portuguese, French, Spanish
and Russian (English as default). The directly available languages are only: English and
Portuguese. The others can be transferred to the controller (one at a time) though BoardPrg3
software. See 6.5.2.3 for the language selection procedure.

102 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 7
The rest of the chapter will describe the actions of MC400 on the MCB and MGCB circuit
breakers and the commands sent to the gensets controllers via CAN bus PMCB.

MC400 can send some commands (via CAN bus PMCB) to the gensets controllers. Almost
these commands are sent to the genset controllers only if they are “managed by MCxxx”.

MC400 uses a different way (respect the old MC100) for starting and stopping the generators
through the PMCB CAN bus. The new system provides more functionalities, but requires an
updated firmware also an all the genset controllers (GCxxx or DSTxxxx). For this reason,
MC400 can emulate the old MC100.

• P.9506 = 1. In this configuration, MC400 emulates the old MC100.

A controller is “managed by MCxxx” if:

• It doesn’t have alarms, deactivations or unloads.

• It is not in OFF/RESET, MAN or TEST mode.

• The contact “inhibition for start” is active.

• It does not have requests of “inhibition for supply the loads” (by contact or by
communication ports).

• It does not have REMOTE START requests, if not received by MCxxx.

• It does not have the contact to enable the REMOTE START mode, or it is
active.

To request the start of a genset, MCxxx sends a “REMOTE START” request to the
related genset controller (for this reason a controller must have the “REMOTE START”
function enabled to be “managed by MCxxx”).

To request the stop of a genset, MCxxx removes the request of “REMOTE START” to
the related controller. The controller will stop the genset if:

• There are no requests of REMOTE START and TEST.

• There are no requests of automatic intervention, or the request of “automatic

start inhibition” by contact is active.

The two previous conditions are necessary to get the genset controller “managed by
MCxxx”.

In some conditions, and only if MGCB is present, MCxxx can request the opening of
the GCB circuit breakers of the gensets controllers. To do this, MCxxx sends a
command of “load inhibition” to the genset controllers. When the opening of the GCB
circuit breakers is not required, MCxxx removes the request of “load inhibition”: the
genset controllers will close the GCB circuit breakers only if there are no requests of
“load inhibition” (necessary condition to get the genset controller “managed by
MCxxx”).

• P.9506 = 0. In this configuration, MC400 uses the new command system, that
provides enhanced functionalities.

A controller is “managed by MCxxx” if:

• It doesn’t have alarms, deactivations or unloads.

• It is in AUTO mode (not in TEST or in REMOTE START mode).

• It does not have requests of “inhibition for start” (by contact or by Modbus).

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 103

 • It does not have requests of “inhibition for supply the loads” (by contact or by
Modbus).

To request the start of the gensets (all controlled ones), MC400 sends an “automatic
start request” over the CAN bus. In the same way, to stop the gensets (all controlled
ones), it removes the “automatic start request” from the CAN bus. The genset will stop
if:

• Its controller is in AUTO mode.

• There are no requests of automatic intervention, or the request of “start

inhibition” by contact or Modbus is active.

In some conditions, and only if MGCB is present, MC400 can request the opening of
the GCB circuit breakers of the gensets controllers. To do this, MC400 sends a
command of “inhibition for supply the loads” to the genset controllers. When the
opening of the GCB circuit breakers is not required, MC400 removes the request of
“inhibition for supply the loads”: the genset controllers will close the GCB circuit
breakers only if there are no requests of “inhibition for supply the loads”.

7.1
Five modes are available for the device management.
 OFF_RESET: the MGCB is open to disconnect the gensets from the loads and/or the
mains (if it exists and if it is commanded by MC400). The MCB is closed to connect
the loads to the mains (if it exists and if it is commanded by MC400). MC400 removes
all the requests of gensets start. All anomalies are cancelled and it is possible to
access the programming to modify the parameters.
 MAN: the start and the stop of the gensets are managed by the operator. The
opening/closing of the two circuit breakers (if they are present and commanded by
MC400) are managed by the operator. The controller automatically activates the
synchronization procedure (if required) following the manual command of a circuit
breaker closing by the operator. The protections are active: MC400 is always able to
open the MGCB circuit breaker (if present) and remove the requests of gensets start.
The access to programming is allowed, but only some parameters can be modified.
 AUTO: the start and the stop of the gensets and the opening/closing of the MGCB
and MCB circuit breakers are managed by the controller (the operator cannot
intervene). All the protections are enabled. The access to programming is allowed, but
only some parameters can be modified.
 TEST: this operating mode differs from AUTO, as MC400 still requires the start of the
gensets, without considering that the conditions of the plant require the automatic
intervention of the gensets or not (the “automatic intervention inhibition” are ignored
in this mode). By parameter P.0222, it is possible to choose if the controller has or has
not to connect the load to generators. When the controller goes back to AUTO (when
the test ends), the loads are automatically switched on the mains and the gensets are
stopped with the normal procedure. If possible, the switch of the loads between mains
and gensets is carried out by avoiding their black-out. The controller will pass
automatically from TEST to AUTO if the conditions for an automatic gensets
intervention are verified. The access to programming is allowed, but only some
parameters can be modified.
 REMOTE START: this operating mode differs from AUTO, as MC400 still requires the
start of the gensets, without considering that the conditions of the plant require the
automatic intervention of the gensets or not (the “automatic intervention inhibition” are
ignored in this mode). If there are no requests of “inhibition to take the load”, the loads
are switched on the gensets. The operator cannot command the circuit breakers
manually. When this operating mode is deactivated, the controller goes back to AUTO
and, if the automatic intervention of the gensets is not requested, the controller opens
the MGCB circuit breaker and removes the start requests of the gensets. The access
to programming is allowed, but only some parameters can be modified.
The operation mode can be selected in three different ways:

104 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

  Using “MODE ▲” and “MODE ▼” buttons on the controller. The buttons must be
pressed continuously for at least half a second to force the mode change. The buttons
are disabled if at least one of the inputs described at the following point exists and is
active (on the first line of the display a flashing key shaped icon is shown).

 Using one or more configured inputs with the following functions:

▪ DIF.2271 “OFF from remote”.
▪ DIF.2272 “MAN from remote”.
▪ DIF.2273 “AUTO from remote”.
When one of these inputs is active, the controller mode is forced and it is no longer
possible to use either the buttons on the panel or the Modbus commands to modify it
(on the first line of the display a flashing key shaped icon is shown).
When none of these inputs is active, it becomes possible again to use the buttons and
the Modbus commands to change the operation mode.
If there are more active inputs at the same time, the priority is given to the input which
forces OFF/RESET, followed by the one which forces MAN, and then the one which
forces AUTO.
It is not mandatory to use all three inputs. For example, it is possible to use only one
input to force the AUTO status; when the input is active, the controller is always in
AUTO, when the input deactivates the controller remains in AUTO, but it is possible
to use the buttons to pass to MAN or OFF/RESET.
If it is used only the input to force OFF/RESET mode, the controller acts
differently: when the input is active, the controller is always in OFF/RESET
mode, and when the input goes back on standby, the controller goes back to
the mode it was in prior to input activation.

 By Modbus commands. The commands are only managed if none of the above
described inputs is active. The commands can be protected by a password (P.0004)
which must be entered before any command, and they can be deactivated through a
digital input (DIF.2706). To send the command it is necessary to write in sequence
(within 5 seconds):

▪ HOLDING REGISTER 101: write the password configured with the parameter
P.0004.

▪ HOLDING REGISTER 102: write the value:

▪ “1” to require the OFF/RESET mode.

▪ “2” to require the MAN mode.

▪ “3” to require the AUTO mode.

To enable the TEST mode requires the controller being first set to AUTO without any automatic
start request. All possible TEST activation modes are described below. If in TEST mode, the
AUTO/TEST indicator flashes at a duty of 50%. You can shift to TEST mode as follows:

 Pressing the START pushbutton. Shifting to TEST mode is immediate. To return to

AUTO mode, press again the START pushbutton. If the TEST duration (P.0420) is
configured (different from zero), this test ends automatically after the time indicated.
Parameter P.0222 establishes if the generators are connected to the loads or not.

 When a digital input configured with function DIF.2031 “Request of Test mode”
activates, the controller shifts to TEST and returns to AUTO when it deactivates.
Parameter P.0222 establishes if the generators are connected to the loads or not.

 By using a digital input configured with the function DIF.2029 (“Request for the test
mode without load - impulse”). The controller evaluates the input activation moment
(impulse): the controller switches to TEST when this input activates and goes back to
AUTO at the end of the time configured in P.0420 (if P.0420 is set to zero, the test is
not carried out). If there is a second activation of the input during the test, the test is

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 105

 immediately stopped. During this test, the controller doesn’t connect the generators to
the loads, independently from the value configured in P.0222.

 By using a digital input configured with the function DIF.2030 (“Request for the test
mode with load - impulse”). The controller evaluates the input activation moment
(impulse): the controller switches to TEST when this input activates and goes back to
AUTO at the end of the time configured in P.0420 (if P.0420 is set to zero, the test is
not carried out). If there is a second activation of the input during the test, the test is
immediately stopped. During this test, the controller connects the generators to the
loads, independently from the value configured in P.0222.

 By properly configuring the parameters:

▪ P.0418: Test enable days.

▪ P.0419: Test start time.

▪ P.0420: Test duration.

They allow selecting the days of the week and a time slot within which the working
mode switches from AUTO to TEST. In this case, the passage to TEST is automatic
in the scheduled days and hour. The controller returns to AUTO when the TEST time
interval ends. Parameter P.0222 establishes if the generators are connected to the
loads or not.

 By means of a proper command via SMS (see [3]). To use this feature, the parameter
P.0420 “Test duration” shall not be set to zero (it indicates in effect the duration of the
test). In this case, the controller shifts from TEST after receiving the SMS and returns
to AUTO after the time P.0420. Parameter P.0222 establishes if the generators are
connected to the loads or not.

 From a Modbus command. The controller shifts to TEST when it receives the
command, returns to AUTO when it receives the opposite command or when it
considers the connection interrupted (60 seconds without messages). The commands
can be protected by a password (P.0004) which must be entered before any
command, and they can be deactivated through a digital input (DIF.2706). To send
the command it is necessary to write in sequence (within 5 seconds):

▪ HOLDING REGISTER 101: write the password configured with the parameter
P.0004.

▪ HOLDING REGISTER 102: write the value:

▪ “12” to require the vacuum TEST mode.

▪ “14” to require the load TEST mode.

▪ "21" to return to AUTO.

To activate the REMOTE START mode, the controller must be in AUTO or in TEST mode.
Moreover, it is possible to configure an input with DIF.2701 function ("enable remote start
request"): if the input exists, it should be active. This mode can be activated in one of the
following modes:

 By means of the digital input configured with the function DIF.2032 (“remote start
request”). If input is active, the REMOTE START mode is entered and it is leaved
deactivating the input.

 By means of a proper command via SMS (see [3]). In this case, the controller shifts to
REMOTE START as soon as it receives the SMS and returns to AUTO when it
receives the opposite command. In this case, it is mandatory to configure an input with
function DIF.2701 (“enable remote start request”): the input must be active (normally
wired on a switch at control panel front to enable the remote commands).

106 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

  By properly configuring the parameters P.0426, P.0427 and P.0428, it is possible to
define an hour range within which the working mode automatically switches to
REMOTE START. Parameter P.0426 allows to establish in which days of the week
this function is active. The remaining two allow to set an hour range valid for all
selected days. The range start time (P.0427) refers to the days set in P.0426, while
the range end time (P.0428) refers to the same day, if its value is higher than P.0427,
or to the following day if lower (across midnight). Moreover, setting P.0427 and P.0428
to the same value, you define a full day range.

 By a Modbus command. The controller shifts to REMOTE START once it receives the
command, returns to AUTO when it receives the opposite one (it remains in REMOTE
START if the connection interrupts before receiving the opposite command). In this
case, it is mandatory to configure an input with function DIF.2701 (“enable remote
start request”): the input must be active (normally wired on a switch at control panel
front to enable the remote commands). The commands can be protected by a
password (P.0004) which must be entered before any command, and they can be
deactivated through a digital input (DIF.2706). To send the command it is necessary
to write in sequence (within 5 seconds):

▪ HOLDING REGISTER 101: write the password configured with the parameter
P.0004.

▪ HOLDING REGISTER 102: write the value:

▪ “13” to require the REMOTE START mode.

▪ "21" to return to AUTO.

7.1.1 Events and signalling

The controller records the following events if the working mode changes (if enabled with bit 0
of P.0441 parameter):

 EVT.1001: the new mode is “OFF/RESET”.

 EVT.1002: the new mode is “MAN”.

 EVT.1003: the new mode is “AUTO”.

 EVT.1004: the new mode is “TEST”.

 EVT.1005: the new mode is “REMOTE START”.

Some functions are available for the configuration of the digital outputs related to the operation
mode of the controller:

 DOF.3001 - “OFF/RESET”. The board activates this output when in OFF/RESET

mode.

 DOF.3002 - “Man”. The board activates this output when in MAN mode.

 DOF.3003 - “Auto”. The board activates this output when in AUTO mode.

 DOF.3004 - “Test”. The board activates this output when in TEST mode.

 DOF.3005 - “REMOTE START”. The board activates this output when in REMOTE
START mode.

 DOF.3011 - “Not in OFF/RESET”. The board activates this output when in AUTO or
MAN mode.

 DOF.3012 - “One of the automatic modes”. It activates when a controller is in an

automatic operation mode, that is AUTO, TEST, or REMOTE START.
Also, the controller operates with AND/OR logics through the following internal statuses:

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 107

  ST.000 - “OFF/RESET”.

 ST.001 - “manual”

 ST.002 - “Automatic”.

 ST.003 - “Test”.

 ST.004 - “remote start”.

108 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 7.2
The controller needs to know if there are voltages on the generators bus to enable or not the
synchronization when it must close a circuit breaker. The following terms are used:

• “Dead” bus: no voltages on generators bus.

• “Live” bus: voltages on generators bus.

The controller can detect the presence of voltage on the generators bus through its three-
phase sensor (JF) or through an external sensor.

Note: if there is an external sensor, the internal one is ignored.

Note: if the controller must synchronize the gensets with the mains, it is necessary to
use the internal sensor (or an external synchronizer).

The gensets bus status is displayed by means of the led GENERATORS BUS LIVE.

7.2.1 External sensor

Use a digital input configured with the function DIF.3102 (“No voltages on gensets”): when the
input is active, the generators bus is considered “without voltage”.

7.2.2 Internal sensor

The controller uses the parameters to configure the sensor:

• P.151: it indicates whether the full-scale voltage is 400V or 100V.

• P.0101: it indicates if the generators bus is three-phase (3) or single-phase (1).

• P.0102: gensets nominal voltage. Its value must be the nominal phase-to-phase
voltage for three-phase systems and phase–to–neutral voltage for single-phase
systems.

• P.0103: primary value (Vac) of possible voltage transformers connected to the JF

connector.

• P.1104: secondary value (Vac) of possible voltage transformers connected to the JF

connector.

• P.0128: it indicates whether the neutral line is connected to the JF terminal.

For the connection of the voltage lines, see paragraph 5.9.

Note: set the nominal voltage to a value different from zero.

The controller uses a fixed threshold, 9% of nominal voltage (with a 3% hysteresis).

Generators bus is considered “dead” if all voltages (P.0101) are below the 9% threshold, it is
“live” if at least one voltage is above 12% (9 + 3). With default parameters, generators bus is
“dead” if all voltages are lower than 36 V; it is “live” if at least one voltage is greater than 48 V.

For three-phases system, the previous tests are performed on the phase-phase voltages. If
enabled with P.0328 (<> 0) the same tests are performed on the phase-nutral voltages also.

7.2.3 Events and signalling

The controller records the following events if the working mode changes (if enabled with bit 2
of P.0441 parameter):

 EVT.1020: no voltages on the generators bus.

 EVT.1022: voltages on the generators bus.

The following functions, for the configuration of the digital outputs, are related to the generators
bus voltage:

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 109

 • DOF.3031 (“Voltage on gensets”): the output is active when there are voltages on the
generators bus.

7.3
The controller needs to know if there are voltages on loads bus to enable or not the
synchronization when it must close the circuit breakers. The following terms are used:

• “Dead” bus: no voltages on loads bus.

• “Live” bus: voltages on loads bus.

The controller is not able to directly detect voltages on the loads (except when MGCB is not
used or always closed). Usually, it recreates this status according to the voltage detected on
the mains and on the generators bus, and to the circuit breakers status.

If preferred (and for safety reasons also), it is possible to use one digital input configured with
the function DIF.3104 (“No voltage on loads”) to acquire this information. Loads bus is “live” if
this input is “not active” (logical state).

The loads status is displayed by means of the signal led BUS LIVE.

7.3.1 Signalling
The following functions for the configuration of the digital outputs are related to loads bus
voltage:

• DOF.3030 (“Voltage on loads”): the output is active when there are voltages on the
loads.

110 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 7.4
The controller acquires mains voltages and frequency, for three main purposes:

• “AMF”. The controller must detect all anomalies about the mains to start the
generators and make them supply the loads. In the same way, the controller detects
when mains voltages and frequency are back to their operating values to connect
loads to mains and stop the generators.

• “Protections for the parallel with the mains (PPR)”. The controller must detect the
“loss of mains” while generators are in parallel with mains, to disconnect them from
the mains (generator can in this case supply loads or not depending on plant
configuration). In the same way, when generators are disconnected from the mains,
the controller detects when mains voltages and frequency are back to their operating
values to put generators in parallel with mains again.

• For synchronization purpose.

The controller uses different sets of parameters for these purposes.

Normally, the controller uses its internal sensor (JG) to measure the mains. For the first two
functions, it’s possible to use an external sensor alternatively (for the synchronization you must
use the internal sensor).

There are some parameters for the configuration of the internal sensor that do not depend on
its use:

• P.0105: nominal frequency (Hz).

• P.0152: it indicates if the full scale for the inputs is 400V or 100V.

• P.0119: it indicates if the mains is three-phase (3) or single-phase (1).

• P.0116: nominal voltage. Its value must be the nominal phase-to-phase voltage for
three-phase systems and phase–to–neutral voltage for single-phase systems.

• P.0117: primary value (Vac) of possible voltage transformers connected to the JG

connector.

• P.0118: secondary value (Vac) of possible voltage transformers connected to the JG

connector.

• P.0129: it indicates whether the neutral line is connected to the JG connector or not.

For the connection of the voltage lines, see paragraph 5.9.

Note: set the nominal voltage to a value different from zero.

The mains status is displayed by means of the signal led MAINS LIVE.

7.4.1 Automatic Mains Failure

This function must detect all anomalies on the mains voltage, to start the gensets and connect
the loads to them.

Usually, this function is not used if the gensets are in parallel with the mains, Anyhow, if the
parallel protections trip while the gensets are in parallel with the mains, the mains is considered
“off” for AMF purpose too.

The parameter P.9504 allows to set whether to use the internal sensor (”0”) or the external
one (”1”).
7.4.1.1 External sensor
To use an external mains sensor, P.9504 must be set to 1.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 111

 The external mains sensor must be connected to a digital input configured with the function
DIF.3101 (“External sensor for mains”). Mains is “in tolerance” when this input is “active”
(logical state), is “Absent” when the input is “not active”.
7.4.1.2 Internal sensors
To define the mains status, the controller can carry out up to four different checks. They are
described below one by one (with examples).
7.4.1.2.1 Frequency check

Parameter Description Default value Frequency (Hz)

P.0105 Nominal frequency 50 Hz 50.00
P.0236 Low frequency threshold 90.0 % 45.00
P.0237 High frequency threshold 110.0 % 55.00
P.0201 Hysteresis 2.5 % 1.25

The hysteresis is applied:

• Upwards the low frequency threshold (so, with parameters default values, between
45.00 Hz and 46.25 Hz).

• Downwards the high frequency threshold (so, with parameters default values,
between 53.75 Hz and 55.00 Hz).

Considering these values, we can detect the following bands:

0.00 V .
Band A: absent
45.00 V .
Band B: hysteresis
46.25 V .
Band C: in tolerance
53.75 V .
Band D: hysteresis
55.00 V .
Band G: high
xxx V .

If the frequency is in the B or D bands, the controller maintains its previous status (hysteresis).
For example, if the voltage was in C band and now it is in D band, it is considered “in tolerance”
anyway. If instead, the frequency was in A band and now it is in B band, it is considered “off”.
7.4.1.2.2 Voltages check

Parameter Description Default value Voltage (Vac)

P.0119 Number of phases 3 -
P.0116 Nominal voltage 400 Vac 400
P.9505 Presence threshold 17.5 % 70
P.0203 Low voltage threshold 80.0 % 320
P.0204 High voltage threshold 110.0 % 440
P.0201 Maximum hysteresis 2.5 % 10

The hysteresis is applied:

• Upwards the mains presence threshold (so, with parameters default values, between
70 Vac and 80 Vac).

• Upwards the low voltage threshold (so, with parameters default values, between 320
Vac and 330 Vac).

• Upwards the high voltage threshold (so, with parameters default values, between 430
Vac and 440 Vac).

112 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 Considering these values, we can detect the following bands:
0 V .
Band A: absent
70 V .
Band B: hysteresis
80 V .
Band C: low
320 V .
Band D: hysteresis
330 V .
Band E: in tolerance
430 V .
Band F: hysteresis
440 V .
Band G: high
XXX V .

If the voltages are in the B, D or F bands, the controller maintains its previous status
(hysteresis). For example, if the voltage was in E band and now it is in D band, it is considered
“in tolerance” in any case. If instead, the voltage was in C band and now it is in D band, it is
considered “low”.

Such statuses are managed for each phase.

For three-phases system, the previous tests are performed on the phase-phase voltages. If
enabled with P.0244 (<> 0) the same tests are performed on the phase-nutral voltages also.
7.4.1.2.3 Asymmetry check

Parameter Description Default value Voltage (Volt)

P.0116 Nominal voltage 400 Vac 400
P.0238 Voltage unbalance threshold 10.0 % 40

On three-phase systems, it is possible to consider the mains “out of tolerance” if the three
phase-to-phase voltages differs from each other (in absolute value) more than the threshold
set. The check is disabled for single-phase systems.

Note: MC400 does not carry out any check on the phase angles, but only on the phase-to-
phase voltages.

This threshold does not use any hysteresis. With the parameters default values, if the
difference between two phase-to-phase voltages in absolute value is higher than 40 Vac, the
mains is considered out of tolerance; otherwise, it is considered in tolerance.
7.4.1.2.4 Cycling sense

Parameter Description Default value

P.0239 Required phase sequence 0-Nothing

In three-phase systems, it is possible to consider the mains “out of tolerance” if the phases
cycling sense is different from what specified in the parameter P.0239. In single-phase system,
this control is disabled.

To disable this control, simply set the parameter P.0239 to “0-None”.

With the parameter P.0239, it is possible to select the cycling sense required by the mains: “1-
Clockwise” or “2-Counter-clockwise” The mains is considered “out of tolerance” if the cycling
sense is different from the one set.
7.4.1.2.5 Internal sensor status

To diagnose the mains “global” status, the following algorithms are utilized, shown in their
computing order:

• If frequency and all voltages are in the “Off” status, the general status is “Off” too.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 113

 • If frequency and all voltages are in the “In tolerance” status, the general status is “In
tolerance” too. In this case, if the cycling sense or unbalance checks don’t give positive
results, the mains is considered “Low”.

• If frequency or at least one voltage is in the “High” status, the general status is
“High” too.

• If no one of the previous conditions is verified, the global status is “Low”.

7.4.1.3 Mains general status
Whatever method is used to acquire the instantaneous status of the mains (internal or external
sensor), for the operating logics of the plant the general status of the mains is described in
four phases:

Mains in
tolerance
Mains out of tolerance
The time set with
P.0205 is elapsed (0
seconds in MAN)

Mains in tolerance
Delay mains
Delay mains failure
presence Mains in tolerance

The time set with P.0206 is

Mains out of elapsed (two seconds if at
Mains out of tolerance tolerance least one generator is “ready
to supply” or has its GCB
closed, 0 seconds if MGCB
exists and is closed).

7.4.1.4 Events
The controller records the following events if the mains status changes (if enabled with bit 1 in
P.0441):

• EVT.1010: the new mains status is permanently “off or out of tolerance”.

• EVT.1011: the new mains status is “present or in tolerance”.

• EVT.1012: the new mains status is permanently “in tolerance”.

7.4.1.5 Signals
The following functions for the configuration of the digital outputs are connected to the mains
status:

• DOF.3033 (“Mains in tolerance)”): the output is activated if the mains is permanently

in tolerance, or during the delay for the “mains out of tolerance”.

7.4.2
This function must detect an anomaly on the mains voltage while the gensets are in parallel
with the mains, to disconnect the gensets from the mains.

It is possible to use the internal sensor of the controller or an external protection.

See document [8] for the description of these protections.

114 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 7.5
Synchronization is used when a circuit breaker must be closed and there are voltages on both
sides of it. Synchronization can be divided into two separate functions:

• Check for differences in phase, frequency, voltages and phase sequence between
generators and mains, to allow a safe closure of the circuit breaker.

• Voltages and frequency regulations, to minimize differences in voltages, frequency

and phase.

The controller can handle both functions, but, if needed, allows one or both to be managed
externally.

7.5.1 Synchro-check
Before closing a circuit breaker, this function checks the differences in voltages, frequency,
phase and cycling sense between the mains and the gensets are within the thresholds
configured; if yes, the circuit breaker can be closed in safety, otherwise it cannot be closed.

The controller performs these checks if:

• It directly manages frequency and phase regulations.

• Frequency and phase regulations are managed externally, but the parameter P.0846
forces MC400 to manage the synchro-check.

In these cases, the circuit breaker closure command (MCB o MGCB) is issued only when the
“synchronized” status is detected.

The controller does not perform these checks if frequency and phase regulations are managed
externally, and parameter P.0846 configures the controller not to manage the synchro-check.
In this case, the circuit breaker closing command is immediately issued, as MC400 supposes
that an external synchro-check inhibits the physical closing of the circuit breaker if not
synchronized.

Obviously, synchronization will never start if one or both side of the circuit breaker are “dead”
(without voltages).

Parameter P.0846 allows forcing the use of the MC400 synchro-check with externally
managed frequency and phase regulations (its value is ignored if the controller manages the
regulation processes). It allows to force the MC400 synchro-check of the circuit breakers (MCB
or MGCB) individually or together (if preferred). By default, MC400 synchro-check is always
forced by the parameter P.0846.

If the internal synchro-check is forced, but the controller cannot perform it, the warning W273
(incoherent parameter) is issued.

MC400 performs six different checks before allowing the circuit breaker closure: only when all
checks are correct, the circuit breaker will be closed.

Voltages in tolerance check

Voltages (both mains and generators ones) must be inside configured thresholds. For
example, if we have 200 V on both mains and generators, but nominal voltages are 400 V, the
circuit breaker will not be closed, even if voltage difference is zero. This check can be
configured with:

• P.0301: minimum voltages threshold (%).

• P.0303: maximum voltages threshold (%).

These thresholds are displayed in percentage. These thresholds are percentage of P.0116 for
mains voltages, and of P.0102 for genset voltages).

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 115

 Each voltage measure is compared with these thresholds: if at least one of them is out of
thresholds, the circuit breaker cannot be closed (this situation is shown on display page M.12
by an empty rectangle).

Voltage differences check

If all voltages are inside the configured thresholds, the controller calculates the differences
between generators and mains voltages and allows the closure of the circuit breaker only if
the differences are below the threshold P.0841. This parameter allows to set the maximum
voltage difference (%).

The controller analyses the differences between the voltages measured (mains phase L1 -
genset phase L1, etc.) and it displays them in percentage with respect to the gensets voltage.
The circuit breaker can be closed only if all differences (%) are below the threshold configured
by parameter P.0841 (with a fixed hysteresis of 1%). If at least one difference is higher than
the threshold, the closing is not allowed. Obviously, in a single-phase system, the controller
will consider the existing one only.

The controller can work also with different nominal voltages between mains and generators
(this happens when a transformer is placed between them). In this situation, both voltages
(mains and generators) are converted into percentages of their own nominal, and the controller
makes the comparison between those percentages: if the mains voltages are 95% of their
nominal, also the generators voltages should be 95% of their nominal.

The result of this check (and of the one described above) is displayed in page M.12 by the
rectangle that indicates the voltage difference:

• Empty rectangle: voltages or voltage differences are out of thresholds.

• Full rectangle: voltages and voltage differences are inside thresholds.

Frequency in tolerance check

Frequencies (both mains and generators ones) must be inside configured thresholds. For
example, if we have 40 Hz on both mains and generators, but nominal frequencies are 50 Hz,
the circuit breaker will not be closed, even if frequency difference is zero. This check can be
configured with:

• P.0305: minimum frequency threshold (%).

• P.0307: maximum frequency threshold (%).

These thresholds are percentage of P.0105.

Mains and generators frequency are compared with these thresholds: if at least one of them
is out of thresholds, the circuit breaker cannot be closed (this situation is shown on display
page M.12 by an empty rectangle).

Frequency difference check

If all frequencies are in tolerance, the controller calculates the frequency differences between
mains and generators and it allows the closing only if lower than the threshold configured with
the parameter P.0843. This parameter allows to set a max difference in Hz.

The controller analyses the differences between the frequencies measured, and it compares
them with the threshold P.0843 (with a fixed 0,1Hz hysteresis): if the difference is higher than
the threshold, the closing is not allowed.

The frequency status (the results of this check and of the previous one) is shown on the display
page M.12, by the second small rectangle from the left (the one identified by the “Hz” label):

• Empty rectangle: frequencies or frequency differences are out of thresholds.

• Full rectangle: frequencies and frequency differences are inside thresholds.

Phase difference check

116 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 The controller must evaluate the phase difference between mains and generators, and allow
closing the circuit breaker only when this difference is below the threshold configured by
parameter P.0842 (with a fixed hysteresis of 1 degree). P.0842 allows setting the maximum
phase difference in degrees

The result of this check is shown on the display page M.12, by the third small rectangle from
the left (the one identified by the “°” label):

• Empty rectangle: phase difference is out of thresholds.

• Full rectangle: phase difference is inside thresholds.

Sometimes, the plants do use transformers. These transformers can introduce a phase error
in voltages. So, it is possible that synchronizing on their primary side, we have a phase error
on the secondary side. If the controller regulates for 0° on secondary side, voltages on the
circuit breaker may be not synchronized. Parameter P.0845 allows setting a fixed phase offset.
If different from zero, the controller regulates for x° on the secondary side, to have 0° on
primary side. The parameter P.0845 allows to set (with a sign) the compensation of the
transformers phase error (+/-180°).

Phases sequence check.

Only for three-phase plants, the controller checks for the same phases sequence on
generators and mains. The circuit breaker can be closed only if the same phases sequence is
detected. No parameters are provided for this check.

The result of this check is shown on the display page M.12, by the forth small rectangle from
the left (the one identified by two arrows):

• Empty rectangle: different phase sequences.

• Full rectangle: same phase sequences.

Circuit breaker closing enabled.

MC400 detects a “synchronized” status only when all previous checks (or all the ones
applicable) give correct results, consecutively for the time configured by parameter P.0844.
When MC400 removes its consent, it does not reactive it for at least one second.

The “closure enable” condition is shown on the display page M.12, by the fifth small rectangle
from the left (the one identified by two arrows):

• Empty rectangle: closure not allowed.

• Full rectangle: closure allowed.

Note: circuit breaker closure is enabled only when the controller first detects a “not
synchronized” status and then a “synchronized status”. This protects the plants from wiring
errors. If MC400 directly manages frequency and phase regulations, it automatically forces
generators to go in a “not synchronized” status first, and then in a “synchronized” status.
7.5.1.1 Signals
It’s possible to configure an output to signal the synchronism condition externally. This output
will be activated during synchronization only, when the controller activates the internal “closure
enable” status. The output is configured with the function DOF.3094 (“Synchronized”).

7.5.2 Voltages, frequency and phase regulations

To synchronize generators with mains, it is needed to work on:

• On generator voltages, to make them equal to mains: this avoids current circulation
(reactive) when the circuit breaker will be closed. Normally, the gensets voltages
should be a little bit higher than mains voltages, to supply (little) reactive power from
gensets while closing.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 117

 • On generators frequency, to minimize differences on phase and frequency from
mains.

The controller can manage both voltage and frequency regulations on generators, by the CAN
bus link. Thus, it can minimize differences in voltages, frequency and phase between mains
and generators, to allow a safe closure of the circuit breaker.

Note: the gensets controllers always accept these commands, even if they are “not
managed by MCxxx”.

Note: these commands are transmitted on CAN bus only during the synchronization.

It is not mandatory using MC400 for this function: if preferred (or if it is needed because, for
example, mains voltages are not acquired by MC400), an external analogue synchronizer can
be used (GAC or other).
7.5.2.1 Using external synchronizer
Analogue synchronizers act on generator frequency by a command signal. It is possible to
connect this signal directly to an analogue input of all genset controllers. Alternatively,
(suggested option), it is possible to connect this signal to an analogue input of the controller,
which will transfer it via CAN bus to the genset controllers.

Each synchronizer has its own signal type. MC400 can interact only with signals in direct
voltages 0-10 Vdc. Some synchronizers have different command signals:

• Current signals (4-20 mA, +/-10 mA). It is simple to convert these signals in Volts DC
applying a resistor on them.

• PWM. Not managed by MC400.

• Up/Down. These synchronizers use two digital outputs to request an increase or a

decrease of speed. Not managed by MC400.

Within the 0-10 Vdc range, MC400 is fully configurable: for example, MC400 can acquire a 3
to 6 Vdc signal and convert it to -4 to +4 Hz change on gensets. MC400 can be also configured
to decrease generators frequency when the synchronizer signal increases (and vice-versa).

To use an external synchronizer, an analogue input of MC400 must be correctly configured.

For example, let’s suppose to use a GAC synchronizer and connect it to the analogue input 1
(see paragraph [1] for parameters related to analogue inputs):

• P.4001 - “Function of analogue input 1”. This parameter allows selecting the analogue
input function. For external synchronizers, three functions are available:

o AIF.2105: if the external synchronizer should be used for the MCB closing
only (MGCB synchronization is managed by MC400).

o AIF.2107: if the external synchronizer should be used for MGCB closing only
(MCB synchronization is managed by MC400).

o AIF.2103: if the external synchronizer should be used for the closing of both
MCB and MGCB circuit breakers.

• P.1842 - “Analogue input 1 minimum value”. GAC synchronizer works between 0 and
10 V, so this parameter must be set to 0%.

• P.1843 - “Analogue input 1 maximum value”. GAC synchronizer works between 0 and
10 V, so this parameter must be set to 100%.

In this way, we configured the input. Now, we must configure the conversion of the
measurement from Vdc to Hz. The speed regulation command over CAN bus is a percentage
value: 0% corresponds to 4 Hz less then nominal frequency, 100% corresponds to 4 Hz over
nominal frequency (so 50% corresponds to nominal frequency). So, it is necessary to convert
the signal 0-10 Vdc in a percentage value. GAC synchronizer decreases its command signal

118 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 to speed-up generators. So, the following conversion curve must be linked to the analogue
input 1:

In the previous example, the GAC synchronizer can change generators frequency of +/- 4 Hz.
If in the previous table we replace the 100% with 75% and the 0% with 25%, the maximum
change of frequency should be +/- 2 Hz. By setting the curve in an asymmetric way, it is
possible to compensate electrical offsets (GAC should give a 5 Vdc signal to request the
nominal frequency, it may be 5.1 or 4.9).

During the synchronization phase, the controller will change the gensets frequency as required
by the external synchronizer.

Note: now, there is no support for the genset voltage regulation by an external synchronizer.
This function, if it is enabled, is always managed by MC400.

Note: it is possible to use two different external synchronizers for MCB and MGCB, by wiring
them to two different analogue inputs configured with codes DIF.2105 and DIF.2107. For each
input is possible to set a specific conversion curve.
7.5.2.2 Using internal synchronizer
Phase/Frequency regulation

The controller regulates the gensets frequency to equalize the two frequencies and reset the
phase difference between gensets and mains.

A PI regulator is used to manage the frequency and reset the phase error. It works on phase
difference, and can be configured with the following parameters:

• P.0849 - “Gain for phase control loop”.

• P.0850 - “Integrative factor for phase control loop”.

These parameters must be adapted to get the best response from the system. They have the
same functions of trimmers on analogue synchronizers.

Note: when you are setting these parameters, be sure the circuit breaker cannot be closed.
Do that by opening fuses (if available) or by setting parameter P.0842 to zero.

Voltage regulation

The same concepts explained in the previous paragraph are valid also for voltage regulation.
Parameters provided for the voltage PI regulator are:

• P.0868 - “Voltage matching gain”.

• P.0869 - “Voltage matching integrative factor”.

If both parameters are “0”, no voltage regulation is available during synchronization.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 119

 7.5.2.2.1 PI regulator

The controller uses two PI regulators internally to regulate the voltage and the speed of the
gensets for the synchronization operations. All internal PI regulators can be configured with
two parameters:

• The factor proportional to the current error (P) is also called “gain”.

• The factor related to the integral in the error delay (I) is also called “integrative factor”.

In the previous paragraph, there are the parameters associated to each PI regulator.

These two parameters for each PI regulator should be “adjusted” during the installation
procedure. In fact, they depend on different factors: the type of engines, the alternator powers,
the type of alternators; different parameters could be necessary for similar systems.

The definition of these parameters is not particularly critical if carried out with method.
Unfortunately, the empirical adjustment (called Ziegler-Nichols) requires to measure the
oscillation period of the measurement (frequency, voltage), which is not always possible (or
simple) to do.

For this reason, besides the empirical method, we suggest a simplified method that should
help carrying out in a valid way the parameters choice.

The PI regulator parameters can be modified even if the plant is working, by the user panel. It
is suggested to carry out the modifications by using the BoardPrg3 program, which is available
for free on our SICES website.
7.5.2.2.1.1 Complete method

1) Set “P” at an initial value (0,100) and “I” at 0,000.

2) Increase “P” until the adjusted measurement start to oscillate (for example, if you are
adjusting the PI that manages the speed during the synchronization, increase “P” until
it seems to hear that the engines accelerate / slow down). Decrease/increase the
value “P” until an oscillation point is determined (a good estimate is sufficient).

3) Measure the oscillation period (the time between two consecutive peaks of speed).

4) Set “P” at a slight lower value than the one resulted by the division of the current value
by 2.2.

5) Set “I” at the value calculated by dividing 1.2 for the period of oscillation measured
before (in seconds). A lower value can be set at a lower value, decreasing its
performance but increasing the stability range.

6) Further adjustments could be necessary. Check how the system reacts in case of low,
medium or high load. In case there still is a system instability, reduce the “P” value
again.
7.5.2.2.1.2 Simplified method

To avoid the problem of measuring the oscillation period, you can proceed by referring to what
has been described before, up to the point 6 included, except for the point 3 and 5. At point 5,
increase/decrease “I” (after having adjusted “P” at point 4) until getting the best performances.
7.5.2.2.1.3 General notes

The parameter “P” is not able to guarantee a good adjustment alone. To reduce the error, “P”
should be increased, but over a set threshold, the systems becomes unstable. The value “P”
defined with the described method usually is the best relation between stability and
performance.

For a good adjustment, it is necessary to set the factor “I”. Even little values of the parameter
“I” change the system performance. The value, obtained by the procedure described, usually
supplies the best performances. Anyhow, it is not critical and it can be set in a greater range
of values.

120 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 Consider that the factor “I” accumulates the adjustment errors: delay in the recovery of the
error can cause over-shoots or under-shoots. Very high values of “I” bring to the oscillation of
the system.

Once you found the value that supplies a good performance, try to decrease it until the
performance decreases under the waited minimum. Then select an intermediate value in this
range.

In some case, it would be necessary to start a procedure with a minimum value of “I” to
guarantee a level of adjustment suitable with the operation of the system. A very low value of
“I” (0.01) can be used with light effects on the procedure.

7.5.3 Digital inputs for synchronization

MC400 allows configuring digital inputs with two special functions related to synchronization:

• DIF.1034 (“Synchronization request for MCB”).

• DIF.1004 (“Synchronization request for MGCB”).

These inputs must be used when the related circuit breaker is not managed by MC400, but
you want to use PI regulators of MC400 for synchronization. When the input is “active” (logical
state), if all necessary conditions for synchronization are present, MC400 starts the
synchronization process and signals it to external devices using up to four digital outputs (see
next paragraph).

7.5.4 Digital outputs for synchronization

MC400 allows configuring digital outputs with the following special functions related to
synchronization:

• DOF.3091 (“Synchronization for MGCB”). It is used when MGCB is managed by

MC400 but an external synchronizer must be used. When MC400 starts
synchronization process, this output become “active” and can be used to
supply/enable the external synchronizer. When synchronization ends, the output
become “not active”.

• DOF.3092 (“Synchronization for MCB”). It is used when MCB is managed by MC400

but an external synchronizer must be used. When MC400 starts synchronization
process, this output become “active” and can be used to supply/enable the external
synchronizer. When synchronization ends, the output become “not active”.

• DOF.3093 (“Synchronization in progress”). It is used when MCB/MGCB is managed

by MC400 but an external synchronizer must be used. When MC400 starts
synchronization process, this output become “active” and can be used to
supply/enable the external synchronizer. When synchronization ends, the output
become “not active”.

• DOF.3094 (“Synchronized”). This output can be used in case the synchro-check of

the controller is used for a circuit breaker closing (MCB or MGCB), which is
commanded by an external logic. This output can be “active” only during
synchronization process, when MC400 detects the “synchronized” status between
mains and generators. Outside synchronization process, or when generators are not
synchronized with mains, this output is “not active”. This output should be wired to the
external logic that physically closes the circuit breaker (be aware that the output
become “not active” after circuit breaker has been closed).

• DOF.0103 (AND/OR logics) with the status:

o ST.097: synchronization in progress for MCB closure.

o ST.098: synchronization in progress for MGCB closure.

o ST.099: synchronized status detected.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 121

 7.5.5 Automatic synchronization
This description refers to the operation in AUTO, TEST and REMOTE START. It also refers
to the operation in MAN if the parameter P.0848 (“automatic synchronization in manual mode”)
is set to “1”.

If the internal synchronizer is used, the controller regulates voltage and frequency to get the
“synchronized” status: if the “synchronized” status persists for 10 seconds and the circuit
breaker doesn’t close, MC400 changes generators frequency to force a “not synchronized”
status, then starts to synchronize again. This avoids problems when using external synchro-
checks in addition to the MC400 one: it is possible that some external synchro-checks don’t
allow the closure because they haven’t detected any “unsynchronized” status before.

MC400 allows configuring the maximum duration of synchronizations for the two circuit
breakers:

• P.0852: MGCB synchronization maximum time.

• P.0853: MCB synchronization maximum time.

The duration of the synchronization phase on a circuit breaker is managed only in automatic
mode (not MAN) and if the related delay is different from zero; in this case an anomaly is
activated:

• W272 – “MCB synchronization failure”. It is always a warning. The controller can

decide to close MCB without synchronization (opening MGCB or GCB), depending on
the type of plant and on the configuration (P.9515).

• X271 – “MGCB synchronization failure”. If MGCB is directly managed from MC400, it

is an alarm, otherwise it is a warning.

7.5.6 Manual synchronisation

This description refers to the operation in MAN if the parameter P.0848 (“automatic
synchronization in manual mode”) is set to “0”.

The user must manually regulate the gensets voltage and frequency until the “synchronized”
status is detected (this check is always carried out by the controller).

MC400 provides two parameters that allow voltages and frequency regulations on the
generators:

• P.0867 - “Voltage offset”.

• P.0840 - “Speed offset”.

Both are expressed as percentage (between 0 and 100%). The first allows changing
generators voltages of +/-20 Volt; the second allows changing generators frequency of +/- 4
Hz (the real voltages and frequency ranges depend on single genset controller settings).
Setting both to 50%, generators work to their nominal voltages and frequency.

These parameters can be directly changed on display page M.12 (provided for
synchronization). It is possible to simplify the procedure using two potentiometers instead of
the parameters. The following is needed:

Voltage

• Configure an analogue input with the function AIF.2201 (“Voltage offset”) (parameter
P.4001 for analogue input 1).

• Associate the input to a conversion curve, which converts the voltage of the analogue
input into a voltage correction (%).

After these configurations, you can change the voltage offset between 0 and 100% by
moving the potentiometer between 0 and 10 Vdc (the current voltage offset is shown on
page M.12), and consequently you can change the gensets voltage. Note: once you have

122 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 configured an analogue input with the function AIF.2201, the parameter P.0867 is no more
used.

Frequency.

• Configure an analogue input with the function AIF.2101 (“Speed offset”) (parameter
P.4001 for analogue input 1).

• Associate the input to a conversion curve, which converts the voltage of the analogue
input into a speed correction (%).

After these configurations, you can change the speed offset between 0 and 100% by
moving the potentiometer between 0 and 10 Vdc (the current speed offset is shown on
page M.12), and consequently you can change the gensets frequency. Note: once you
have configured an analogue input with the function AIF.2101, the parameter P.0840 is
no more used.

Manual synchronization procedure is:

• Start the gensets (by pressing the START button on the panel).

• Select the page M.12 on the display (this can be carried out also by giving a manual
closing command of the circuit breaker – MCB/MGCB pushbutton or digital inputs
configured for MCB/MGCB).

• Use parameters P.0868 and P.0840 (or the related potentiometer, if configured) to
synchronize the gensets to the mains. When MC400 signals a synchronism status,
send a new closing command (pushbutton or related digital input): the circuit breaker
will be closed.

7.5.7 MCB synchronization failure

Parameter P.9515 configures the actions of the controller in case of failure of the
synchronization for the MCB circuit breaker closing.

• “0 – No blackout”. By setting this value, you configure the controller to avoid any
blackout on the loads (in AUTO modes). After having activated the warning of MCB
synchronization failure (W272), the controller keeps the loads connected to the
gensets. When the operator will acknowledge the warning, MC400 will try again to
close MCB through the synchronization.

• “1 – Short blackout”. By setting this value, you allow a short blackout on the loads
when the mains is back. Basically, after having activated the warning of MCB
synchronization failure (W272), the controller opens the MGCB circuit breaker (or it
forces the opening of the GCB circuit breakers) to be able to close MCB without
synchronization. Once MCB is closed, if the gensets intervention is still required,
MC400 will try to close MGCB with synchronization (or it will allow again the GCB
closing - with synchronization).

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 123

 7.6
In automatic mode, MC400 determines, based on the type of system and the current
conditions, whether to start the generators. In these conditions, it is possible to force the
stopping of the generators by using the "inhibition to automatic intervention" function.

This internal function, once activated, takes priority over any other function: the generators will
be shut down and it will not possible to restart them. The function operates in AUTO mode,
but not in TEST and REMOTE START modes. The activation of this function does not result
in the activation of anomalies.
It is possible to activate this function in different ways, described in the following paragraphs.
The “INHIBIT” lock symbol ( ) is shown on the up right corner of the display, when an inhibition
is active.
7.6.1 Inhibition from contact
The controller can use a digital input programmed for inhibiting the gen-sets automatic
operation (function DIF.2501 – “Inhibition of start”). In case of an “active” input, the generators
are never automatically started, not even if the plants condition requires it.

Use parameter P.0207 to set a delay between input's physical activation and this function's
logic activation: the delay can only be applied if the controller is in AUTO mode, otherwise the
delay is null.

Use parameter P.0208 to set a delay between input's physical de-activation and this function's
logic de-activation: in case at least one generator is already running, the delay is two seconds
(fixed); in case at least one GCB is closed, the delay is null.

When function DIF.2501 is configured for a digital input, the acquisition of this input is
subordinated to the set time in P.0207and/or P.0208; the acquisition time related to the
digital input is ignored.
The board records any status variation of this inhibition to start in the event log (if enabled with
bit 6 of P.0441 parameter):

 EVT.1013: Inhibition active

 EVT.1014: Inhibition not active

7.6.1.1 Differences between and Inhibition
The two functions have different operating logic and purposes. The first emulates the internal
mains sensor behaviour, the second is used to explicitly impede the start of the system
whatever the mains status; this reflects to the status signalling, which, in this way, remains
more coherent with the real status of the system.
7.6.2 Inhibition from clock
By using P.0421, P.0422 and P.0423 parameters, it is possible to select the days of the week
and a time interval during which the generators are enabled to work. Outside this time interval
(and during not-selected days), the “inhibition to automatic intervention” function of the
generators is active (and then the generators will be stopped).
Parameter P.0421 allows to set the generators' weekly operation days. The remaining two
parameters allow to set an hour range valid for all selected days. The range start time (P.0422)
refers to the days set in P.0421, while the range end time (P.0423) refers to the same day, if
its value is higher than P.0422, or to the following day if lower (across midnight). Moreover,
setting P.0422 and P.0423 to the same value, you define a full day range.
The board records any status variation of this inhibition to start in the event log (if enabled with
bit 6 of P.0441 parameter):

• EVT.1221: inhibition activated

• EVT.1222: inhibition deactivated

124 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 7.6.3 Inhibition to load management
In systems where more generators work in parallel, it is possible to use the "load
management", which activates only the generators needed to meet the power required by
loads in specific times That is, exceeding generators are stopped even though, for example, it
is an emergency plant and mains is Off. The “load management” uses the “inhibition to
automatic intervention” function to stop generators.
7.6.4 Inhibition due to mains failure
In systems where the generators work only in parallel with the mains, should the mains fail,
the controller would force the opening of the MGCB circuit breaker and, after a configurable
waiting time (P.0899), it would activate the “inhibition to automatic intervention” to stop the
generators until the mains is again "within tolerance".

The controller records every variation of this specific inhibition:

• EVT.1223: inhibition activated

• EVT.1224: inhibition deactivated

7.6.5 circuit breaker
In systems where more generators work in parallel, a generator's GCB circuit breaker might
not open when the generator must be stopped. In this condition, notwithstanding the stop
command, the engine would keep running with all external services unpowered (oil pumps and
the like). In these conditions, it is possible to inhibit the closure of MGCB (P.0805), and to force
its opening in case it is already closed: the generators are stopped (by means of the “inhibition
to automatic intervention”) waiting until the problem is solved.

The controller records every variation of this specific inhibition:

• EVT.1225: inhibition activated.

• EVT.1226: inhibition deactivated.

7.6.6 Signalling
The controller makes the statuses of the single “inhibition to automatic interventions” available
for the AND/OR logics, through the following internal statuses:

• ST.080: from contact.

• ST.081: from clock/calendar.

• ST.083: it’s not possible to work in island mode and mains failure.

• ST.084: for GCB circuit breaker not open.

7.7
In automatic mode, once the generators have been started, the controller normally tries to
close the MGCB circuit breaker (if it exists). In these conditions, it is possible to force the
opening of the MGCB by using the “inhibition to supply the loads” function. Note: if the MGCB
circuit breaker is not present in the plant, these inhibitions will act on the GCBs of the
generators.

This internal function acts in all automatic modes (AUTO, TEST and REMOTE START). The
activation of this function does not result in the activation of anomalies.

If the "inhibition to supply the loads" is activated when MGCB is already closed, the controller
tries to open it, by carrying out generators power discharge first (if possible).

It is possible to activate this function in different ways, described in the following paragraphs.

The controller records an event when the "inhibition to supply the loads" is deactivated:

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 125

 • EVT.1081: inhibition deactivated
7.7.1 Inhibition from contact
It is possible to configure a digital input through DIF.2502 function (“inhibition to supply loads”).
When this input is active, the inhibition to supply the loads is active.

The controller records an event when this inhibition is activated:

• EVT.1080: inhibition activated (by contact).

7.7.2 Modbus commands
These commands can be enabled by a digital input configured with function DIF.2706
("Enables serial ports commands": if this input exists, it should be active. The commands can
be protected with a password (P.0004) which must be entered before any command. To send
the command it is necessary to write in sequence (within 5 seconds):

• HOLDING REGISTER 101: write the password configured with the parameter P.0004.

• HOLDING REGISTER 102:

o “31” or “32” inhibition to supply the loads (it forces MGCB open).

o “33” to deactivate the inhibition to the automatic supply.

The control remains active for 30 seconds from the time it is received by the controller: it is
therefore necessary to repeat it about every 25 seconds until the inhibition to power load
should be kept active.

The controller records an event when this inhibition is activated:

• EVT.1202: inhibition activated.

7.7.3 Due to mains failure
In systems where the generators work only in parallel with the mains, (see [8]), if the mains
fail, the controller will force the immediate opening of the MGCB circuit breaker, and will
activate the “inhibition to supply the loads” to avoid its closure. The inhibition will be cancelled
when the mains is "within tolerance" again.

The controller records an event when this inhibition is activated:

• EVT.1201: inhibition activated

7.7.4 circuit breaker
In systems where more generators work in parallel, a generator's GCB circuit breaker might
not open when the generator must be stopped. In this condition, notwithstanding the stop
command, the engine would keep running with all external services unpowered (oil pumps and
the like). In these conditions, it is possible to inhibit the closure of MGCB (P.0805), and to force
its opening in case it is already closed: the controller activates the “inhibition to supply the
loads” to impede the closure (or force the opening) of MGCB.

The controller records an event when this inhibition is activated:

• EVT.1203: inhibition activated

7.7.5 Inhibition for synchronization on MCB
In a system composed of more than one generator, that can supply both in island mode and
in parallel with the mains (MSB + MSTP or MPtM + MSB), some external logics (among which
another MC400) can act on generators voltage and frequency to synchronize the generators
bus to the mains, to close the MCB or MGCB circuit breakers. At this stage, the controller
activates the “inhibition to supply the loads” if its own MGCB is open: in this way, it avoids its
closure, in order not to disturb the ongoing synchronization.

126 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 The controller records an event when this inhibition is activated:

• EVT.1204: inhibition activated

7.7.6 Inhibition for MCB synchronization failure
If the parameter P.9515 allows a short blackout on the loads in case of MCB synchronization
failure, the controller must open MGCB to close MCB without synchronization: to force the
opening of MGCB, it uses an “inhibition to supply the loads”.
7.7.7 s
If parameter P.9503 configures the MGCB circuit breaker as “powered by the generators”, if
there are no voltages un the generators bus and there are no GCB closed (detected by the
CAN bus), the controller must open MGCB: to force its opening, it uses an “inhibition to supply
the loads”.
7.7.8
If the controller is in TEST mode, and the “TEST without load” has been selected, the controller
must open MGCB: to force its opening, it uses an “inhibition to supply the loads”.
7.7.9 Signalling
The controller makes the statuses of the single "inhibition to supply the load" available, for
AND/OR logics, through the following internal statuses:

• ST.088: from contact.

• ST.089: it’s not possible to work in island mode and mains failure.

• ST.090: for commands from the serial port.

• ST.091: for GCB not opened.

• ST.092: for MCB synchronization failure.

• ST.093: for “no supplying generators”.

• ST.094: for “TEST without load”.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 127

 7.8
The controller has four channels for the measurement of the currents (three main channels
and one auxiliary). The operator can specify the electrical lines they are connected to:

• P.0124: it selects the electrical lines to which the three main channels are connected.

• P.0130: it selects the electrical line to which the auxiliary channel is connected.

Both parameters support the following values:

• 0: on the electrical lines of the generators (MGCB).

• 1: on the electrical lines of the loads.

• 2: on the electrical lines of the mains (MCB).

The controller can perform power measurements, using all four channels. For the auxiliary
channel, the controller assumes that it is connected to the line L1 of the source selected by
the parameter P.0130; if such source is three-phases, the controller multiplies the calculated
powers by 3, assuming the loads are correctly shared among the electrical lines. If it is not,
the operator can correct the calculations using parameter P.0132:

total kW = L1 kW * 3 * P.0132.

Depending on what configured by means parameters P.0124 and P.0130, the controller
assigns the calculated powers to the mains, to the loads or to the generators (MGCB).
7.8.1 Power measurements on the generators
The controller calculates (from the data received through the CAN bus link) the total active
and reactive powers supplied by the generators. Then, it calculates the power factor and the
load type from these powers. This information is shown on page M.01 under the icon of the
GCB circuit breaker (if closed).
7.8.2 Power measurements on the mains
The controller can acquire the active power measurement of the mains in different ways,
evaluated in that order:

• From an analogue input configured with the function AIF.2303 (“Power on the mains”).

• By the three main current measurement channels, if P.0124 is set to 2.

• By the auxiliary current measurement channel, if P.0130 is set to 2.

The controller can acquire the reactive power measurement of the mains in different ways,
evaluated in that order:

• By the three main current measurement channels, if P.0124 is set to 2.

• By the auxiliary current measurement channel, if P.0130 is set to 2.

The controller can acquire the power factor and the load type measurement of the mains in
different ways, evaluated in that order:

• Measured by the controller using the three main current measurement channels, if
P.0124 is set to 2.

• Calculates from the active and reactive power on the mains (if both available).

This information is shown on page M.01 under the icon of the MCB circuit breaker (if closed).
7.8.3 Power measurements on MGCB
The controller can acquire the active and reactive power measurements on the MGCB in
different ways, evaluated in that order:

128 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 • By the three main current measurement channels, if P.0124 is set to 0. In this case,
the controller also measures the power factor and the load type.

• By the auxiliary current measurement channel, if P.0130 is set to 2. In this case the
controller calculates the power factor and the load type from the active and reactive
power on the MGCB (if both available).

This information is shown on page M.01 under the icon of the MGCB circuit breaker (if closed).
7.8.4 Power measurements on the loads
The controller can acquire the active and reactive power measurements on the loads in
different ways, evaluated in that order:

• By the three main current measurement channels, if P.0124 is set to 1. In this case,
the controller also measures the power factor and the load type.

• By the auxiliary current measurement channel, if P.0130 is set to 1. In this case the
controller calculates the power factor and the load type from the active and reactive
power on the MGCB (if both available).

This information is shown on page M.01 near the icon of the loads.
7.8.5 Calculated powers
The controller can so manage up to four power measurements (mains, loads, MGCB and
generators) but it can measure only two of them (one more is calculated from the data received
from the CAN bus link). So, the forth one must be calculated from the others.

If the controller cannot acquire the powers on the MGCB, it can “copy” them from the powers
supplied by the generators, if MGCB is closed and no other MCxxx controller has its own
MGCB closed (thus, all the power supplied by the generators is flowing through this MGCB).

If the controller cannot acquire the powers on the loads, it can get them in the following ways:

• If MCB is opened and MGCB is closed: the powers on the loads is the same as the
power on the MGCB.

• If MCB is closed and MGCB is opened: the powers on the loads is the same as the
power on the mains.

• If MCB is closed and MGCB is closed: if the powers on the mains and on the MGCB
are both available, the controller can calculate the power on the loads as their sum. It
can then calculate the power factor and the load type from the calculated active and
reactive power.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 129

 7.9
The controller can manage both MCB and MGCB circuit breakers. Anyway, it accepts that
these circuit breakers could be controlled by external logics (steadily or temporarily).

MGCB circuit breaker is optional for all kinds of plant:

• If it exists, the related lamp shows its status.

• If it does not exist, the controller considers it existent, externally managed and always
closed. In this case, the related lamp is always switched on.

MCB circuit breaker is never optional.

• For “island” only plants (“MPM”) it is not managed. The related lamp is always
switched off.

• For all other plant types, MCB always exists, and the related lamp shows its status. If
it is configured as not existing, the controller signals a wrong configuration by the
warning 237 and it considers it existent, externally managed and always opened. In
this case, the related lamp is always switched off.

Both circuit breakers can be managed by the controller or by external devices. If they are
managed by external devices, their statuses must be connected to MC400 (otherwise, it will
signal again a wrong configuration by the warning 273).

Through the P.0854 parameter it is possible to configure the way MC400 must manage the
MGCB circuit breaker:

• 0: not managed.

• 0: the circuit breaker is managed by the controller, that cannot use synchronization to
close it.

• 1: the circuit breaker is managed by the controller, that can use synchronization to
close it

• 2: the circuit breaker is controlled by an external device, and the controller cannot use
synchronization to close it.

• 3: the circuit breaker is controlled by an external device, and the controller can use
synchronization to close it.

At the same way, through P.0855 parameter, it is possible to configure the way the controller
must manage MCB circuit breaker (see previous description).
7.9.1 Digital outputs
7.9.1.1 Circuit breakers commands
Four different commands can be used for the management of the MCB breakers:

 DOF.2001 - “Minimum voltage coil for MCB (NC)”. This function can be used to supply
the minimum voltage coil (if any) of the circuit breaker. The controller enables this
output when it wants to open the breaker, and disables it when it wants to close the
breaker: the real closing command will be activated with at least 0.5 seconds after the
disabling of this output. A contact which is normally closed should therefore be used,
so that when the controller is not supplied, the minimum voltage coil is enabled and
the breaker can be closed. If the breaker should open without any explicit command
from the controller (for example for the trip of its protections), it is possible to configure
a delay between the breaker opening and the activation of this command (P.0246, for
default set to zero): this function is useful for some small size breakers to acquire the
TRIP contact (which resets immediately as soon as the breaker is commanded in
opening).

130 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

  DOF.2002 - “Coil for opening of MCB”. The controller enables this output when it wants
to open the circuit breaker: the output goes back in standby once the circuit breaker
feedback indicates that it is open (or when the opening time-out expires).

 DOF.2003 - “Coil for closing MCB”. The controller enables this output when it wants
to close the circuit breaker (ensuring that the function DOF.2001 has been active for
at least 0.5 seconds): the output goes back in standby once the circuit breaker
indicates that it is closed (or when the closing time-out expires, or the synchronism
condition no longer exists).

 DOF.2004 - “Stable opening command for MCB”. The controller activates this output
when it wants to open the circuit breaker: the output remains activated even with the
circuit breaker is opened. The controller disables this output when it wants to close
the breaker (by assuring that the possible DOF.2001 function is active for at least 0.5
seconds): the output remains disabled even when the circuit breaker is closed.
Therefore, for the MCB breaker to close with the controller unpowered, the normally
closed contact must be used. Use this function with contactors, not with the motorized
breakers.

Four different commands can be used for the management of the MGCB breakers:

 DOF.2031 - “Minimum voltage coil for MGCB”. This function can be used to supply
the minimum voltage coil (if any) of the circuit breaker. The controller enables this
output when it wants to close the breaker, and disables it when it wants to open the
breaker: the real closing command will be activated with at least 0.5 seconds after the
enabling of this output. If the breaker should open without any explicit command from
the controller (for example for the trip of its protections), it is possible to configure a
delay between the breaker opening and the activation of this command (P.0247, for
default set to zero): this function is useful for some small size breakers to acquire the
TRIP contact (which resets immediately as soon as the breaker is commanded in
opening).

 DOF.2032 - “Coil for opening of MGCB”. The controller enables this output when it
wants to open the circuit breaker: the output goes back in standby once the circuit
breaker feedback indicates that it is open (or when the opening time-out expires).

 DOF.2033 - “Coil for closing MGCB”. The controller enables this output when it wants
to close the circuit breaker (ensuring that the function DOF.2031 has been active for
at least 0.5 seconds): the output goes back in standby once the circuit breaker
indicates that it is closed (or when the closing time-out expires, or the synchronism
condition no longer exists).

 DOF.2034 - “Stable closing command for MGCB”. The controller activates this output
when it wants to close the circuit breaker (by assuring that the possible DOF.2031
function is active for at least 0.5 seconds): the output remains activated even with the
circuit breaker is closed. The controller disables this output when it wants to open the
breaker: the output remains disabled even when the circuit breaker is opened. Use
this function with contactors, not with the motorized breakers.

Of course, it is not necessary to use all possible commands for the circuit breakers. It is
important that the controller, if it must command the circuit breaker, manages both the opening
and the closing command. The possibilities are:

• Only the stable command.

• The stable command and the minimum voltage coil.

• The closure command and the minimum voltage coil.

• The closure command and the opening command.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 131

 • The closure command, the opening command and the minimum voltage coil.

It is possible to use different commands for the two circuit breakers.

The following table shows the statuses of all commands, during each phases of the circuit
breaker management. It is referred to MGCB circuit breaker: remember that “minimum voltage
coil” and “static command” works in the opposite way for MCB circuit breaker.
Circuit Minimum Opening Closing Stable
breaker voltage coil coil command
coil
Opened
Closing X X X
Closed X X
Opening X

As in the previous table, the controller activates different commands when the circuit breaker
is “open” or “closed”. If the circuit breaker status changes, the controller should change some
of its commands to follow the new status. This is dangerous because the circuit breaker status
is acquired by a digital input, and so possible problems could bring to faulty statuses:

• If circuit breaker status changes from “closed” to “opened”, the controller can follow
the new status without big problems. In fact, even if the “opened” status is a “wrong”
information (due to disturbs, broken wires and so on), the only problem is an
unnecessary opening of the circuit breaker: in AUTO mode, the controller will re-close
the circuit breaker if required by plant status. In this case, the controller does not
activate anomalies.

• If the controller detects the status of closed circuit breaker while it is open, the actions
depend on the fact that there is an output for “stable command”.

o “Stable command” not used. To adjust the commands, the controller would
only have to activate the “minimum voltage coil”. This operation alone does
not generate the circuit breaker closing, so it can be carried out without
problems. In this case, the controller does not activate anomalies.

o “Stable command” used. To adjust the commands, the controller would

have to activate the “stable command”. This operation generates the circuit
breaker closing (without any control), so it cannot be carried out. In this case,
the controller activates an anomaly.
7.9.1.1.1 Minimum delays between commands

The controller grants that the following delays between commands are respected:

• Half second between minimum voltage coil and any closure commands.

• The delay configured by parameter P.0220 (“Contactors holding time”) between an

opening command and the next closure command (if set to zero 0.5 seconds are
used).

• The delay configured by parameter P.0220 (“Contactors holding time”) between a

closure command and the next opening command (if set to zero 0.2 seconds are
used).

• The delay configured by parameter P.0219 (“Contactors swap delay”) between the
opening command of one circuit breaker and the closure command of the other circuit
breaker.

Moreover, opening and closure commands are never set together.

7.9.1.2 External consents
Two functions are provided, related to the MCB circuit breaker management:

132 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

  DOF.3081 - “Ready to close MCB”. This function allows an external logic to prevent
or to delay the circuit breaker closure. This output is activated before the closing of
the circuit breaker only if one input is configured as “MCB closure allowed” (DIF.1035):
it is deactivated (and so the circuit breaker will be closed) when that input is active or
after the delay configured for the input elapses.

 DOF.3082 - “Ready to open MCB”. This function is used only when the opening of the
circuit breaker will result in a blackout on the loads, and allows an external logic to
prevent or to delay the circuit breaker opening. This output is activated before the
opening of the circuit breaker only if one input is configured as “MCB opening allowed”
(DIF.1036): it is deactivated (and so the circuit breaker will be opened) when that input
is active or after the delay configured for the input elapses.

Two functions are provided, related to the MGCB circuit breaker management:

 DOF.3083 - “Ready to close MGCB”. This function allows an external logic to prevent
or to delay the circuit breaker closure. This output is activated before the closing of
the circuit breaker only if one input is configured as “MGCB closure allowed”
(DIF.1005): it is deactivated (and so the circuit breaker will be closed) when that input
is active or after the delay configured for the input elapses.

 DOF.3084 - “Ready to open MGCB”. This function is used only when the opening of
the circuit breaker will result in a blackout on the loads, and allows an external logic
to prevent or to delay the circuit breaker opening. This output is activated before the
opening of the circuit breaker only if one input is configured as “MGCB opening
allowed” (DIF.1006): it is deactivated (and so the circuit breaker will be opened) when
that input is active or after the delay configured for the input elapses.
7.9.1.3 Request for synchronization
If a circuit breaker is managed by the controller, but an external synchronizer should be used,
it is possible to use some digital outputs of the controller to enable the external synchronizer.
The following functions are available for the configuration of the digital outputs:

 DOF.3091 - “Synchronization for MGCB”.

 DOF.3092 - “Synchronization for MCB”.

 DOF.3093 - “Synchronization in progress”.

On the contrary, if a circuit breaker is externally managed but the internal synchronizer should
be used, the following function can be used to signal the “synchronized” status:

 DOF.3094 - “Synchronized”.

For more details see document [8].

7.9.2 Digital inputs
The digital inputs of the controller can be used for various purposes, within the scope of the
management of the circuit breakers.
7.9.2.1 Acquiring breakers status
Three functions are available to get the feedback of the circuit breakers:

• DIF.3002 - “Status of MCB circuit breaker”. Use this function to get the feedback of
the circuit breaker (active input when the circuit breaker is closed).

• DIF.3003 - “Status of MGCB circuit breaker”. Use this function to get the feedback of
the circuit breaker (active input when the circuit breaker is closed).

It isn’t always mandatory to connect the feedback of the circuit breakers to the controller: it
depends on the type of plant (see the document [8]). If the controller gets the feedbacks, it will
use them to:

 Issuing failed opening or failed closing warnings (MCB and MGCB).

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 133

  For its own operating sequence.

 It is also used to detect the status of the circuit breakers when they are commanded
by external devices.

 To show the status of the circuit breakers on the front panel LEDs.

The delay associated to the input (P.2002 for input 1 or equivalent parameter for the other
inputs) is used as maximum time for opening or closing the breaker.

In theory, for those plants that don’t do the parallel with the mains, the controller might also
operate without these feedbacks. In this case, the controller considers that the breaker is
closed as soon as the closure command is activated; it considers that it is open as soon as
the opening command is activated. As a matter of facts, it is always better to connect the
feedback.

Through parameter P.0847 it is possible to define if the MCB breaker is supplied by mains
voltage. In this case, with mains off, MCB opens, but the controller does not activate the
relative warning of MCB closure failed. In the same way, through parameter P.9503 it is
possible to define if the MGCB breaker is supplied by the generators bus voltage. In this case,
with generators bus off, MGCB opens, but the controller does not activate the relative warning
of MGCB closure failed
7.9.2.2 Temporary override of the management of the circuit breakers
It is possible to use some digital inputs to communicate to the controller that the management
of one or both circuit breakers is temporarily managed by an external device (even if P.0854
and P.0855 parameters indicate that the circuit breaker is controlled by the controller):

 DIF.1003 - “MGCB controlled externally”.

 DIF.1033 - “MCB controlled externally”.

Until the input is active, the board never tries either to open or close the circuit breaker: but, if
the circuit breaker is externally opened/closed, the controller will adapt its own commands to
the new status of the circuit breaker, in order not to cause any unwanted opening/closure when
the input is deactivated.
7.9.2.3 Manual controls for the circuit breakers
It is possible to connect to the digital inputs of the controller some external buttons to
open/close the circuit breakers. The controller will use these inputs (only in MAN) exactly in
the same way as the MCB and MGCB buttons present on the panel.

 DIF.1001 - “Request for MGCB closure”.

 DIF.1002 - “Request for MGCB opening”.

 DIF.1031 - “Request for MCB closure”.

 DIF.1032 - “Request for MCB opening”.

7.9.2.4 Request for synchronization
If a circuit breaker isn’t managed by the controller, it will be anyway possible to take advantage
of the internal synchronization function (see document [8]). When the external logic wants to
close a circuit breaker and synchronization is required, it should ask the controller for the
synchronization, by activating a digital input. The following functions are available to configure
the digital input:

 DIF.1004 - “Synchronization request for MGCB”.

 DIF.1034 - “Synchronization request for MCB”.

For more details refer to the document [8].

134 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 7.9.2.5 External consents
The controller, before opening/closing the circuit breakers, can accept consents from outside.
The following functions are available to configure the digital input:

 DIF.1005 - “MGCB closure allowed”.

 DIF.1006 - “MGCB opening allowed”.

 DIF.1035 - “MCB closure allowed”.

 DIF.1036 - “MCB opening allowed”.

See the description in 5.4.3.

7.9.3 Management logic

7.9.3.1 MCB command logic
The controller always allows the opening of MCB.

The closing of MCB is possible only if all the following conditions are checked:

• MCB is not forced to open as “interface device”.

• Only in AUTO, if MCB is configured as “supplied by mains” (P.0847 = 0).

o The mains must be live and in tolerance per the AMF thresholds.

o If the plant requires the parallel with the mains and it is configured as interface
device, the mains must be in tolerance per the parallel thresholds.

The parameter P.0248 allows to select the timing for MCB opening, when the controller is in
AUTO mode (for the emergency service to the mains):

• P.0248=0.

o Plant without MGCB: following a mains failure, the controller will open MCB
when at least one generator is “ready to supply”.

o Plant with MGCB: following a mains failure, the controller will open MCB just
before closing MGCB.

• P.0248=1: following a mains failure, the controller will open MCB as soon as the
“mains failure delay” is elapsed.

If the MCB closing is possible, the controller can carry it out in three ways, as described below.

With synchronization. This happens if all the following conditions are checked:

• Only in MAN and AUTO.

• If the plant requires the parallel with the mains (P.0802 >= 7).

• If the synchronization on MCB is enabled (P.0855 = 2 or 4).

• If the mains is in tolerance per the parallel thresholds. Note: in MAN, it is enough that the
mains is in tolerance; in AUTO, it must be in the time configured in P.0903.

• If there is voltage on the loads bus.

• If MGCB exists, it must be closed.

• If there is voltage on the generators bus.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 135

 • If an external synchronizer has not been configured, at least a GCB circuit breaker must
be closed.

• If MCB is externally managed (P.0855 = 4), the digital input that requires the
synchronization must be active (function DIF.1034).

• If the gensets are not in parallel with the mains by another MCxxx (MC400 does not allow
the simultaneous parallel with two mains).

Directly without synchronization. This happens if all the following conditions are checked:

• If it is not possible to close the circuit breaker with the synchronization (see above).

• If MCB is managed by the controller.

• If there is no voltage on the loads bus.

• If MGCB does not exist, or if it exists but it is closed:

o If there is no voltage on the generators bus.

o If there are no gensets with GCB closed.

o If the plant requires the parallel with the mains (otherwise, the controller does
not allow the simultaneous closing of MCB and MGCB).

With changeover (opening MGCB). This happens if all the following conditions are checked:

• If it is not possible to close the circuit breaker with the synchronization (see above).

• If it is not possible to close the circuit breaker without synchronization (see above).

• If MCB is managed by the controller (P.0855 = 1 or 2).

• If MGCB exists (P.0854 <> 0):

o MGCB must be managed by the controller (P.0854 = 1 or 2).

• If MGCB does not exist (P.0854 <> 0):

o If P.9506 is set to one, all controllers with GCB closed must be “managed by
MCxxx”, so that MC400 can force the opening of GCB.

o There shouldn’t be gensets with GCB closed, managed by controllers that are
not connected to CAN bus PMCB.

If none of the three ways can be used, MCB cannot be closed.

7.9.3.2 MGCB command logic
The controller always allows the opening of MGCB.

The closing of MGCB is possible only if all the following conditions are checked:

• MGCB is not forced to open as “interface device”.

• Only in AUTO, if MGCB is configured as “supplied by gensets” (P.9503 = 0).

o There must be voltage on the generators bus.

o At least one GCB must be closed.

If the MGCB closing is possible, the controller can carry it out in three ways, as described
below.

With synchronization. This happens if all the following conditions are checked:

136 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 • Only in MAN and AUTO.

• If the plant requires the parallel with the mains (P.0802 >= 7).

• If the synchronization on MGCB is enabled (P.0854=2 or 4).

• If there is voltage on the loads bus.

• If MCB is closed.

• If the mains is in tolerance according to the mains parallel thresholds.

• If there is voltage on the generators bus.

• If an external synchronizer has not been configured, at least one GCB circuit breaker must
be closed.

• If MGCB is externally managed (P.0855 = 4), the digital input that requires the
synchronization must be active (function DIF.1004).

• If the warning W271 is not active (“MGCB synchronization failure”).

• If the gensets are not in parallel with the mains by another MCxxx (MC400 does not allow
the simultaneous parallel with two mains).

Directly without synchronization. This happens if all the following conditions are checked:

• If it is not possible to close the circuit breaker with the synchronization (see above).

• If MGCB is managed by the controller.

• If there is no voltage on the loads bus, or on the generators bus and there are no
gensets with GCB closed.

• If MCB is closed:

o If there is no voltage on the loads bus.

o If there are no gensets with GCB closed.

o If the plant requires the parallel with the mains (otherwise, the controller does
not allow the simultaneous closing of MCB and MGCB).

o The protections for the parallel with the mains must not be active.

• If MCB is open:

o If the plant allows to supply the loads in island mode (P.0802 <> 8).

With changeover (opening MGCB). This happens if all the following conditions are checked:

• If it is not possible to close the circuit breaker with the synchronization (see above).

• If it is not possible to close the circuit breaker without synchronization (see above).

• If MGCB is managed by the controller (P.0854 = 1 or 2).

• If MCB is managed by the controller (P.0855 = 1 or 2).

• If the plant allows to supply the loads in island mode (P.0802 <> 8).

If none of the three ways can be used, MGCB cannot be closed.

7.9.3.3 Management logic in OFF/RESET mode
If there is a MGCB circuit breaker managed by the controller, and it is closed, the controller
commands its opening.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 137

 If there is a MCB circuit breaker managed by the controller, and it is open, in OFF/RESET
mode it can be closed without synchronization only: the controller waits for the gensets to be
disconnected from the loads and then it commands its closing. To have MCB closed, all the
following conditions must be checked:

• There must be no voltage on the bus of both loads and mains; otherwise, it’s
impossible to close without synchronization.

• If there is a MGCB circuit breaker and it is commanded by the controller, it must be

open.

• If there is not a MGCB circuit breaker, or it is closed but it is externally managed, all
GCB circuit breakers must be open.

The controller removes the request of start for the gensets: this usually causes the immediate
opening of the GCB circuit breakers. This opening may happen after the phase of fast unload
of the power if the following condition are met:

• MGCB does not exist, or it is closed (externally managed or in case of opening failure):
the load is still connected to the gensets.

• There are some gensets “not managed by MCxxx” with GCB closed, which must stay
in parallel.
7.9.3.4 Management logic in MAN mode
The command of all circuit breakers is possible only if there are no active alarms and unloads
(otherwise, the controller acts as in OFF/RESET).

If the MCB circuit breaker exists and it is managed by the controller, it is possible to request
its manual opening and closing in different ways:

• By using the MCB button on the controller panel. This command works as a toggle: it
commands the opening if the circuit breaker is closed, it commands the closing if the
circuit breaker is open.

• By using the digital inputs of the controller (to connect external buttons that allow the
manual opening/closing of the circuit breakers). It is possible to use the following
functions to configure the digital inputs:

o DIF.1032 - “Request for MCB opening”.

o DIF.1031 - “Request for MCB closing”.

These commands act on shifting the input from “not active” to “active”, not on the
steady “active” state. It is possible to use both opening/closing commands or just the
closing one. If only the closing command is used, it acts as “toggle”: it commands the
breaker opening if it is closed, or its closing if it is open.

• By Modbus commands. The commands can be protected by a password (P.0004)

which must be entered before any command, and they can be deactivated through a
digital input (DIF.2706). To send the command it is necessary to write in sequence
(within 5 seconds):

o HOLDING REGISTER 101: write the password configured with the parameter
P.0004.

o HOLDING REGISTER 102: write the value:

▪ “41”: it requires the immediate opening of MCB (without the loads

transfer from the mains to the generators).

▪ “42”: it requires the opening of MCB (with the loads transfer from the
mains to the generators).

138 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 ▪ “43”: it requires the closure of MCB (with or without the
synchronization).

• By using a proper “SMS” (see document [3]).

If the MGCB circuit breaker exists and it is managed by the controller, it is possible to request
its manual opening and closing in different ways:

• By using the MGCB button on the controller panel. This command works as a toggle:
it commands the opening if the circuit breaker is closed, it commands the closing if the
circuit breaker is open.

• By using the digital inputs of the controller (to connect external buttons that allow the
manual opening/closing of the circuit breakers). It is possible to use the following
functions to configure the digital inputs:

o DIF.1002 - “Request for MGCB opening”.

o DIF.1001 - “Request for MCGB closing”.

These commands act on shifting the input from “not active” to “active”, not on the
steady “active” state. It is possible to use both opening/closing commands or just the
closing one. If only the closing command is used, it acts as “toggle”: it commands the
breaker opening if it is closed, or its closing if it is open.

• By Modbus commands. The commands can be protected by a password (P.0004)

which must be entered before any command, and they can be deactivated through a
digital input (DIF.2706). To send the command it is necessary to write in sequence
(within 5 seconds):

o HOLDING REGISTER 101: write the password configured with the parameter
P.0004.

o HOLDING REGISTER 102: write the value:

▪ “31”: it requires the immediate opening of MGCB (without the loads

transfer from the generators to the mains).

▪ “32”: it requires the opening of MGCB (with the loads transfer from
the generators to the mains).

▪ “33”: it requires the closure of MGCB (with or without the

synchronization).

• By using a proper “SMS” (see document [3]).

Note: if MGCB does not exist, or if it is managed by the controller, the manual
commands described previously works on the GCB circuit breakers of the controllers
that are “managed by MCxxx” (if enabled by bit 3 of parameter P.0495).

It is always possible to command the manual opening of the circuit breakers.

If the MCB opening is required while the gensets are in parallel with the mains, the controller
tries to transfer the loads from the mains to the gensets, then opens MCB. If, during the loads
transfer, the opening of the circuit breaker is required again (button or active digital input for a
second), the MCB circuit breaker is immediately open.

If the MGCB opening is required while the gensets are in parallel with the mains, the controller
tries to transfer the loads from the gensets to the mains (by setting 0 kW as power setpoint),
then opens MGCB. If, during the unload ramp, the opening of the circuit breaker is required
again (button or active digital input for a second), the MGCB circuit breaker is immediately
open.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 139

 Normally, it is always possible to command the manual closing of the circuit breakers. As
described in the previous paragraphs, the controller checks if it can close the circuit breaker
with the synchronization or directly without synchronization. If it cannot close it in these ways,
check if it can close it with the switch: so, it is possible that the controller opens MCB to be
able to close MGCB or vice versa (this behaviour must be enabled by the bit 2 of the parameter
P.0495).

The controller activates some warnings for opening or closing failure of the circuit breakers if
it acquires their feedback. In case of MCB circuit breaker opening failure, the controller
activates the warning W023. In case of MGCB circuit breaker opening failure, the controller
activates the warning W024. If the controller commands the closing of MCB without
synchronization, and MCB does not close, the controller activates the warning W013. If the
controller commands the closing of MGCB without synchronization, and MGCB does not close,
the controller activates the warning W013.
7.9.3.5 Management logic in AUTO mode
In automatic modes, the controller autonomously decides if it should start/stop the gensets
and open/close the circuit breakers, according to the type of plant, the mains voltage and the
status of the digital inputs.

In the automatic management of the circuit breakers (not in manual), even if the circuit
breakers are managed by the controller, it is possible to limit the opening/closing externally. In
details:

MCB circuit breaker

• If there is a digital input configured with the function DIF.1036 (“MCB opening
allowed”), normally the controller waits for this digital input to be activated before
opening the circuit breaker.

The controller ignores the approval if at least one of the following conditions is
checked:

o The controller is in OFF/RESET mode.

o The controller is in MAN mode.

o The MGCB circuit breaker does not exist, or it exists but it is closed.

o The MCB circuit breaker must be opened immediately after the trip of the
protections for the parallel with the mains.

In the other cases, the procedure followed by the controller is:

o It activates a possible configured output with the function DOF.3082 (“Ready

to open MCB”), to signal the external logic its need to open the circuit breaker.

o It waits that the configured digital input with the function DIF.1036 becomes
active; this wait lasts for the time configured for the input (P.2001 for input 1).
If the time configured is 0, the wait lasts forever.

o It commands the opening of the circuit breaker.

• If there is a digital input configured with the function DIF.1035 (“MCB closing allowed”),
normally the controller waits for this digital input to be activated before closing the
circuit breaker.

The controller ignores the approval if at least one of the following conditions is
checked:

o The controller is in OFF/RESET mode.

o The controller is in MAN mode.

140 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 o There are active alarms or unloads.

o The intervention of the gensets is not required and MCB has not been opened
by the controller (so MC400 should close it again).

In the other cases, the procedure followed by the controller is:

o It activates a possible configured output with the function DOF.3081 (“Ready

to close MCB”), to signal the external logic its need to close the circuit breaker.

o It waits that the configured digital input with the function DIF.1035 becomes
active; this wait lasts for the time configured for the input (P.2001 for input 1).
If the time configured is 0, the wait lasts forever.

o It commands the closing of the circuit breaker (with or without

synchronization).

MGCB circuit breaker

• If there is a digital input configured with the function DIF.1006 (“MGCB opening
allowed”), normally the controller waits for this digital input to be activated before
opening the circuit breaker.

The controller ignores the approval if at least one of the following conditions is
checked:

o The controller is in OFF/RESET mode.

o The controller is in MAN mode.

o The MGCB circuit breaker must be opened immediately after the trip of the
protections for the parallel with the mains.

o There are active alarms or unloads.

o The intervention of the gensets is not required and MGCB has not been closed
by the controller (so MC400 should open it again).

In the other cases, the procedure followed by the controller is:

o It activates a possible configured output with the function DOF.3084 (“Ready

to open MGCB”), to signal the external logic its need to open the circuit
breaker.

o It waits that the configured digital input with the function DIF.1006 becomes
active; this wait lasts for the time configured for the input (P.2001 for input 1).
If the time configured is 0, the wait lasts forever.

o It commands the opening of the circuit breaker.

• If there is a digital input configured with the function DIF.1005 (“MGCB closing
allowed”), normally the controller waits for this digital input to be activated before
closing the circuit breaker.

The controller ignores the approval if at least one of the following conditions is
checked:

o The controller is in OFF/RESET mode.

o The controller is in MAN mode.

In the other cases, the procedure followed by the controller is:

o It activates a possible configured output with the function DOF.3083 (“Ready

to close MGCB”), to signal the external logic its need to close the circuit
breaker.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 141

 o It waits that the configured digital input with the function DIF.1005 becomes
active; this wait lasts for the time configured for the input (P.2001 for input 1).
If the time configured is 0, the wait lasts forever.

o It commands the closing of the circuit breaker (with or without

synchronization).

Notes MCB

If this circuit breaker exists and is managed by the controller, it is normally kept closed. The
controller opens it only in some cases, depending on plant configuration:

• Parallel to mains. MCB is opened only if the mains fails and if MCB is configured as
interface device. Additionally, it can be opened if the “transfer to gensets” mode is
selected after the loads are entirely moved to the gensets.

• Stand-by supply. MCB is opened before the MGCB closing (or GCB closing in case
MGCB does not exist), to manage the load switch between mains and gensets. In the
same way, MCB is closed after MGCB has been opened (or GCB if MGCB does not
exist); if configured as “synchronizable”, the controller will try to close it with
synchronization, before opening MGCB.

Notes MGCB

If this circuit breaker exists and it is managed by the controller, the controller closes it (if
required) with different time, depending on conditions and plant configuration.

• Parallel to mains. Normally the controller closes MGCB (without synchronization)

before generator’s GCB. This is the best solution, because it avoids multiple
synchronization on each genset. This cannot be done if:

o For any reason, at least one GCB is already closed when the controller must
close MGCB.

o MGCB is supplied by the gensets bus (P.9503=0).

o The operator has selected to close GCB before MGCB by parameter P.9513.

o If MGCB cannot be closed without synchronization, the controller waits that at

least one GCB is closed, and then closed MGCB with synchronization.

Pay attention to wrong configurations: if MGCB is configured as “not

synchronized” and “supplied by generators bus”, the controller will never be able
to close it in parallel with grid (it will be necessary to open MCB, close MGCB
without synchronization and then close MCB with synchronization).

• Stand-by supply. The controller closes MGCB (without synchronization) after the
gensets GCB are closed. Parameter P.0806 allows configuring the timings for MGCB
closure:

• By setting it to 0, the controller closes MGCB after the first circuit breaker GCB
has been closed (“immediate supply”).

• By setting it to 30000, the controller waits the closing of GCB of all the available
gensets “managed by MC400”, then it closes MGCB (“end parallel supply”). In this
case, the nominal power of generators is not checked.

• By setting it to an intermediate value, the controller waits that the nominal power
of all gensets with GCB closed is greater than the set value, and then closes
MGCB. Note: if all GCB are closed, the available power is lower than the threshold,
the controller activates a warning (W008) and then closes MGCB.

• It is also possible to use a digital input configured with the function DIF.2181
(“Immediate supply”), to force the MGCB closing after the first GCB, whatever is
the value set in parameter P.0806.

142 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 7.9.4 Events and signalling
The controller will record any variation of the command and of the status of the circuit breakers
in the event archive, if it is enabled respectively through the bits 4 and 5 of P.0441 parameter:

 EVT.1030: MGCB close command

 EVT.1031: MGCB open command

 EVT.1032: MGCB closed.

 EVT.1033: MGCB open.

 EVT.1035: MCB close command

 EVT.1036: MCB open command

 EVT.1037: MCB closed.

 EVT.1038: MCB open.

The controller makes commands and statuses of the circuit breakers available, for AND/OR
logics, through the following internal statuses:

 ST.065 - "MCB status"

 ST.066 - "MGCB status"

 ST.068 - “MGCB closure command (stable)”.

 ST.069 - “MCB closure command (stable)”.

 ST.070 - “MGCB minimum voltage coil”.

 ST.071 - "MGCB opening pulse”.

 ST.072 - "MGCB closure pulse”.

 ST.073 - “MCB minimum voltage coil”.

 ST.074 - "MCB opening pulse”.

 ST.075 - "MCB closure pulse”.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 143

 7.10
The controller, for its operating sequences, must know if there are gensets that have their GCB
closed. Usually, the controller acquires this information via CAN bus PMCB. In case there are
gensets that are not connected to the CAN bus link, it is possible to use a digital input
configured with the function DIF.3004 (“Status of GCB of other gensets”): if this input is active,
the controller considers there is at least one genset with GCB closed.

7.11
The controller does not implement any regulations on active power. No PI regulators are
provided for active power: the controller selects the power setpoint for generators, and the
power regulation task is performed by each genset controller.

The controller can adjust the active power setpoint for generators through the CAN bus link.
This setpoint is used by the genset controllers only when generators are in parallel with mains.
When they are in “island mode”, the genset controllers automatically manage load sharing
(without MC400) between available generators, as a percentage of their nominal power.

Important note:

• P.9506 = 1: only the controllers “managed by MCxxx” use the power setpoint
transmitted by MC400. The controllers not “managed by MCxxx” use the proper local
setpoint. The controller considers this info when calculating the power setpoint
transmitted to the genset controllers.

• P.9506 = 0: the MC400 controller transmits its power setpoint as “SYSTEM BASE
LOAD”. It is automatically managed by the genset controllers, taking care of the ones
that are working in a different mode.

Important note: if a plant is composed by more MCxxx, the system allows the parallel with
the mains only on one of them. If the circuit breakers would be all managed externally, there
could be more MCxxx managing the parallel with the mains: in this case, the power setpoint
used by the gensets is the one transmitted from the MCxxx controller with minor PMCB
address.

There are three different operating modes for the parallel with the mains, described in the
following.

Important note: whatever is the mode selected on the controller, it corresponds to a power
setpoint for the genset controllers.
7.11.1 BASE LOAD
This term is used to indicate the working mode where the power setpoint for generators is
selected by the operator and it is not influenced by the local loads.

To select this mode, set parameter P.0880 to “1”.

In this mode, the operator selects the power setpoint for the plant using parameter P.0858,
directly as kW. Values up to 30 MW can be selected. The parameter can be modified also in
MAN o AUTO modes, and directly from display page M.01.

Alternatively, it is possible to use a controller analogue input to configure the setpoint. This
input can be connected to a potentiometer, or any external device that should adjust the power
setpoint of the plant.

To use the analogue input, do the following:

• Configure an analogue input with the function AIF.2307 (“Setpoint for system BASE
LOAD”) (parameter P.4001 for analogue input 1).

• Associate a conversion curve to the analogue input, to convert the acquired voltage
to a kW setpoint. For example:

144 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 After this configuration, by moving the potentiometer between 0 and 5 Vdc the power setpoint
varies between 0 and 3000 kW (the setpoint is displayed on page M.01 but cannot be modified
from the controller panel). Note: once you have configured an analogue input with the
function AIF.2307, the parameter P.0858 is no more used.
7.11.2 IMPORT/EXPORT
This term indicates the working mode in which the power setpoint configured by the operator
is referred to the interconnection point with the mains and not to the gensets: the setpoint for
the gensets is calculated from the selected setpoint and the current power on mains. It is
mandatory that the controller can measure the power on mains.

To select this mode, set parameter P.0880 to “2”.

Otherwise you can set the parameter P.0880 to “1” (“BASE LOAD”) and use a digital input to
switch the working mode between “BASE LOAD” and “IMPORT/EXPORT”. The input must be
configured with the function DIF.2093 (“Selects the import-export mode”): when the input is
“active” (logical status) the working mode is “IMPORT/EXPORT”, when it is “not active” the
working mode is “BASE LOAD”.

The operator can select the power setpoint on mains by using parameter P.0859, directly as
kW. It allows setting values up to +/-10 MW. A positive value means that the plant should
import power from mains, while a negative value indicates that power should be exported to
mains. A setpoint equal to zero selects no power transfers over mains: generators should
supply only local loads. The parameter can be modified also in MAN o AUTO modes, and
directly from display page M.01.

Alternatively, it is possible to use a controller analogue input to acquire the setpoint. This input
can be connected to a potentiometer, or any external device that must adjust the power
setpoint of the plant. To use the analogue input, do the following:

• Configure an analogue input with the function AIF.2309 (“Setpoint for system
IMPORT/EXPORT”) (parameter P.4001 for analogue input 1).

• Associate a conversion curve to the analogue input, to convert the acquired voltage
to a kW setpoint. For example:

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 145

 After this configuration, by moving the potentiometer between 0 and 5 Vdc the power setpoint
varies between -2000 kW (exported) and 2000 kW (imported) (the setpoint is displayed on
page M.01 but cannot be modified from the controller panel). Note: once you have
configured an analogue input with the function AIF.2309, the parameter P.0859 is no
more used.

The power setpoint for the gensets depends on the loads connected. So, it may happen that
with few loads, the gensets should supply a very low power. In this case, the engines do not
work well and if the situation does not change for a long time, they can get damaged. With the
parameter P.0904, it is possible to configure a minimum value of power that the controller
should require from gensets when they are in parallel with the mains in IMPORT/EXPORT
mode.
7.11.3 Transfer to generators
This term indicates a temporary mode that consists in configuring the power currently
consumed by the loads as power setpoint for the gensets. Once the gensets reach the setpoint
(so the mains is no more supplying the loads), the controller opens the mains circuit breaker
(MCB) and the loads are supplied by the gensets.

To select this mode, set parameter P.0880 to “3”. Otherwise you can set this parameter to “1”
(“BASE LOAD”) or “2” (“IMPORT/EXPORT”) and use a digital input to switch the working mode
to “Transfer to generators”. This input must be configured with the function DIF.2096 “Transfer
to gensets”: when the input is “active” (logical status) the working mode is “Transfer to
generators”, when it is “not active” the working mode is the previous one.

This working mode is different if the controller acquires the power on mains or not:

• If the controller acquires the power on mains, the power setpoint for the generators is
calculated as in “IMPORT/EXPORT” mode, assuming 0 kW setpoint on mains. When
generators reach the setpoint no power is flowing on the mains: the MCB circuit
breaker can be opened without load transients on generators.

• If the controller does not acquire the power on mains, the operator must set the power
value required by the loads with the parameter P.0858 (or act on the related analogue
input). This setpoint will be transmitted to the gensets. Once generators reach this
setpoint, MCB circuit breaker will be opened: if setpoint is near actual loads, no load
transients will happen on generators.

Note: if generators are not able to reach the setpoint (because too loads are applied) MCB
circuit breaker will never be opened.

This temporary phase ends when the gensets reach the setpoint or after the configured
maximum delay (unless the gensets cannot supply the power required): the duration of the
ramp (P.0879) is considered as maximum delay for this management (anyhow, MCB is open
only if the gensets can take the load). It is also possible to add a delay by means parameter
P.9517: the controller opens MCB only when the power supplied by the generators reached
the setpoint continuously for this delay. The default value for this parameter is zero.

146 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 7.11.4 Load and unload ramps
The controller does not manage directly the load ramps, but this function is managed by the
gensets controllers.

When the gensets are supplying in parallel with the mains and the MGCB circuit breaker
should be opened, the controller commands the unloading process to gensets (if no alarms
are activated).

The command consists in setting a power reference to the gensets. This reference is
calculated in different ways for the two following conditions:

• There is another MCxxx with MGCB closed. In this case, the gensets are supplying
the loads of more than one MCxxx simultaneously. So, the controller cannot bring the
gensets power to zero, because it would connect the loads of all MCxxx with MGCB
closed to only one mains transformer, which could be overcharged. The controller can
proceed in two ways:

o The controller measures the power that flows through its own MGCB. In this
case, the controller calculates the power setpoint for the gensets to bring to
zero the power that flows through the MGCB. When the power is close to
zero, the controller opens the MGCB, avoiding load transfers on both gensets
and mains transformers.

o The controller does not measure the power that flows through its own MGCB.
In this case, it simply opens its own MGCB: anyhow, this leads to a load
transfer on both gensets and mains transformers.

• There are no other MCxxx with MGCB closed. In this case, the controller requests to
gensets an active power reference equal to 0%. When the gensets power is close to
zero, the controller opens the MGCB, avoiding load transfers on both gensets and
mains transformers.

Then the generator control devices manage by itself the unload ramp for their generators. The
controller waits for the end of the unloading process and then opens the MCB circuit breaker.
The unloading process is terminated when:

• In case there are other MCxxx with MGCB closed and this MC400 does not measure
the power on the MGCB circuit breaker. In this case, the unload ramp is not carried
out.

• In case there are no gensets with GCB closed, the controller stops the unload ramp.

• If the parallel with the mains is not allowed: the unload ramp can last maximum 0.5
seconds.

• If you have configured a maximum duration for the parallel with the mains (parameter
P.0890): the unload ramp is immediately stopped after the gensets are in parallel as
per the time configured.

• If the power supplied by the gensets “managed by MCxxx” is lower than the threshold
set in P.0878 (the power is calculated as sum of the active powers divided by the sum
of the nominal powers of all gensets supplying). The power supplied by the gensets
not “managed by MCxxx” is ignored. In case the controller measures the power on
MGCB and there are other MCxxx with MGCB closed, the controller checks that the
power on MGCB is lower than P.0878. It is also possible to add a delay by means
parameter P.9517: the controller opens MGCB only when the power supplied by the
generators reached the setpoint continuously for this delay. The default value for this
parameter is zero.

Note: if P.9605 is set to 1, the active power setpoint for the unloading procedure is
managed through the SYSTEM BASE LOAD mode. The genset controllers manage
this setpoint by themselves, taking care of the ones that are working in different
modes; however, the setpoint is probably near to zero and, if there are gensets
working in a different mode, it is possible that the system can’t reach it: this is the

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 147

 reason for which, to detect the end of the unload, only the generators “managed by
MCxxx” are considered.

• After the time configured with parameter P.0879 is elapsed from the start of the
process (this is only a timeout, normally MGCB is opened early for the reaching of
power setpoint).

The controller does not change the setpoint for the reactive power (see paragraph below)
during the unload ramp. Whatever is the cos(ɸ) required to the controllers, this corresponds in
a null value of reactive power when the active power supplied by a genset tends to zero: so,
the reactive power unload is indirectly managed by the genset controllers.

7.12
The controller does not implement any regulations on reactive power. No PI regulators are
provided for reactive power: the controller selects the reactive power setpoint for generators,
and the voltage and reactive power regulation tasks are performed by each genset controller.

The reactive power setpoint is not expressed as kvar, it is set as a “power factor”, called also
cos(Φ).

The controller can select the cos(Φ) setpoint for generators through the CAN bus link. This
setpoint is used by the genset controllers only when generators are in parallel with mains.
When they are in “island mode”, the genset controllers automatically manage reactive power
sharing (without MC400) between available generators, as a percentage of their nominal
power.

The setpoint sent by MC400 over the CAN bus is the same for all generators: each genset
controller will convert this setpoint to kvar (based on current active power of that generator);
then it will provide voltage control loop to move generator reactive power to the required kvar.

On MC400, operator selects the setpoint for cos(Φ) using parameter P.0860 (“Reference for
system cos(Φ)”). It allows selecting values between “0.7 inductive” and “0.9 capacitive”. The
parameter can be modified also in MAN o AUTO modes, and directly from display page M.01.
To set a capacitive cos(Φ), the formula “2 - cos(Φ)” must be used. For example, to select a
cos(Φ) equal to 0.95c, the real number is 2.00 – 0.95 → 1.05.

Alternatively, it is possible to use a controller analogue input to configure the setpoint. This
input can be connected to a potentiometer, or to any external device that must adjust the
cos(Φ) setpoint of the plant. To use the analogue input, do the following:

• Configure an analogue input with the function AIF.2405 (“Setpoint for system power
factor”) (parameter P.4001 for analogue input 1).

• Associate a conversion curve to the analogue input, to convert the acquired voltage
to a kW setpoint. For example:

After this configuration, by moving the potentiometer between 0 and 5 Vdc the cos(Φ) setpoint
varies between 0.70 inductive and 0.90 capacitive (the setpoint is displayed on page M.01 but

148 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 cannot be modified from the controller panel). Note: once you have configured an analogue
input with the function AIF.2405, the parameter P.0860 is no more used.

Important note:

• P.9506 = 1: only the controllers “managed by MCxxx” use the cos(Φ) setpoint
transmitted by MC400. The controllers not “managed by MCxxx” use the proper local
setpoint.

• P.9506 = 0: MC400 transmits the cos(Φ) setpoint for the SYSTEM BASE LOAD mode.
The genset controllers manage this setpoint by themselves, taking care about the
ones that are working in a different mode. In this way, the total system cos(Φ) will be
the one required by MC400.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 149

 7.13
Usually, the controller can start/stop the gensets and eventually force the opening of the GCB
circuit breakers through commands on the CAN bus PMCB line. It is possible to use also some
digital outputs for this purpose. The controller has the following two functions for the
configuration of the digital outputs:

• DOF.1005 (“Request to start”). The controller activates this output each time the
intervention of the gensets is required (both in MAN and AUTO). It deactivates this
output when the intervention of the gensets is no longer required. It is possible to wire
this output on the digital inputs of the gensets controllers to command the start/stop
of the engines.

• DOF.3062 (“Ready to supply”). The controller activates this output to signal that it is
possible to connect the loads to the gensets. The output activates only in AUTO, TEST
and REMOTE START, if there are no “load inhibitions” in the following cases:

o If there is a MGCB circuit breaker:

▪ If MGCB is closed, the output is active.

▪ If MGCB is open, the output is active when the nominal power of the
gensets with GCB closed is enough to supply the loads.

o If there is not a MGCB circuit breaker:

▪ If at least one GCB is closed, the output is active.

▪ if no GCB is closed:

• If there is a MCB circuit breaker but it is externally managed,

and the plant does not consider the parallel with the mains:

o If MCB is closed: the output activates when all

gensets “managed by MCxxx” are started; if there
are no gensets “managed by MCxxx”, the output
activates when at least one genset is started.

o If MCB is open, the output is active when the nominal

power of the gensets with GCB closed is enough to
supply the loads.

• In other cases, the output activates when the nominal power

of the gensets with GCB closed is enough to supply the loads.

Usually, the controller can modify the speed and voltage of the gensets through commands
on the CAN bus PMCB line. It is possible to use also some analogue outputs for this purpose.
The controller has the following functions for the configuration of the analogue outputs:

• AOF.1000 (“Speed regulator”). The controller manages this output for sending speed
commands to the genset controllers. The output can be adjusted by the following
parameters:

o P.0831: if set to zero, the output increases to request an increase of the

speed. If set to 1, the output decreases to request an increase of the speed.

o P.0856: it allows to specify the minimum value for the output (%).

o P.0857: it allows to specify the maximum value for the output (%).

• AOF.1001 (“Speed regulator (with curve)”). The controller manages this output for
sending speed commands to the genset controllers. The output can be adjusted by
means a conversion curve.

150 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 • AOF.1002 (“Voltage regulator”). The controller manages this output for sending
voltage commands to the genset controllers. The output can be adjusted by the
following parameters:

o P.0861: if set to zero, the output increases to request an increase of the

voltage. If set to 1, the output decreases to request an increase of the voltage.

o P.0862: it allows to specify the minimum value for the output (%).

o P.0863: it allows to specify the maximum value for the output (%).

• AOF.1003 (“Voltage regulator (with curve)”). The controller manages this output for
sending voltage commands to the genset controllers. The output can be adjusted by
means a conversion curve.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 151

 7.14
This paragraph describes all the plant types managed by MC400, selectable by parameter
P.0802. The controller manages only plant types with more than one genset; anyhow, it is
possible to work (with this plants) even with only one genset. The following notes are valid for
all types of plant:

• See paragraph 7 for the list of the conditions, so that a genset controller is considered
“managed by MCxxx” (remember that, in any case, the genset controllers should be
at least in AUTO to be “managed by MCxxx”).

• The gensets “managed by MCxxx” can be started only if MC400 is not in OFF/RESET
and if there are no blocks and/or unloads.

• In MAN, the operator can start/stop the gensets “managed by MCxxx” with the buttons
START and STOP. To start/stop the gensets not “managed by MCxxx”, use the
related controllers.

• See paragraph 7.9 for a list of the minimum conditions that allow the closing of the
MCB circuit breaker.

• See paragraph 7.9 for a list of the minimum conditions that allow the closing of the
MGCB circuit breaker.

• See paragraph 7.9 for the description of the manual commands for the circuit
breakers.

• See paragraph 7.9 for the anomalies of the circuit breakers opening/closing failure.

• See paragraph 7 for the anomalies of the circuit breakers synchronization failure.

The plants are divided according to the necessary conditions for the automatic intervention of
the gensets. From this point of view, there are three types of plant:

• “Island mode” production plant. The term “island mode” indicates the situation in which
one or more gensets supply a load, without being in parallel with the mains. The
automatic intervention of the plant is always required, independently from the mains
status. The parallel with the mains is not allowed.

• “Emergency” plant. The automatic intervention of the gensets is required in case of

anomalies of the mains. The parallel with the mains is allowed, even if it is not the
normal operation for this type of plant.

• Plant for the production “in parallel with the mains”. The automatic intervention of the
plant is required only if the mains is live and in tolerance. The supply in “island mode”
is not allowed.

The following table shows a recap of all types of plant, according to what has been said:

Production Parallel
Production Supply in
in parallel with the
P.0802 in island AMF island mode
with the mains
mode allowed
mains allowed
MPM X No Yes
MSB X No Yes
MSB + MSTP X X Yes Yes
MPtM X Yes No
MPtM + MSB X X Yes Yes

The acronyms indicated in the first column will be described in detail below. It is important to
understand well the difference between the plants “MSB + MSTP” e “MPtM + MSB”: they

152 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 allow, in fact, both the supply in “island mode” and the supply in “parallel with the mains”. The
difference consists in the mode in which the automatic intervention of the genset is required:

• The plant “MSB + MSTP” is an “emergency” plant and so the gensets will be started
(automatically) only in case of mains anomaly. To put the gensets in parallel with the
mains, you need to force the start when the mains is live (through the REMOTE
START or TEST mode).

• The plant “MPtM + MSB” is both a “supply in island” and production “in parallel with
the mains” plant. Automatically, the gensets are started when the mains is in tolerance
and when it is out of tolerance or off: in the first case, the plant will be “in parallel with
the mains”, in the second case, it will be “in island mode”.

The different types of plant will be described in detail below. Gensets automatic start inhibition
7.14.1 MPM (Multiple Prime Mover)
This type of plant requires the production in “island mode”. They are the typical gensets of the
building sites, where the operator decides when the gensets must supply or not. The parallel
with the mains is not allowed.

Parallel functions Available

Synchronization for MGCB. Not available.

Synchronization for MCB. Not available.

Protections for the parallel with the mains. Not available.

Management of the active power in parallel with the Not available.

mains.

Management of the power factor in parallel with the Not available.

mains.

Function “transfer to gensets”. Not available.

In this type of plant, the controller ignores the mains and MCB status. It is not possible to close
the MGCB circuit breaker with synchronization: this means that the controller does not allow
the MGCB closing if, in case of wrong wiring, it detects the simultaneous presence of voltage
on both sides of the circuit breaker.

Automatic sequence

The automatic intervention of the genset is required in the following conditions:

• In AUTO: if no “inhibition to start” is active.

• In TEST and REMOTE START: always, ignoring the “inhibition to start”.

When there are gensets ready to supply, the controller must decide if closing the MGCB circuit
breaker or not (if it exists). The circuit breaker should be always closed, except for the following
cases:

• There are active alarms or unloads.

• The stop of the gensets is required.

• There is an active “inhibition to supply the load”.

If the opening of MGCB is not required, the controller must decide in which moment to close
the circuit breaker: see the description of the parameter P.0806 at paragraph 7.9.3.5.

The logic of normal operation in AUTO (if the controller manages the MGCB circuit
breaker) will be:

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 153

 1. MGCB open, gensets “managed by MCxxx” stopped. If the automatic intervention
of the plant is required, the procedure skips to point 2.

2. MGCB open, gensets “managed by MCxxx” starting. If there are no gensets

“managed by MCxxx”, the procedure skips to point 3. Otherwise, the controller waits
that at least one genset “managed by MCxxx” is ready to supply and then the
procedure skips to point 3. It is possible to set a maximum duration for the gensets
starting with the parameter P.9511. If this parameter is different from zero, and the
starting phase lasts more than the value configured, the controller activates the
warning W022. During the waiting, in case of alarms or unloads, or if the automatic
intervention is no longer required, the procedure skips to point 8.

3. MGCB opened. If the gensets must be stopped (alarms or unloads, or if the automatic
intervention is no longer required), the procedure skips to point 8. If there are requests
of “inhibition to supply the load”, the procedure stays at this point. Otherwise, it
continues:

• To point 4, if there is no voltage on loads bus.

• Stay in this point if there is voltage on the loads bus (rare, as MGCB is opened
and MCB does not exist).

4. MGCB open, waiting for gensets. The controller checks if the number of gensets
with GCB closed and their nominal power correspond to what has been configured in
parameter P.0806. If they correspond (or if there are no other genset “managed by
MCxxx” that could close their GCB), the procedure skips to point 5. During the waiting,
in case of alarms or unloads, or if the automatic intervention is no longer required, the
procedure skips to point 8.

5. Closing without synchronization of MGCB (three attempts). In case of closing

failure, the alarm A014 is activated (MGCB not closed) and the procedure skips to
point 8. Otherwise, the procedure continues to point 6.

6. MGCB closed. In case of alarms or deactivations, or if there are requests of “inhibition

to supply the loads”, the procedure skips to point 7. If the automatic intervention of the
genset is no longer required, the procedure skips to point 7.

7. Opening of MGCB (three attempts): if MGCB opens, the procedure skips to point 3.
If MGCB does not open, the alarm A024 is activated (MGCB not closed) and the
procedure skips to point 8.

8. Stopping. The controller removes the start request for the gensets “managed by
MCxxx”. If there are other MCxxx requiring the use of the gensets, the procedure ends
at point 1. Otherwise, the controller waits for the gensets stopping. It is possible to set
a maximum duration for this waiting: if the parameter P.9512 is set to a value different
from zero, the controller waits in this status for the time configured. If the gensets do
not stop within this time, the controller activates a warning W021 and the procedure
ends at point 1. If the automatic intervention of the genset is required again, the
procedure continues from point 2.

The logic of normal operation in AUTO (if the controller does not command the MGCB
circuit breaker) will be:

1. Gensets “managed by MCxxx” stopped. If the automatic intervention of the plant is

required, the procedure skips to point 2.

2. Gensets “managed by MCxxx” starting. If there are no gensets “managed by

MCxxx”, the procedure skips to point 3. Otherwise, the controller waits that at least
one genset “managed by MCxxx” is ready to supply and then the procedure skips to
point 3. It is possible to set a maximum duration for the gensets starting with the
parameter P.9511. If this parameter is different from zero, and the starting phase lasts
more than the value configured, the controller activates the warning W022. During the
waiting, in case of alarms or unloads, or if the automatic intervention is no longer
required, the procedure skips to point 4.

154 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 3. Supplying. In case of alarms or deactivations, or if the automatic intervention of the
gensets is no longer required, the procedure skips to point 4. If there are requests for
“inhibition to supply the loads”, the procedure stays in this status: if MGCB is closed,
the requests of inhibition are transformed in opening commands of the GCB circuit
breakers of the controllers “managed by MCxxx”.

4. Stopping. The controller removes the start request for the gensets “managed by
MCxxx”. If there are other MCxxx requiring the use of the gensets, the procedure ends
at point 1. Otherwise, the controller waits for the gensets stopping. It is possible to set
a maximum duration for this waiting: if the parameter P.9512 is set to a value different
from zero, the controller waits in this status for the time configured. If the gensets do
not stop within this time, the controller activates a warning W021 and the procedure
ends at point 1. If the automatic intervention of the genset is required again, the
procedure continues from point 2.
7.14.2 MSB (Multiple Stand By)
This type of plant requires one or more gensets to carry out the emergency to mains service.
The controller starts the gensets if the mains is “out of tolerance” with respect to the time
configured; it stops them if the mains is “in tolerance”. If configured by means parameter
P.9514, the controller can require the intervention of the gensets even in case of closing failure
of the MCB circuit breaker. The parallel with the mains is not allowed.
Parallel functions Available

Synchronization of MGCB. Not available

Synchronization for MCB. Not available

Protections for the parallel with the mains. Not available

Management of the active power in parallel with the Not available

mains.

Management of the power factor in parallel with the Not available

mains.

Function “transfer to gensets”. Not available

It is not possible to close MCB and MGCB with synchronization: this means that the controller
does not allow the circuit breaker closing if the other is closed. Moreover, it does not allow the
closing of any circuit breaker if, for a wrong wiring, it detects the simultaneous presence of
voltage on both sides of the circuit breaker.

Automatic sequence

The automatic intervention of the gensets is required in the following conditions:

• In AUTO: if no “inhibition to start” is active and if:

o The mains is “out of tolerance”.

o The mains is live but the controller is not able to close the MCB circuit breaker
(if configured by means parameter P.9514).

• In TEST and REMOTE START: always, ignoring the “inhibition to start”.

When there are gensets ready to supply, the controller must decide if let the gensets supply
the load. This should be always done except when:

• There are active alarms or unloads.

• The stop of the gensets is required.

• There is an active “inhibition to supply the loads”.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 155

 If the supply of the load from the gensets is required, the controller must decide when to carry
out the switch. The controller never closes MGCB before GCB. Parameter P.0806 allows
configuring when to close the circuit breaker (see 7.9.3.5).

The logic of normal operation in AUTO (if MC400 manages both MCB and MGCB circuit
breakers) will be:

1. MCB closed, MGCB open, gensets “managed by MCxxx” stopped. If the

automatic intervention of the plant is required, the procedure skips to point 2.

2. MCB closed, MGCB open, gensets “managed by MCxxx” starting. If there are no
gensets “managed by MCxxx”, the procedure skips to point 3. Otherwise, the
controller waits that at least one genset “managed by MCxxx” is ready to supply and
then the procedure skips to point 3. It is possible to set a maximum duration for the
gensets starting with the parameter P.9511. If this parameter is different from zero,
and the starting phase lasts more than the value configured, the controller activates
the warning W022. During the waiting, in case of alarms or unloads, or if the automatic
intervention is no longer required, the procedure skips to point 12.

3. MCB closed, MGCB open. If the gensets must be stopped (alarms or unloads, or if
the automatic intervention is no longer required), the procedure skips to point 12. If
there are requests of “inhibition to supply the loads”, the procedure stays at this point.
Otherwise, the procedure continues to point 4.

4. Gensets wait. The controller checks if the number of gensets with GCB closed and
their nominal power correspond to what has been configured in parameter P.0806. If
they correspond (or if there are no other genset “managed by MCxxx” that could close
their GCB), the procedure skips to point 5. If the gensets must be stopped (alarms or
unloads, or if the automatic intervention is no longer required), the procedure skips to
point 12.

5. MCB opening (three attempts) In case of opening failure, the alarm A023 is activated
(MCB not opened) and the procedure skips to point 12. Otherwise, the procedure
continues to point 6.

6. MCB open, MGCB closed. The controller waits for the time configured with
parameter P.0219, then it continues to point 7. If the gensets must be stopped (alarms
or unloads, or if the automatic intervention is no longer required), the procedure skips
to point 11. If there is an inhibition to supply the loads, the procedure skips to point
11.

7. MGCB closing (three attempts). In case of closing failure, the alarm A014 is activated
(MGCB not closed) and the procedure skips to point 11. Otherwise, the procedure
continues to point 8.

8. MCB open, MGCB closed. In case of alarms or deactivations, or if there are no

requests of “inhibition to supply the loads”, the procedure skips to point 9. If the
automatic intervention of the genset is no longer required, the procedure skips to point
9.

9. Opening of MGCB (three attempts): if MGCB opens, the procedure skips to point 10.
If MGCB does not open, the alarm A024 is activated (MGCB not opened) and the
procedure skips to point 12.

10. MCB open, MGCB closed. The controller waits for the time configured with
parameter P.0219, then it continues to point 11.

11. MCB closing (three attempts) In case of closing failure, the alarm A013 is activated
(MCB not closed) and the procedure skips to point 12. Otherwise, the procedure
continues to point 3.

12. Stopping. The controller removes the start request for the gensets “managed by
MCxxx”. If there are other MCxxx requiring the use of the gensets, the procedure ends
at point 1. Otherwise, the controller waits for the gensets stopping. It is possible to set
a maximum duration for this waiting: if the parameter P.9512 is set to a value different

156 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 from zero, the controller waits in this status for the time configured. If the gensets do
not stop within this time, the controller activates a warning W021 and the procedure
ends at point 1. If the automatic intervention of the genset is required again, the
procedure continues from point 2.

The logic of normal operation in AUTO (if MC400 manages the MCB circuit breaker only)
will be:

1. MCB closed, gensets “managed by MCxxx” stopped. If the automatic intervention

of the plant is required, the procedure skips to point 2.

2. MCB closed, gensets “managed by MCxxx” starting. If there are no gensets

“managed by MCxxx”, the procedure skips to point 3. Otherwise, the controller waits
that at least one genset “managed by MCxxx” is ready to supply and then the
procedure skips to point 3. It is possible to set a maximum duration for the gensets
starting with the parameter P.9511. If this parameter is different from zero, and the
starting phase lasts more than the value configured, the controller activates the
warning W022. During the waiting, in case of alarms or unloads, or if the automatic
intervention is no longer required, the procedure skips to point 8.

3. MCB closed. If the gensets must be stopped (alarms or unloads, or if the automatic
intervention is no longer required), the procedure skips to point 8. If there are requests
of “inhibition to supply the loads”, the procedure stays at this point. If MGCB is closed,
the procedure continues to point 5 to open the MCB circuit breaker immediately
(otherwise, the controllers cannot close GCB because the plant does not require the
parallel with the mains). Otherwise, the procedure continues to point 4.

4. Gensets waiting (MGCB open). The controller checks if the number of gensets with
GCB closed and their nominal power correspond to what has been configured in
parameter P.0806. If they correspond (or if there are no other genset “managed by
MCxxx” that could close their GCB), the procedure skips to point 5. If the external logic
closes MGCB, the procedure immediately skips to point 5. If the gensets must be
stopped (alarms or unloads, or if the automatic intervention is no longer required), the
procedure skips to point 8.

5. MCB opening (three attempts) In case of opening failure, the alarm A023 is activated
(MCB not opened) and the procedure skips to point 8. Otherwise, the procedure
continues to point 6.

6. MCB open. In case of alarms or deactivations, or if the automatic intervention of the

genset is no longer required, the procedure skips to point 7. If there are requests for
“inhibition to supply the loads” and MGCB is closed, the requests of inhibition are
transformed in opening commands of the GCB circuit breakers of the controllers
“managed by MCxxx”.

7. MCB closing (three attempts) In case of closing failure, the alarm A012 is activated
(MCB not closed) and the procedure skips to point 8. Otherwise, the procedure
continues to point 3.

8. Stopping. The controller removes the start request for the gensets “managed by
MCxxx”. If there are other MCxxx requiring the use of the gensets, the procedure ends
at point 1. Otherwise, the controller waits for the gensets stopping. It is possible to set
a maximum duration for this waiting: if the parameter P.9512 is set to a value different
from zero, the controller waits in this status for the time configured. If the gensets do
not stop within this time, the controller activates a warning W021 and the procedure
ends at point 1. If the automatic intervention of the genset is required again, the
procedure continues from point 2.

Note: the described sequences are valid if the parameter P.0248 is set to zero. If it is set to 1,
the MCB circuit breaker will be opened as soon as the mains become steadily “out of
thresholds”, to protect the loads against wrong voltages/frequency.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 157

 7.14.3 MSB+MSTP (Multiple Stand By + Multiple Short Time Parallel)
This type of plant is like the previous one: it requires one or more gensets to carry out the
emergency service to mains. The controller starts the gensets if the mains is “out of tolerance”
with respect to the time configured; it stops them if the mains is “in tolerance”. If configured by
means parameter P.9514, the controller can require the intervention of the gensets even in
case of closing failure of the MCB circuit breaker.

With respect to the MSB plant, the controller allows the parallel with the mains.

Usually, the parallel with the mains is temporary (P.0880=0): it is used to avoid a black-out on
the loads during their switch from gensets to mains (when it is back) or from mains to gensets
(in case of forced intervention in TEST or REMOTE START). In this case, the maximum
duration for the parallel with the mains is 1 second: anyhow, it can be configured with the
parameter P.0890. Please read the description of the warning W207 that is related with this
parameter.

This type of plant allows also the parallel with the mains (if P.0880 is different from zero).
Usually, you use this function to test the gensets (TEST) without disconnecting the loads from
the mains. In this case, there is no limit in the parallel duration.

Function Available

Synchronization of MGCB. Available.

Synchronization for MCB. Available.

Protections for the parallel with the mains. Available.

Management of the active power in parallel with the Available.

mains.

Management of the power factor in parallel with the Available.

mains.

Function “transfer to gensets”. Available.

Automatic sequence

The automatic intervention of the gensets is required in the following conditions:

• In AUTO: if no “inhibition to start” is active and if:

o The mains is “out of tolerance”.

o The mains is live but the controller is not able to close the MCB circuit breaker
(if configured by means parameter P.9514).

• In TEST and REMOTE START: always, ignoring the “inhibition to start”.

When there are gensets ready to supply, the controller must decide if let the gensets supply
the load. This should be always done except when:

• There are active alarms or unloads.

• The stop of the gensets is required.

• There is an active “inhibition to supply the loads”.

If the supply of the loads from the gensets is required, the controller must decide when to carry
out the switch. The controller never closes MGCB before GCB. Parameter P.0806 allows
configuring when to close the circuit breaker (see 7.9.3.5).

The logic of normal operation in AUTO (if MC400 manages both circuit breakers) will be:

158 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 1. MCB closed, MGCB open, gensets “managed by MCxxx” stopped. If the
automatic intervention of the plant is required, the procedure skips to point 2.

2. MCB closed, MGCB open, gensets “managed by MCxxx” starting. If there are no
gensets “managed by MCxxx”, the procedure skips to point 3. Otherwise, the
controller waits that at least one genset “managed by MCxxx” is ready to supply and
then the procedure skips to point 3. It is possible to set a maximum duration for the
gensets starting with the parameter P.9511. If this parameter is different from zero,
and the starting phase lasts more than the value configured, the controller activates
the warning W022. During the waiting, in case of alarms or unloads, or if the automatic
intervention is no longer required, the procedure skips to point 17.

3. MCB closed, MGCB open. If the gensets must be stopped (alarms or unloads, or if
the automatic intervention is no longer required), the procedure skips to point 17. If
there are requests of “inhibition to supply the loads”, the procedure waits in this point.
Otherwise, it continues:

• To point 12 if it is possible to close MGCB with the synchronization and the

parallel with the mains is allowed (P.0880 > 0).

• To point 4 in other cases.

4. MCB closed, MGCB open, genset waiting. The controller checks if the number of
gensets with GCB closed and their nominal power correspond to what has been
configured in parameter P.0806. If they correspond (or if there are no other genset
“managed by MCxxx” that could close their GCB), the procedure skips to point 5 and
it is not possible to close MGCB with synchronization; otherwise, to point 12. If the
gensets must be stopped (alarms or unloads, or if the automatic intervention is no
longer required), the procedure skips to point 17. If there are inhibitions, the procedure
skips to point 3.

5. MCB opening, MGCB open (three attempts). In case of opening failure, the alarm
A023 is activated (MCB not opened) and the procedure skips to point 17. Otherwise,
the procedure continues to point 6.

6. MCB open, MGCB closed. If the gensets must be stopped (alarms or unloads, or if
the automatic intervention is no longer required), the procedure skips to point 10. If
there is an inhibition to supply the loads, the procedure skips to point 10. Otherwise,
the controller waits for the time configured with parameter P.0219, then it continues to
point 7.

7. MGCB closing without synchronization (three attempts). In case of closing failure,

the alarm A014 is activated (MGCB not closed) and the procedure skips to point 10.
Otherwise, the procedure continues to point 8.

8. MCB open, MGCB closed. If there are alarms or unloads, requests of inhibition to
supply the loads or the automatic intervention of the gensets is no longer required, the
procedure continues:

• To point 9 if it is not possible to close MCB with synchronization.

• To point 11 if it is not possible to close MCB with synchronization.

9. Opening of MGCB, MCB open (three attempts): if MGCB opens, the procedure skips
to point 6. If MGCB does not open, the alarm A024 is activated (MGCB not opened)
and the procedure skips to point 17.

10. MCB closing without synchronization (three attempts) In case of closing failure,
the alarm A013 is activated (MCB not closed) and the procedure skips to point 17.
Otherwise, the procedure continues to point 3.

11. MCB closing with synchronization. This phase lasts maximum P.0853 seconds. If
during this time MCB closes, the procedure skips to point 13. Otherwise, the controller
activates the warning W272 (“synchronization failure on MCB”): the controller will not

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 159

 allow the synchronization for the MCB closing if the operator does not “acknowledge”
this warning. The procedure goes back to point 8.

12. MGCB closing with synchronization This phase lasts maximum P.0852 seconds. If
during this time MGCB closes, the procedure skips to point 13. Otherwise, the
controller activates the warning W271 (“synchronization failure on MGCB”): the
controller will not allow the synchronization for the MGCB closing if the operator does
not “acknowledge” this warning. The procedure goes back to point 3.

13. MCB closed, MGCB closed If the gensets must be stopped for an alarm, the
procedure skips to point 16. If some unloads are activated, the automatic intervention
is no longer required, or some requests of “inhibition to supply the loads” are activated,
the procedure continues to point 15. If the parallel with the mains is not allowed (or
the maximum time allowed for the parallel with the mains expires), the procedure
continues to point 14. If the “transfer to gensets” mode is active, when the gensets
reach the power setpoint configured by MC400, the procedure continues to point 14.

14. MCB opening, MGCB closed (three attempts). In case of opening failure, the alarm
A023 is activated (MCB not opened) and the procedure skips to point 17. Otherwise,
the procedure continues to point 8.

15. MCB closed, MGCB closed, power unload If the parallel with the mains is not
allowed (or the maximum time allowed for the parallel with the mains expires), the
procedure continues to point 16. During this phase, the controller establishes a power
setpoint equal to 0 kW for the gensets. Then, it controls the active power supplied by
the gensets “managed by MCxxx”: when it goes under the threshold P.0878, the
procedure continues to point 16. In any case, the maximum duration of this phase can
be configured with the parameter P.0879: when the time is up, whatever the power
supplied by the gensets is, the procedure continues to point 16. If there are not alarms
or unloads, the requests of “inhibition to power load” are not activated and the
automatic intervention is required, the procedure continues to point 13.

Note: if P.9605 is set to 1, the active power setpoint for the unloading procedure is
managed through the SYSTEM BASE LOAD mode. The genset controllers manage
this setpoint by themselves, taking care of the ones that are working in different
modes; however, the setpoint is probably near to zero and, if there are gensets
working in a different mode, it is possible that the system can’t reach it: this is the
reason for which, to detect the end of the unload, only the generators “managed by
MCxxx” are considered.

16. Opening of MGCB, MCB closed (three attempts): if MGCB opens, the procedure
skips to point 3. If MGCB does not open, the alarm A024 is activated (MGCB not
opened) and the procedure skips to point 17.

17. Stopping. The controller removes the start request for the gensets “managed by
MCxxx”. If there are other MCxxx requiring the use of the gensets, the procedure ends
at point 1. Otherwise, the controller waits for the gensets stopping. It is possible to set
a maximum duration for this waiting: if the parameter P.9512 is set to a value different
from zero, the controller waits in this status for the time configured. If the gensets do
not stop within this time, the controller activates a warning W021 and the procedure
ends at point 1. If the automatic intervention of the genset is required again, the
procedure continues from point 2.

The logic of automatic normal operation (if MC400 manages MCB only) will be:

1. MCB closed, gensets “managed by MCxxx” stopped. If the automatic intervention

of the plant is required, the procedure skips to point 2.

2. MCB closed, gensets “managed by MCxxx” starting. If there are no gensets

“managed by MCxxx”, the procedure skips to point 3. Otherwise, the controller waits
that at least one genset “managed by MCxxx” is ready to supply and then the
procedure skips to point 3. It is possible to set a maximum duration for the gensets
starting with the parameter P.9511. If this parameter is different from zero, and the
starting phase lasts more than the value configured, the controller activates the

160 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 warning W022. During the waiting, in case of alarms or unloads, or if the automatic
intervention is no longer required, the procedure skips to point 9.

3. MCB closed. If the gensets must be stopped (alarms or unloads, or if the automatic
intervention is no longer required), the procedure skips to point 9. If there are requests
for “inhibition to supply the loads”, the procedure stays in this status: if MGCB is
closed, the requests of inhibition are transformed in opening commands of the GCB
circuit breakers of the controllers “managed by MCxxx”; the gensets will download the
power before opening GCB.

MGCB opened. The controller checks if the number of gensets with GCB closed and
their nominal power correspond to what has been configured in parameter P.0806. If
they correspond (or if there are no other genset “managed by MCxxx” that could close
their GCB):

• If there is a digital input to require the synchronization of MGCB, the procedure

stays in this status waiting for the request. When the request is active, the
procedure skips to point 8.

• If there is no digital input (and MGCB cannot be closed with synchronization),

the procedure continues to point 4.

MGCB closed: the controller checks:

• There are gensets with GCB closed. If the parallel with the mains is not
allowed (or the maximum time allowed for the parallel with the mains expires),
the procedure continues to point 4. If the “transfer to gensets” mode is active,
when the gensets reach the power setpoint configured by MC400, the
procedure continues to point 4.

• There are no gensets with GCB closed. If there are gensets ready to supply,
but the mains is out of tolerance (so, the gensets cannot close their GCB with
synchronization), the procedure continues to point 4.

4. MCB opening (three attempts). In case of opening failure, the alarm A023 is activated
(MCB not opened) and the procedure skips to point 9. Otherwise, the procedure
continues to point 5.

5. MCB open. The actions depend on the MGCB status.

MGCB opened. If there are alarms or unloads, requests of “inhibition to supply the
loads” or the automatic intervention of the genset is no longer required, the procedure
continues to point 6. Otherwise, the procedure stays in this status.

MGCB closed. If there are alarms or unloads, the procedure skips to point 9. If there
are “inhibition to supply the loads”, or the automatic intervention is not required, the
controller continues to point 7 if it is possible to use the synchronization for the closing
of MCB; otherwise, it waits for MGCB or GCB to open.

6. MCB closing without synchronization (three attempts) In case of closing failure,

the alarm A013 is activated (MCB not closed) and the procedure skips to point 9.
Otherwise, the procedure continues to point 3.

7. MCB closing with synchronization This phase lasts maximum P.0853 seconds. If
during this time MCB closes, the procedure skips to point 3. Otherwise, the controller
activates the warning W272 (“synchronization failure on MCB”): the controller will not
allow the synchronization for the MCB closing if the operator does not “acknowledge”
this warning. The procedure goes back to point 5.

8. MGCB closing with synchronization This phase lasts maximum P.0852 seconds. If
during this time MGCB closes, the procedure skips to point 13. Otherwise, the
controller activates the warning W271 (“synchronization failure on MGCB”): the
controller will not allow the synchronization for the MGCB closing if the operator does
not “acknowledge” this warning. The procedure goes back to point 5.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 161

 9. Stopping. The controller removes the start request for the gensets “managed by
MCxxx”. If there are other MCxxx requiring the use of the gensets, the procedure ends
at point 1. Otherwise, the controller waits for the gensets stopping. It is possible to set
a maximum duration for this waiting: if the parameter P.9512 is set to a value different
from zero, the controller waits in this status for the time configured. If the gensets do
not stop within this time, the controller activates a warning W021 and the procedure
ends at point 1. If the automatic intervention of the genset is required again, the
procedure continues from point 2.

Note: the described sequences are valid if the parameter P.0248 is set to zero. If it is set to 1,
the MCB circuit breaker will be opened as soon as the mains become steadily “out of
thresholds”, to protect the loads against wrong voltages/frequency.
7.14.4 MPTM (Multiple Parallel to Mains)
This is a plant for the production in parallel with the mains. The controller starts the gensets if
the mains status allows the parallel; it disconnects the gensets from the mains if the protections
of parallel with the mains are activated (see 7.4.2); it stops the gensets if the mains status
does not allow the parallel for P.0899 seconds.

The supply in “island mode” is not allowed: so, if the protections of parallel with the mains are
activated, the controller opens the MGCB circuit breaker anyway (if it exists), whatever is the
interface device selected with parameter P.0900. We suggest to select MGCB as interface
device (P.0900=2).

The parallel with the mains must be continue, so the parameter P.0880 must be set at a value
different from zero.

Parallel functions Available

Synchronization for MGCB. Available.

Synchronization for MCB. Not available.

Protections for the parallel with the mains. Available.

Management of the active power in parallel with the Available.

mains.

Management of the power factor in parallel with the Available.

mains.

Function “transfer to gensets”. Not available.

Automatic sequence

The automatic intervention of the gensets is required in the following conditions:

• In AUTO: if there is no “inhibition to start” and the mains status allows the parallel with
the mains.

• In TEST and REMOTE START: always, ignoring the “inhibition to start” and the mains
status.

When there are gensets ready to supply, the controller must decide if connect the gensets to
the mains. This should be always done except when:

• There are active alarms or unloads.

• The stop of the gensets is required.

• There is an active “inhibition to supply the loads”.

The logic of normal operation in automatic mode (if the controller manages both circuit
breakers and if MGCB is the interface device) will be:

162 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 1. MCB closed, MGCB open, gensets “managed by MCxxx” stopped. If the
automatic intervention of the plant is required, the procedure skips to point 2.

2. MCB closed, MGCB open, gensets “managed by MCxxx” starting. If there are no
gensets “managed by MCxxx”, the procedure skips to point 3. Otherwise, the
controller waits that at least one genset “managed by MCxxx” is ready to supply and
then the procedure skips to point 3. It is possible to set a maximum duration for the
gensets starting with the parameter P.9511. If this parameter is different from zero,
and the starting phase lasts more than the value configured, the controller activates
the warning W022. During the waiting, in case of alarms or unloads, or if the automatic
intervention is no longer required, the procedure skips to point 9.

3. MCB closed, MGCB open. If the gensets must be stopped (alarms or unloads, or if
the automatic intervention is no longer required), the procedure skips to point 9. If
there are requests of “inhibition to supply the loads”, the procedure waits in this point.
If the mains is out of tolerance, the procedure waits in this point (after P.0899 seconds,
an “inhibition to start” is activated to automatically removes the request of
intervention). Otherwise, it continues:

• To point 4, if you decided to close the MGCB circuit breaker before the GCB
one (by means of the parameter P.9513) and if there are no GCB closed.

• To point 5 if it is not possible to close MGCB with synchronization.

• In the other cases, it stays in this status.

4. MGCB closing without synchronization (three attempts). In case of closing failure,

the alarm A014 is activated (MGCB not closed) and the procedure skips to point 9.
Otherwise, the procedure continues to point 6.

5. MGCB closing with synchronization. This phase lasts maximum P.0852 seconds.
If during this time MGCB closes, the procedure skips to point 6. Otherwise, the
controller activates the warning W271 (“synchronization failure on MGCB”): the
controller will not allow the synchronization for the MGCB closing if the operator does
not “acknowledge” this warning. The procedure goes back to point 3. If during the
waiting the mains is out of tolerance, the procedure goes back to point 3.

6. MCB closed, MGCB closed. If alarms or the protections for the parallel with the mains
are activated, the procedure continues to point 8. If some unloads are activated, the
automatic intervention is no longer required, or some requests of “inhibition to supply
the loads” are activated, the procedure continues to point 7.

7. MCB closed, MGCB closed, power unload. During this phase, the controller selects
a power setpoint equal to 0 kW for the gensets. Then, it controls the active power
supplied by the gensets “managed by MCxxx” (expressed in percentage): when it
goes under the threshold P.0878, the procedure continues to point 8. In any case, the
maximum duration of this phase can be configured with the parameter P.0879: when
the time is up, whatever the power supplied by the gensets is, the procedure continues
to point 8. If there are no alarms or unloads, there are no requests of “inhibition to
supply the loads”, the mains is permanently in tolerance and the automatic
intervention is required, the procedure goes back to point 6.

Note: if P.9605 is set to 1, the active power setpoint for the unloading procedure is
managed through the SYSTEM BASE LOAD mode. The genset controllers manage
this setpoint by themselves, taking care of the ones that are working in different
modes; however, the setpoint is probably near to zero and, if there are gensets
working in a different mode, it is possible that the system can’t reach it: this is the
reason for which, to detect the end of the unload, only the generators “managed by
MCxxx” are considered.

8. Opening of MGCB, MCB closed (three attempts): if MGCB opens, the procedure
skips to point 3. If MGCB does not open, the alarm A024 is activated (MGCB not
opened) and the procedure skips to point 9.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 163

 9. Stopping. The controller removes the start request for the gensets “managed by
MCxxx”. If there are other MCxxx requiring the use of the gensets, the procedure ends
at point 1. Otherwise, the controller waits for the gensets stopping. It is possible to set
a maximum duration for this waiting: if the parameter P.9512 is set to a value different
from zero, the controller waits in this status for the time configured. If the gensets do
not stop within this time, the controller activates a warning W021 and the procedure
ends at point 1. If the automatic intervention of the genset is required again, the
procedure continues from point 2.
7.14.5 MPTM+MSB (Multiple Parallel to Mains + Multiple Stand By)
In this type of plant, the gensets can supply both in “island” and in “parallel with the mains”
mode. it is like the MSB + MSTP plant. The differences are:

• This plant is not an emergency plant; so, the request of the gensets automatic
intervention is not related to the mains status.

• The parallel with the mains must be allowed (P.0880 > 0).

As the supply in island mode is allowed, it is suggested (but not compulsory) to select MCB
as interface circuit breaker (P.0900 = 2).

Parallel functions Available

Synchronization of MGCB. Available.

Synchronization for MCB. Available.

Protections for the parallel with the mains. Available.

Management of the active power in parallel with the Available.

mains.

Management of the power factor in parallel with the Available.

mains.

Function “transfer to gensets”. Available.

Automatic sequence

The automatic intervention of the gensets is required in the following conditions:

• In AUTO: if no “inhibition to start” is active.

• In TEST and REMOTE START: always, ignoring the “inhibition to start”.

When there are gensets ready to supply, the controller must decide if let the gensets supply
the load. This should be always done except when:

• There are active alarms or unloads.

• The stop of the gensets is required.

• There is an active “inhibition to power load”.

See 7.14.3 for an example of operating logic.

164 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 7.15
Note: this description is valid only if the parameter P.9506 is set to one. If it is set to 1,
see the document [8].

“Load function” is the ability of MC400 to automatically start/stop the gensets “managed by
MCxxx” according to the power required by the load or by the setpoint for the parallel with the
mains. The display pages B.07 and B.08 are related to this function.

Note: the gensets controllers have their own “load function”, but it is disabled when
they are managed by MCxxx. If, at a precise moment, the gensets “managed by MCxxx”
are in parallel with the gensets not “managed by MCxxx”, all with the load function
enabled, the two managements may conflict.

Load function, if enabled, works on all plant types:

• In parallel with mains, load function starts the correct number of generators to allow
the system supplying power as requested by the setpoint, starting/stopping additional
generators if setpoint changes. Note: in “BASE LOAD” mode, the setpoint can only be
changed by the operator, while in “IMPORT/EXPORT” mode it changes also if some
loads are added or removed.

• In “island mode”, load function starts the generator as required by current loads,
starting/stopping additional generators on changes.

Load function is enabled only in AUTO and REMOTE START modes. So, in MAN or TEST
modes generators are never stopped due to load (switching from AUTO or REMOTE START
to MAN or TEST the currently started generators are kept running).

In AUTO and REMOTE START modes, load function is normally enabled. It is possible, but
not compulsory, to configure an input with the function DIF.2702 “Enables the load function” If
this input is configured, load function is disabled when the input is “not active” (logical state).
If the input is not configured or if it is “active”, load function is enabled.

If a MGCB circuit breaker exists, load function is disabled if this circuit breaker is opened: in
this situation, no loads are connected to generators and load function could stop them.

The main purposes of the load function are:

• Start the correct number of generators to supply the required power.

• Grant that all generators will be used, not always the same ones.
7.15.1 Starting/stopping generators to meet power requests
MC400 allows configuring two thresholds (%) related to load function:

• P.0826 - “Activation load threshold”.

• P.0828 - “Deactivation load threshold”.

The second threshold must be lower than the first one. They should be set to quite the same
value; the purpose of difference is only to define a hysteresis, to avoid unnecessary start/stop
if active power changes around the thresholds.

MC400 calculates the system total power % dividing the sum of active powers of each
generator by the sum of their nominal powers (both are transmitted by the genset controllers
over the can bus):
n

 ADP x
DPRt = xn=1
 MDP
x =1
x

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 165

 n: number of generators with GCB closed.

ADPx: generator x active power.

MDPx: generator x nominal power.

DPRt: System total power %.

Note: these calculations are carried out on all genset supplying, not only on those
managed by MCxxx.

When the total percentage power (DPRt) is higher than the threshold P.0826 for the time set
with the parameter P.0827 (“Activation load delay”), MC400 must start one new genset
“managed by MCxxx”.

To decide to stop one genset “managed by MCxxx”, MC400 first selects the genset to be
stopped (hereinafter identified as genset y) and then it calculates the percentage power ratio
% the system will supply if the generator would be stopped.
n

 ADP x
DPRtn = n
x =1

 MDP − MDP
x =1
x y

n: number of generators with GCB closed.

y: generator to be stopped.

X: it indicates any genset, except for the genset y.

ADPx: generator x active power.

MDPx: generator x nominal power.

MDPy: generator y nominal power.

DPRtn: system total power ratio % if generator y is stopped.

Note: these calculations are carried out on all genset supplying, not only on those
managed by MCxxx.

When this system total power (DPRtn) is lower than threshold P.0828 for the time set by
parameter P.0829 (“Deactivation load delay”), MC400 stops the generator y.

Parameter P.0820 (“Minimum number of gensets started”) allows selecting the minimum
number of started generators, whatever is the load: MC400 never stops generators (indeed it
may start some of them) if currently started generators are less or equal to the desired number.
Note that minimum value for this parameter is “1”, so at least one generator is always running.
Note: these calculations include all genset supplying, not only on those managed by
MCxxx.

Every time a GCB circuit breaker is opened or closed, MC400 stops checking the power (and
so no genset will be started/stopped) for the time set with the parameter P.0830 (“Initial delay”):
in this way, the system has time for stabilization.

If automatic genset supply is required when all generators are stopped (for example when
mains become “absent” in emergency plants), MC400 always starts all available generators.

Note: by pressing START on MC400, the load function is temporary suspended, by forcing the
start of all available gensets “managed by MCxxx”. Once all generators are supplying, load
function will stop unnecessary ones. This possibility is useful each time the operator knows in
advance that an increase of power is needed: he can start all generators and, when all are
supplying, new loads can be added or the power setpoint can be increased. In this way, you
will have the necessary power whenever you need it, even in AUTO mode and with the load
function enabled.

166 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 7.15.2 Selecting generators
The gensets “not managed by MCxxx” are always “excluded” from the load function.

Normally, instead, all generators “managed by MCxxx” are involved in load function. It is
possible to manual exclude some “managed” generators from load function (forcing them
always stopped or always running). This manual operation must be performed on display
pages from B.02 to B.05, which show details about each generator (see description in 6.5.4.2).
Note: the manually excluded generators list is not saved on non-volatile memory. At power on,
all “managed” generators are included in load function.

Note: MC400 can stop all generators involved in load function. This happens when at least
P.0820 “not managed” generators are running, and there is no power request for other
gensets.

The logics described below work only on gensets that, at a given time, are included in the load
function (and so implicitly “managed by MCxxx”).

To ensure that all generators are used (not always the same ones), MC400 assigns a priority
to them:

• Low priority generators are started for last and stopped for first.

• High priority generators are started for first and stopped for last.

• The highest priority generator, at a given time, is called “master”.

MC400 implements three different techniques for assigning priorities to generators, selectable
by parameter P.0822 (“Load function mode”).
7.15.2.1
Set “1” in parameter P.0822 to select this mode.

In this mode, the operator manually selects the “master” genset using parameter P.0823
(“Master genset address”). Other gensets priorities are automatically assigned depending on
addresses. Suppose generators 1 to 8 are present on the plant. Suppose also that generators
3, 4 and 7 are excluded from load function (see previous paragraph). The remaining gensets
are:

1, 2, 5, 6, 8.

If the operator selects the genset “5” as “master”, the priority list will be:

5, 6, 8, 1, 2.

If the operator selects the genset “8” as “master”, the priority list will be:

8, 1, 2, 5, 6.

If the operator selects the genset “1” as “master”, the priority list will be:

1, 2, 5, 6, 8.

The priority list is made by following the order address of gensets (increase order) starting
from the “master” up to the highest one; then starting from the lowest to the one preceding the
“master”.
7.15.2.2 nerator selection at fixed time
Set “2” in parameter P.0822 to select this mode.

In this mode, the operator can always manually select the “master” genset using parameter
P.0823. At the time configured by the parameter P.0824 (“Master genset change time”),
however, MC400 will select a new “master”. The new “master” selected is the one following
the old “master” in the priority list (obviously among the gensets included in the load function).

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 167

 Let’s suppose that the priority list set in P.0823 is “5,6,7,1,2”; the new “master” genset will be
the genset “6”.

You can assign priorities to the following gensets as described above.

In this mode, the “rotation” of generators happens once a day.

7.15.2.3
Set “3” in parameter P.0822 to select this mode.

In this mode, the operator can always manually select the “master” genset using parameter
P.0823. After the number of hours configured with parameter P.0825 “Master genset batch
hours”, MC400 will select a new “master”. The new “master” is the one following the old
“master” in the priority list (obviously among the generators included in load function).

Let’s suppose that the priority list set in P.0823 is “5,6,7,1,2”; the new “master” genset will be
the genset “6”.

You can assign priorities to the following gensets as described above.

In this mode, the “rotation” of generators happens every x hour.

7.15.2.4 Actions on
When a new “master” is selected, a new priority list is built. At this time, it is possible that some
lower priority generators are running, while some high priority generators are stopped. In this
case, MC400 grants that first the high priority generators will be started and loaded, and then
the low priority ones will be stopped. In this way, there will be no problems on power supply.
7.15.2.5 Events
The controller records the event EVT.1291 when the master genset is changed (if configured
with the bit 8 of the parameter P.0441).

168 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 7.16
The purpose of “load shedding” function is to manage some digital outputs of MC400, to
connect/disconnect part of loads from the generators, when generators are not able to supply
all loads. Display page B.09 is related to this function.

This function is normally enabled; it is disabled in the following situations:

• If the controller is in MAN or OFF/RESET mode.

• In parallel to mains operations (the eventually extra loads are supplied by mains).

• If a digital input is configured with the function DIF.2721 “Enable load shedding” and
the input is “not active” (logical status). If the input is not configured, or if it is “active”,
the function is enabled.

• If no digital outputs of MC400 are configured for “load shedding”. Four functions are
available for digital outputs configuration:

o DOF.2251 (“Load-shedding 1”).

o DOF.2252 (“Load-shedding 2”).

o DOF.2253 (“Load-shedding 3”).

o DOF.2254 (“Load-shedding 4”).

It is possible to manage up to four groups of loads. Remember that the same function
(DOF.2251 - DOF.2254) can be assigned to more than one output: in this way, a single logical
group of loads can be connected/disconnected from the gensets by using more than one circuit
breaker at the same time.

Outputs are “active” when MC400 needs to disconnect loads from generators, they are “not
active” when loads can be re-connected.

If less than four outputs are used, configure them continuously starting with function
DOF.2251. For example, if you would like to use two outputs, configure them with the functions
DOF.2251 and DOF.2252. If you accidentally use the functions DOF.2251 and DOF.2253,
only the first output configured with the function DOF.2251 will be used. If you use the functions
DOF.2252 and DOF.2253, no output will be associated to the function “load shedding”
(because the function DOF.2251 is missing).

Loads must be assigned to outputs depending on their priority:

• The output configured with the function DOF.2251 should be used for lowest priority
loads: it is the first activated (to disconnect a load) and the last deactivated (to re-
connect a load).

• The output configured with the function DOF.2254 should be used for highest priority
loads: it is the last activated (to disconnect a load) and the first deactivated (to connect
a load).

If “load shedding” function is disabled and some of its digital outputs are configured, these
outputs are “not active” to avoid disconnection of loads.
7.16.1 All loads management
Normally MC400 can connect or disconnect one group of loads at a time. There are some
situations, however, where all loads are connected or disconnected at the same time. Loads
are all disconnected (independently by actual power) when:

• In “island mode”, in the moment the MGCB circuit breaker closes.

• In “island mode”, if the MGCB circuit breaker does not exist or it is closed but no GCB
are closed, in the moment the first GCB circuit breaker closes.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 169

 • When passing from “parallel to mains” to “island mode” (at the opening time of MCB).

In the same way, all outputs are deactivated at the same time when:

• Each time loads are separated from generators by any circuit breakers.
7.16.2 Single load management
MC400 provides two thresholds (%) related to “load shedding”:

• P.1181 - “Load disconnect threshold”.

• P.1183 - “Load re-connect threshold”.

The second threshold must be lower than the first one. P.1181 threshold must be set at the
maximum allowed power per generator (%). P.1183 threshold must be calculated depending
on loads connected/disconnected, to avoid that when a load is connected the total power
becomes greater than P.1181 and so load is disconnected again, and so on.

MC400 calculates the system total power % by dividing the sum of active powers supplied by
all the gensets (included the ones not “managed by MCxxx”) by the sum of their nominal
powers (both pieces of information are transmitted by the gensets controllers on CAN bus):
n

 ADP x
DPRt = xn=1
 MDP
x =1
x

n: number of generators with GCB closed.

ADP: generator x active power.

MDP: generator x nominal power.

DPRt: System total power %.

When the system total power (DPRt) is higher than the threshold P.1181 for the time set by
parameter P.1182 (“Load disconnect delay”), MC400 disconnects the lowest priority loads (see
above for load priorities).

MC400 can be configured to automatically or manually re-connect the loads. This choice is
available by parameter P.1186 (“Load re-connect mode”):

• 0 – “Automatic”. MC400 checks system power before allowing loads connection. The
system total power (%) must be less than the P.1183 threshold, for the time set by
parameter P.1184 (“Load re-connect delay”).

• 1 – “Manual”. Note: this option needs for a digital input configured for “load connection
command” (see in the following).

Each time a group of loads is connected/disconnected from generators, MC400 stops

monitoring the power (and so no other loads can be connected/disconnected) for the time set
by parameter P.1185 (“Initial delay”), to allow system stabilization.
7.16.3 Manual commands
MC400 allows configuring two digital inputs to be used for “load shedding” manual commands.
Functions to be used for the inputs configuration are:

• DIF.2251 (“Manual disconnection of loads”).

• DIF.2252 (“Manual disconnection of loads”).

Note: these inputs are managed both in MAN and AUTO modes.

170 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 Both inputs work on activation and not on the state of the input (the function related to the
input is executed once when input state changes form “not active” to “active” – logical state).

The activation of input configured as DIF.2251 will result in the disconnection of the lowest
priority load (the next activation will disconnect the next load and so on until all loads are
disconnected).

The activation of input configured as DIF.2252 will result in the re-connection of the highest
priority load (the next activation will re-connect the next load and so on until all loads are
connected).
7.16.4
If “not-motorized” circuit breakers are used to connect/disconnect loads, MC400 is not able to
automatically re-connect loads. In this case parameter P.1186 must be set to “0”: when MC400
detects that a group of loads can be re-connected, it automatically deactivates its output and
the circuit breaker is no more forced “open”. The operator can then manually close the circuit
breaker.
7.16.5 Events
If it is configured with the bit 7 of the parameter P.0441, the controller records the following
events related to the unload function:

• EVT.1301: load #1 has been disconnected.

• EVT.1302: load #1 has been connected.

• EVT.1303: load #2 has been disconnected.

• EVT.1304: load #2 has been connected.

• EVT.1305: load #3 has been disconnected.

• EVT.1306: load #3 has been connected.

• EVT.1307: load #4 has been disconnected.

• EVT.1308: load #4 has been connected.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 171

 7.17
These names identify the function available in MC400 that allows to monitor the active power
on the loads; when it becomes greater than a threshold, MC400 starts the generators and
connects them to the loads: the loads will be partly or totally supplied by the generators (MCB
opening is also available). When the active power on the loads falls below a second threshold,
MC400 connects the loads to the mains, transfers the loads from the generators to the mains
and stops the generators.

The function must be enabled by means parameter P.1171 (different from zero).

Moreover, it is possible to use a digital input (physical or virtual) to dynamically enable this
function: use the function DIF.2722 for configuring the digital input. If such an input exists, it
must be activated (logic status) to enable the “peak shaving/lopping” function.

The “peak shaving/lopping” function monitors the active power on the loads; the controller,
this, must be able to measure this power (or to calculate it, see 7.8.4). If this measure is not
available, the function is disabled.

Finally, the thresholds P.1172 and P.1174 must be carefully configured (the second one must
be greater than the first one), otherwise the “peak shaving/lopping” function is disabled,

If the function is enabled, MC400 starts the generator if the active power on the loads is higher
than the threshold P.1172 consecutively for the time P.1173. In the same way, MC400 stops
the generator if the active power on the loads is lower than the threshold P.1174 consecutively
for the time P.1175.

The page B.10 shows details for this function (the page is visible only if the function is enabled).
7.17.1 Power management
Once the gensets have been started and the MGCB has been closed, MC400 actions depend
on the “active power management” configuration (P.0880, see 7.11).
7.17.1.1
In this case, MC400 keeps the generators in parallel to the mains. The generators will provide
a fixed power (as set by parameter P.0858 or acquired by means an analogue input configured
as AIF.2307); the remaining part of the loads will be supplied by the mains. Attention: if the
SYSTEM BASE LOAD setpoint should be greater than the loads, the generators will export
active power on the mains.
7.17.1.2
In this case, MC400 keeps the generators in parallel to the mains. A fixed power will be
imported from the mains to supply the loads (setpoint set by parameter P.0859 or acquired by
means an analogue input configured as AIF.2309); this setpoint could also be 0. The remaining
part of the loads will be supplied by the generators. In this case, if the power on the loads
should be less than the setpoint, the generators will supply 0 kW.
7.17.1.3 Transfer to the generators
In this case, MC400 does not keep the generators in parallel to the mains. After closing MGCB,
MC400 will transfer the loads from the mains to the generators (see 7.11.3) and then it will
open MCB circuit breaker.
7.17.2 Events
If it is configured with the bit 6 of the parameter P.0441, the controller records the following
events related to the “peak shaving/lopping” function:

• EVT.1331: “peak shaving/lopping” function requires the starting of the generators.

• EVT.1332: “peak shaving/lopping” function does not require the starting of the
generators.

172 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 8
This chapter describes all the anomalies managed by the controller. Some of these act as
protections for the loads or for the generators. There are also signalling of specific events in
the plant management. Before describing them in detail, some definitions are required.
We define three typologies of anomaly:
 Warnings: these anomalies do not require stopping the generators. They point out to
situations that are not dangerous at the moment, but the operator must take some
action because, if ignored, they could degenerate in one of the following categories.

 Unloads: these anomalies require stopping the generators. As they do not create
problems for the loads and the gensets, in parallel operations opening of the power
connection is preferably performed after power unloading. This is performed by
unloading ramp. However, it is not possible to restart the generators until the anomaly
has not been acknowledged.
 Alarms: these anomalies require stopping the generators. They create hazards for
the loads and/or for the generators. For this reason, the controller opens immediately
the MGCB circuit breaker (without discharging the power from the generator), and
stops the generators with standard procedure, i.e. with the cooling cycle. It is not
possible to restart the generators until the anomaly is acknowledged.

An alarm can be activated if no other alarms are already active (there are some exceptions,
which will be listed below). Unloads and warnings can be present.
For activating unloads, alarms or other unloads should not be present. Some other warnings
can be active.
For activating a warning, alarms or unloads should not be present. Some other warnings can
be active.

When an anomaly activates, the controller performs the following:

 It activates the internal horn and, if configured, also the external one. To this purpose,
it is possible to configure an output of the controller with function DOF.3152 (“External
horn”). The output is controlled together with the internal acoustic signalling; the aim
is to use a more powerful signalling or a lamp.

 Prompts the page S.02 ANOMALIES on the multifunction display. This page shows
the fault numeric code and the current language text related to the anomaly. The
numeric code flashes to indicate that the anomaly hasn't been recognized by the
operator yet.

 It activates the flashing of the “ALARM” light, if the anomaly belongs to the warning
category, or it switches that light fixed on in case of unloads and alarms.

 If the anomaly isn't a warning, it disconnects the generators from users or from the
parallel bars (with or without power discharge) and it stops the generators (with or
without cooling cycle).

The following operations can be carried out on an anomaly:

 Silence the horn.

 Acknowledge it: this informs the controller that the operator has acknowledged the
event.

 Reset: this informs the controller that the anomaly is no longer active.
The multifunction display shows the anomaly until the operator “acknowledges” it, even if the
relevant cause is no longer present (sequence ISA2C). The controller automatically resets all
the acknowledged warnings when their cause is no longer active.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 173

 8.1
The horn can be silenced in three ways:

 Pressing the ACK/ENTER pushbutton. This operation does not acknowledge the
anomaly, which continues to flash on the display.

 With a digital input configured with DIF.2002 function (“Command for alarm
acknowledgement”). The acoustic signalling is silenced when the input passes from
“not active” to “active”.

 Using a Modbus command. The commands can be protected by a password (P.0004)

which must be entered before any command and can be deactivated through a digital
input (DIF.2706). To send the command it is necessary to write in sequence (within 5
seconds):

▪ HOLDING REGISTER 101: write the password configured with the parameter
P.0004.

▪ HOLDING REGISTER 102: enter the value “51”.

The management of the hooter is anyway linked to the value of P.0491 parameter (“Horn
duration”).

 If set to zero, the horn will be never activated.

 If set to 999, the horn will be activated when a new anomaly arises and deactivated
through the above-described procedure.

 If set to a value between 1 and 998, the horn will be activated when a new anomaly
arises and deactivated through the described procedure above, or when the
configured time has elapsed.

Silencing the horn does not mean to acknowledge the anomaly: it remains, in effect, flashing
on page S.02 ANOMALIES.

8.2
The anomaly (sequence ISA2C) can be identified in three ways:

 By pressing the ACK/ENTER button on the board panel. If you push this key when the
horn is on, it stops the horn: it should be pressed a second time to “recognize” the
anomaly.

 With a digital input configured with DIF.2002 function (“Command for alarm
acknowledgement”). It is acknowledged when the input passes from “not active” to
“active”.

 Using a Modbus command. The commands can be protected by a password (P.0004)

which must be entered before any command and can be deactivated through a digital
input (DIF.2706). To send the command it is necessary to write in sequence (within 5
seconds):

▪ HOLDING REGISTER 101: write the password configured with the parameter
P.0004.

▪ HOLDING REGISTER 102: enter the value “52”. NB: this control also silences
the horn, in case it is active.
When the anomaly has been acknowledged, it stops flashing on page S.02 ANOMALIES. After
being identified, if it is a warning, it is automatically cancelled if the cause is no more present.
Otherwise, if the cause disappears before the anomaly has been acknowledged, it remains on
the display.

174 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 8.3
An anomaly can be cancelled only when the cause that activated it is no more present.

The controller automatically resets all the acknowledged warnings when their cause is no
longer active.

On the contrary, to cancel unloads and alarms, it is necessary to follow one of the below
procedures:

 By moving the key switch on OFF/RESET position.

 Using a digital input configured with the feature DIF.2001 - “Command for resetting
alarms”. When the input becomes “active”, the controller carries out a reset of all faults.

 Using a Modbus command. The commands can be protected by a password (P.0004)

which must be entered before any command and can be deactivated through a digital
input (DIF.2706). To send the command it is necessary to write in sequence (within 5
seconds):

▪ HOLDING REGISTER 101: write the password configured with the parameter
P.0004.

▪ HOLDING REGISTER 102: enter the value “53”.

 By using an “SMS” command (see document [3]).

8.4
Each anomaly is registered (with its own code) in the event log.

Some functions are available for the configuration of the digital outputs related to the
anomalies:

 DOF.3151 (“Reset of anomalies”). The controller activates this output for one second when
the internal sequence for the cancellation of anomalies is carried out. With this procedure,
it is also possible to reset externally managed anomalies.

 DOF.3152 (“External horn”). This output is activated and deactivated along with the
internal horn. It can be used to control a more powerful horn and/or a lamp.

 DOF.3154 (“Acknowledge of the anomalies”). The controller activates this output for one
second when the internal sequence of faults acknowledgement is carried out. This
procedure can be used to acknowledge also some possible faults managed by other
devices externally.

 DOF.4001: the output will be activated if at least a warning is active.

 DOF.4002: the output will be activated if at least an unload is active.

 DOF.4004: the output will be activated if at least an alarm is active.

 DOF.4005: the output will be activated if at least an alarm or an unload are active.

 DOF.4035: the output will be activated if at least an anomaly linked to circuit breakers is
active. What follows is the list of anomalies that activate this output:

▪ 013 (“MCB not closed”).

▪ 014 (“GCB not closed”).

▪ 023 (“MCB not open”).

▪ 024 (“GCB not open”).

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 175

 The board makes available the following internal statuses, related to anomalies, for AND/OR
logics:

 ST.006: the output will be activated for a second after a command of faults
acknowledgement.

 ST.007: the output will be activated for a second after a command of faults reset.

 ST.008: Warnings cumulative.

 ST.009: Unload cumulative.

 ST.011: Alarm cumulative.

 ST.012: Non-acknowledged warnings cumulative.

 ST.013: Non-acknowledged unloads cumulative.

 ST.015: Non-acknowledged alarms cumulative.

8.5

WARNING: the use of this function can cause serious damages to the generators.
SICES cannot be considered anyway liable due to malfunctioning and damages to
things and/or people occurred because of the utilization of the OVERRIDE function.

This term defines the capacity of the controller of temporarily disabling (in particular conditions
and on specific request) a series of protections. The OVERRIDE function, when is activated,
turns a set of alarms and unloads into simple “warnings”: in this way, the board indicates,
anyway, the presence of problems, but doesn't reduce the supplying capacity of the
generators. In some situations, in fact, supply to users is put before the preservation of the
engines. You should consider, for example, hospitals: there are situations in which it is
preferable to damage the engines, and supply power for the longest period possible, rather
than safeguarding the engines, but leaving operating rooms without light.

The board manages the protections OVERRIDE request through digital inputs. Use the
following function to configure the digital inputs:

• DIF.2063 (“Full protections Override”).

The OVERRIDE function turns a specific set of alarms/unloads into "warnings". The document
[1] has a table indicating all the controller anomalies: the column “OVER” indicates, for each
anomaly, if it is subject to the OVERRIDE functions.

Besides what indicated in the table, the OVERRIDE function also affects "generic" anomalies
connected to analogue and digital inputs. The following functions for the configuration of digital
inputs activate anomalies that are subject to protections OVERRIDE too:

 DIF.4062 - “Unload (subject to OVERRIDE)”.

 DIF.4064 - “Alarm (subject to OVERRIDE)”.

As to protections activated through thresholds on analogue measures, it is possible to subject

these anomalies to protections OVERRIDE through the bit 15 of the threshold configuration
parameter (P.4005 for the first threshold on the first analogue input).

The board will show a message on “S.01” page when the OVERRIDE function is activated.

The board records an event each time an OVERRIDE request is activated (EVT.1082).
Moreover, it records an event among the records, whenever the OVERRIDE request ceases
(EVT.1083).

176 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 8.6
The board manages a significant number of digital input, by considering also the expansion
modules (DITEL) that it can manage. Every input can be used to activate anomalies. These
anomalies are divided into two kinds:

• Specific. They are configured with functions DIF.4261 and following. The board
knows the modes through which these anomalies should be managed, and already
has some default error messages (that cannot be configured) connected to each
anomaly.

• Generic. They are configured through DIF.4001 through DIF.4064 functions. As to

these anomalies, the operator should configure the message that will be shown on the
display. Moreover, by using the appropriate functions, the board will be instructed
regarding the way it should manage the anomaly.

Specific anomalies will be described in the following paragraphs: in the description, the
parameters relevant to the digital input #1 (P.2001, P.2002 e P.2003) will be always referred
to. The document [1] has a table that shows the parameters to be used for every digital input.

What stated above is true also for generic anomalies. They will not be described in the
following paragraphs, because they will be infinite repetitions of the same description for each
input. On the contrary, they are described here, by indicating parameters for input #1 of the
controller.

The board assigns numeric codes 701 through 806 to generic anomalies linked to digital inputs
(the document [1] has a table that shows the code for each input). By utilizing the parameter
that configures the function (P.2001), it is possible to select the type of anomaly (warning,
unload or alarm) and to define the conditions for the anomaly management. Warning: by
setting the delay to “0”, the anomaly is disabled. In the list below, the functions for the
configuration of digital inputs, used to manage generic anomalies, are indicated. They are
grouped three by three: the three functions for each group define the type of anomaly (see
document [1] for the list of functions).

 DIF.4001, DIF.4002, DIF.4004. The board will activate this anomaly if the digital input
is uninterruptedly active for the configured (P.2002) time span.

 DIF.4005, DIF.4008. The board will activate this anomaly if the digital input is
uninterruptedly active for the configured (P.2002) time span. An anomaly of the same
type is also activated by all the genset controllers connected through the CAN bus
link.

 DIF.4021, DIF.4022, DIF.4024. The board will activate this anomaly if the digital input
is uninterruptedly active for the configured (P.2002) time span. These anomalies force
the opening of the MCB circuit breaker.

 DIF.4062, DIF.4064. The board will activate this anomaly if the digital input is
uninterruptedly active for the configured (P.2002) time span. The anomaly is subject
to the engine protections OVERRIDE and to total OVERRIDE, too (see 8.5).

8.7
The board can manage a high number of analogue inputs, also considering those acquired by
DIGRIN, DITHERM and DIVIT expansion modules.

For each analogue input, it allows setting two thresholds on the acquired measure, and each
threshold can activate an anomaly. These are generic anomalies, since the controller doesn't
know how to manage them and hasn't default warning messages. They will not be described
in the following paragraphs, because they will be infinite repetitions of the same description
for each analogue input. On the contrary, they are described here, by indicating parameters
for input 1.

The controller assigns numeric codes 301 through 554 to generic anomalies linked to
analogue inputs (the document [1] has a table that shows the code of each input).

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 177

 First, the operator should configure the error message that will be shown on the board display
when the anomaly is activated. It should use P.4002 parameter, the only one for the two
thresholds. The controller will add an initial wording to the configured message:

 “High value:” if the anomaly is activated when the measure is higher than the
threshold.

 “Low value:” if the anomaly is activated when the measure is lower than the threshold.

For each analogue input, there are six parameters available for the management of thresholds,
three for each threshold (P.4003, P.4004 and P.4005 for the first threshold of the first analogue
input; P.4006, P.4007 and P.4008 for the second threshold of the first analogue input).

Besides the threshold value (P.4003 or P.4006) and the delay to be managed (P.4004 or
P.4007), the operator must configure the operations connected to the threshold (P.4005 o
P.4008). The parameter that configures the actions is managed through bits (every bit
enables/disables a function connected to the threshold). For the description of these
parameter, see 5.6.2.

Warning: by setting the delay to “0”, the anomaly isn't disabled.

8.8
NOTE: as it is not possible to define either which digital or analogue inputs (of the controller
or on additional modules) will be used or which function they are going to perform, refer to the
following list as an example of the first configurable input. The presence of symbol (*) or the
indication “or equivalent for the other inputs” aside a parameter indicates that it varies
according to the configured input.

From this point on, words enabling and activation will be utilized:

 Enabling an anomaly means that the minimum necessary conditions that the controller
should verify to observe the provoking cause.

 Activating an anomaly means the verification of the provoking cause, after the
enabling has happened.

Typology: Warning
Related parameters: P.0805
To disable: -
Enabled if: MAN, AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START.

MC400 activates this anomaly when it detects (from information sent over CAN bus PMCB)
that at least one genset is in a “GCB not opened” condition (GCB closed while an opening
command is active). In this situation, the parameter P.0805 selects the actions on the MGCB
circuit breaker:

• “0”. This setting forces an MGCB opening (and obviously avoids next MGCB
closures).

• “1”. This setting avoids MGCB closures (but doesn’t force MGCB opening if already
closed).

• “2”. Use this setting when you want that the “GCB not open” condition is not involved
in the MGCB management.

Note: the gensets controllers have its own equivalent parameter to configure actions
on GCB.

Typology: Alarm

178 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 Related parameters: P.0495
To disable: Bit 0 of P.0495=1
Enabled if: AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START.

The protection is enabled if bit 0 of parameter P.0495 is set to 0. It is activated when pressing
the STOP button on MC400, or if a stop command is received from Modbus.

Typology: Warning
Related parameters: P.0806
To disable: P.0806 = 0 o P.0806 = 30000
Enabled if: MAN, AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START.

This anomaly is enabled only if MGCB circuit breaker exists, and if it is managed by MC400.
Moreover, it is enabled only when generators must supply in “island” mode. MC400 activates
this anomaly before MGCB closure, if all available generators are supplying but the sum of
their nominal powers is lower than the power requested with parameter P.0806. It signals that
generators may be unable to supply all loads. Values “0” and “30000” of P.0806 are special;
they disable this anomaly. The value “0” configures MC400 to close MGCB as soon as one
GCB is closed; the value “30000” forces MC400 to wait for all available generators are
supplying (whatever their power is).

Typology: Warning
Related parameters: P.2001 (or equivalent for other inputs)
To disable: P.2001 <> DIF.3002
Enabled if: MAN, AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START.

MC400 activates this anomaly after three consecutive closing commands without results (in
MAN after the first attempt). It cannot be directly disabled: it can be disabled only by not
configuring an input to acquire the circuit breaker status (but this is possible only in certain
situations).

Typology: Warning / alarm

Related parameters: P.2001 (or equivalent for other inputs)
To disable: P.2001 <> DIF.3003
Enabled if: MAN, AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START.

MC400 activates this anomaly after three closing commands of the circuit breaker without
result (in MAN mode after the first attempt): it is a warning in MAN mode and an alarm in the
other modes. It cannot be directly disabled: it can be disabled only by not configuring an input
to acquire the circuit breaker status (but this is possible only in certain situations).

Typology: Warning / unload / alarm

Related parameters: P.9502 P.9521 P.9522 P.9523 P.9524
To disable: P.9502 = 0 o P.9522 = 0 o P.9523 = 0
Enabled if: MAN, AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START.

MC400 activates this anomaly when at least one of the mains currents is higher than the
configured threshold.

The threshold (P.9521) is a percentage of the nominal current of the system, set by parameter
P.9502. The threshold can be configured between 0% and 999%, with 0.1% resolution.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 179

 The delay (P.9522) of the protection can be set between 0 and 4000 seconds, with 0.1
seconds’ resolution. If the delay is set to zero, the protection is disabled: so, the minimum
delay is 0.1 seconds.

Parameter P.9524 selects the typology:

• 1: Warning.

• 2: Unload.

• 4: Alarm.

• 8: Alarm sent also to all gensets.

• 9: Warning, forces MCB open.

• 10: Unload, forces MCB open.

• 12: Alarm, forces MCB open.

The protection can work in four different ways, as selected by parameter P.9523:

1. This value selects a “fixed time” protection. The anomaly is activated when at least
one current is higher than the threshold P.9521 for the time P.9522. Note: the check
is made both on instantaneous and average current values; if one or both is higher
than the threshold the protection can be activated.

2. This value selects the same protection of the previous one: the only difference is that
the real threshold is decreased respect to the configured one if the voltages are lower
than the nominal.

120,00%

100,00%
Tensione (% della nominale)

80,00%

60,00%

40,00%

20,00%

0,00%
0,00% 20,00% 40,00% 60,00% 80,00% 100,00% 120,00%
Soglia reale (% della soglia impostata)

3. This value selects a time-related maximum current protection (it activates so much
more quickly how much higher is the overload). The used curve is named
EXTREMELY INVERSE, and implements an I2t function.

We define a maximum current threshold (P.9521), and the maximum time the
generator can work with this current (P.9522). If the current is lower than the defined
threshold, the protection is not activated. If the current become greater than the
threshold, the protection is activated with a time inversely proportional with the entity
of the over current. To correctly set the thresholds, follow the following steps:

180 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 ▪ You must set the nominal current of the system (P.9502).

▪ Configure the maximum current threshold by the P.9521 parameter, as a

percentage of the nominal current.

▪ Configure the intervention time for the protection in the P.9522 parameter: the
protection will be activated exactly after the time you’ve configured if the
current is constantly equals to the P.9521 threshold multiplied by 2 .

To calculate the intervention time for a preferred current, please use the following
formula:

P.9522
tI = 2
 I 
  −1
 P.9521 
“I” is the current in the circuit.

You must keep in mind that the board calculates the integral value of the current in the
time, so all the current samples over the threshold concur to determine the intervention
time, with their instantaneous weight as defined in the previous formula. The only way
to verify exactly this formula is thus to switch instantaneously from a normal load
situation to an over load situation.

The following graph shows the used curve, with P.9522 set to 60 seconds (I is the
maximum current):

Tempo intervento

1000

100
Intervention time (seconds) I

10

0,1
1 10
Multiple of I

4. This value selects the same protection of the previous one: the only difference is that
the real threshold is decreased respect to the configured one if the voltages are lower
than the nominal (see description for value 2).

Typology: Warning / unload / alarm

Related parameters: P.9502 P.9525 P.9526 P.9527 P.9528
To disable: P.9502 = 0 o P.9526 = 0 o P.9527 = 0
Enabled if: MAN, AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START.

The same as anomaly “016”, with the parameter listed above.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 181

 Typology: Warning
Related parameters: P.9512
To disable: P.9512 = 0
Enabled if: MAN, AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START.

This anomaly is activated when at least one genset managed by MC400 is still running after
the delay set in the parameter P.9512 from the stop command.

Typology: Warning
Related parameters: P.9511
To disable: P.9511 = 0
Enabled if: MAN, AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START.

This anomaly is activated when none of the gensets managed by MC400 is running after the
delay set in the parameter P.9511 from the start command.

Typology: Warning / alarm

Related parameters: P.2001 (or equivalent for other inputs)
To disable: P.2001 <> DIF.3002
Enabled if: MAN, AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START.

MC400 activates this anomaly in the following situations:

• If MC400 manages the circuit breaker, but it is closed by an external logic (not in MAN
mode). The anomaly is set only if the “static command” is used to manage the circuit
breaker. In this case the controller activates an alarm with a delay of 0.5 seconds.

• After three opening commands of the circuit breaker without result (only one attempt
in MAN mode): in this case, it is a warning in MAN mode and an alarm in the other
modes.

It cannot be directly disabled: it can be disabled only by not configuring an input to acquire the
circuit breaker status (but this is possible only in certain situations).

Typology: Warning / alarm

Related parameters: P.2001 (or equivalent for other inputs)
To disable: P.2001 <> DIF.3003
Enabled if: MAN, AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START.

MC400 activates this anomaly in the following situations:

• If MC400 manages the circuit breaker, but it is closed by an external logic (not in MAN
mode). The anomaly is set only if the “static command” is used to manage the circuit
breaker. In this case the controller activates an alarm with a delay of 0.5 seconds.

• After three opening commands of the circuit breaker without result (only one attempt
in MAN mode): in this case, it is a warning in MAN mode and an alarm in the other
modes.

It cannot be directly disabled: it can be disabled only by not configuring an input to acquire the
circuit breaker status (but this is possible only in certain situations).

182 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 Typology: Warning
Related parameters: P.0362 P.0363
To disable: P.0363 = 0
Enabled if: MAN, AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START.

MC400 activates this anomaly when power supply voltage drops down under the threshold
P.0362 for the time set with parameter P.0363. Note: the threshold P.0362 is expressed as a
percentage of the supply rated voltage, which is configurable but it is automatically selected
by the controller between 12 and 24 Vdc. Selection is made when the controller is powered
and every time it is forced in OFF/RESET mode. A nominal voltage of 12 V is selected if power
supply voltage is lower than 17 V.

Typology: Warning
Related parameters: P.0364 P.0365
To disable: P.0365 = 0
Enabled if: MAN, AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START.

MC400 activates this anomaly when power supply voltage grows up over the threshold P.0364
for the time set with parameter P.0365. Note: the threshold P.0364 is expressed as a
percentage of the supply rated voltage, which is configurable but it is automatically selected
by the controller between 12 and 24 Vdc. Selection is made when the controller is powered
and every time it is forced in OFF/RESET mode. A nominal voltage of 12 V is selected if power
supply voltage is lower than 17 V.

Type: Alarm
Parameters connected: P.0108 P.0135 P.0131 P.0367 P.0368
To disable: P.0368 = 0
Enabled in: MAN, AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START

The protection is enabled if a valid current measure is configured. Both P.0108 and P.0135
should be different from zero, and P.0131 should be set to 1 or 2. Moreover, the protection
can be disabled through a digital input configured through DIF.2704 function (“disable
protections on the fourth current”): if the digital input exists and is activated, the protection will
be disabled.

The protection will be activated if, per the previous conditions, the measure of current stays
above P.0367 threshold uninterruptedly for the time P.0368.

Type: Alarm

Parameters connected: P.0361

To disable: -
Enabled in: MAN, AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START

The protection is always enabled.

It will be activated if, per the previous conditions, the input dedicated to the emergency stop
(JJ 2) remains idle, continuously for the configured time (P.0361).

Note: this anomaly can be activated also with an already active shutdown.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 183

 Type: Warning
Parameters connected: P.0418 P.0421 P.0422 P.0423 P.0426
To disable: -
Enabled in: MAN, AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START

The protection is always enabled.

It is activated if the controller recognizes the clock status as not valid and the functions related
to the clock, such as the weekly test (P.0418), the time to enable operations (P.0421, P.0422,
P.0423) or the time to force intervention (P.0426) have been configured.

To deactivate it, you need to set the clock.

Type: Warning
Parameters connected: P.0141 P.0142 P.0143 P.0144
To disable: -
Enabled in: MAN, AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START

The protection is enabled if the CAN bus is activated (P.0141 or P.0142 or P.0143 or P.0144
<> 0).

It activates if the internal CAN controller switches to BUS-OFF status due to bus
communication errors.

Typology: Warning
Related parameters: -
To disable: -
Enabled if: MAN, AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START.

This anomaly is activated each time the CAN bus internal interface of the controller switches
to the BUS-OFF status. Normally the “BUS-OFF” condition is related to wiring problems (short
circuits between CAN-H and CAN-L lines, for example).

Typology: Warning
Related parameters: P.9501
To disable: -
Enabled if: MAN, AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START.

This anomaly is activated when two or more MCxxx devices are connected to the same can
bus line, and they have the same address for PMCB (parameter P.9501).

Typology: Warning
Related parameters: P.0803
To disable: P.0803 = 0
Enabled if: MAN, AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START.

MC400 activates this anomaly if the number of genset controllers communicating over the can
bus PMCB is different from what configured by parameter P.0803. In this case, parameter
P.0804 can be used to inhibit MGCB closure (but not to force its opening). By setting the
parameter P.0803 to “0”, you disable this command.

184 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 Typology: Warning
Related parameters: P.0890
To disable: P.0890 = 0
Enabled if: MAN, AUTO, TEST, AVVIAMENTO REMOTO.

MC400 activates this anomaly if P.0890 has been set to a value different from zero, and the
duration of the parallel to the grid was longer than this parameter. MC400 opens the MGCB
circuit breaker and doesn’t allow its closure until the operator acknowledges this warning.
MC400 can activate this warning even when the function “transfer to gensets” is enabled, if at
the end of the configured delay the power is not yet transferred to the gensets (because the
nominal power of the gensets is not enough for the loads): in this case, if the power on the
loads would decrease (or if new gensets became available), MC400 will close again MGCB
circuit breaker even if the warning has not been acknowledged.

The parameter P.0897 is a bit-field parameter, allowing the operator to select in which
conditions MCB opening as to be allowed at the end of configured time:

• Bit 0: in MAN mode.

• Bit 1: in AUTO mode.

• Bit 2: in TEST mode.

• Bit 3: in REMOTE START mode.

• Bit 7: in case of failure in opening MGCB.

Type: Warning
Parameters connected: P.0141 P.0142 P.0143 P.0144
To disable: P.0141=0 and P.0142=0 and P.0143=0 and P.0144=0
Enabled in: MAN, AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START

The protection is enabled if the CAN bus is activated (P.0141 or P.0142 or P.0143 or P.0144
different from zero).

It will be activated when one or more boards configured with the previous parameters isn't
communicating on the CAN bus. On page S.02, by selecting this early warning, the board
shows which module isn't communicating.

Type: Warning
Parameters connected: P.0141 P.0142 P.0143 P.0144
To disable: P.0142=0 and P.0143=0
Enabled in: MAN, AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START

The protection is enabled if the CAN bus for the expansion modules is activated (P.0141 or
P.0142 or P.0143 or P.0144 different from zero).

It will be activated when the controller doesn’t receive an analogue measure from the CAN
bus. The board verifies the sole presence of the utilized analogue measures (those that have
a function different from zero in P.4001 parameter or equivalent ones for the other analogue
inputs). On S.02 page, by selecting this early warning, the board indicates which channel of
which module isn't carrying out the measurement.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 185

 Type: Warning
Parameters connected: P.0141 P.0142 P.0143 P.0144
To disable: P.0141=0 e P.0142=0 e P.0143=0 e P.0144=0
Enabled in: MAN, AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START

The protection is enabled if the CAN bus for the expansion modules is activated (P.0141 or
P.0142 or P.0143 or P.0144 different from zero).

It will be activated if two or more expansion modules are configured with the same address.
On S.02 page, by selecting this early warning, the board indicates which module has the
duplicated address.

Type: Warning
Parameters connected: P.0142 P.0143
To disable: P.0142=0 and P.0143=0
Enabled in: MAN, AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START

The protection is enabled if the CAN bus for the expansion modules is activated (P.0141 or
P.0142 or P.0143 or P.0144 different from zero).

It will be activated when a DIGRIN, DITHERM or DIVIT module reports the status of
“disconnected sector”. On S.02 page, by selecting this early warning, the board indicates
which channel of which module has a disconnected sensor.

Typology: Warning / alarm

Related parameters: P.0852
To disable: P.0852 = 0
Enabled if: AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START.

This anomaly is activated only during automatic synchronization, for MGCB closure. If the
circuit breaker is not closed after the P.0852 delay, MC400 activates the anomaly: it’s a
warning in MAN mode, an alarm in all other modes.

Typology: Warning
Related parameters: P.0853
To disable: P.0853 = 0
Enabled if: AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START.

This anomaly is activated only during automatic synchronization, for MCB closure. If the circuit
breaker is not closed after the P.0852 delay, MC400 activates the anomaly.

Typology: Warning / alarm

Related parameters: -
To disable: -
Enabled if: MAN, AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START.

MC400 activates this anomaly to signal a “wrong configuration” of parameters. In the “S.02”
display page, a detailed description shows the real cause of the anomaly. Possible causes
are:

186 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 • The parameters which require the “SICES” password are never been set after the first
factory configuration. It’s an alarm.

• Selected plant type (P.0802) is different from “MPM”, and the MCB circuit breaker is
configured as “not managed” (P.0855). It’s an alarm.

• MCB circuit breaker is configured as “external” (P.0855) and no digital input is

configured to acquire its status (function DIF.3002). It’s an alarm.

• MCB circuit breaker is managed by MC400 without static commands, and no digital
input is configured to acquire its status (function DIF.3002). It’s an alarm.

• MCB circuit breaker is configured as “external synchronizable” (P.0855), and no digital

input is configured to acquire external synchronization requests (function DIF.1034).
It’s an alarm.

• MGCB circuit breaker is configured as “external” (P.0854) and no digital input is

configured to acquire its status (function DIF.3003). It’s an alarm.

• MGCB circuit breaker is managed by MC400 without static commands, and no digital
input is configured to acquire its status (function DIF.3003). It’s an alarm.

• MGCB circuit breaker is configured as “external synchronizable” (P.0854), and no

digital input is configured to acquire external synchronization requests (function
DIF.1004). It’s an alarm.

• The parameter P.9506 is programmed to zero, but in the plant is present at least one
controller that does not support MC200 mode. Function available by GC400 starting
from version 02.00; but not by the MC100. It’s a warning.

Typology: Alarm
Related parameters: P.2001 (or equivalent for other inputs)
To disable: P.2001 <> DIF.4261
Enabled if: MAN, AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START.

MC400 activates this anomaly if the digital input configured with the function DIF.4261
(“production line open”) is activated (even for a very small time). Note: this alarm forces the
opening of all generator circuit breakers GCB; this function is directly managed by the
genset controllers after receiving a proper message over the PMCB bus.

Typology: Alarm
Related parameters: P.0900
To disable: P.0900 = 0
Enabled if: MAN, AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START.

This anomaly is used only for parallel to mains operations. MC400 activates it when the circuit
breaker configured as “interface device” (P.0900) does not open in 0.5 seconds from the “loss
of mains”. Set P.0900 to zero do disable this control: ensure some external logic can
disconnect generators from mains in case of loss of mains.

Type: Warning/Alarm
Parameters connected: -
To disable: -
Enabled in: MAN, AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START

The board will activate this warning before closing MGCB, if it notices a divergence between
the effective presence of voltage on parallel bars and what it expects per the statuses of the

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 187

 switches, mains and any other generator control boards connected on PMCB. The anomaly is
activated only if there isn’t voltage on bars when, on the contrary, it should be present. For
example, if at least a generator has closed GCB, there should be voltage on parallel bars: if
the board doesn't detect it (through the three-phase sensor or through a contact), after two
seconds the signalling is activated. Usually the signal is a warning, it becomes an alarm (only
in case of automatic procedures) after 60 seconds if the board needs to close the MGCB.

Typology: Warning / alarm

Related parameters: P.0384, P.0385, P.0386
To disable: P.0385 = 0
Enabled if: MAN, AUTO, TEST, REMOTE START.

This anomaly is activated when the active power measured on the mains is negative
(exported) and is greater (absolute value) than the threshold P.0384 continuously for the time
P.0385. The action related to the protection can be configured by P.0386:

• 1 – Warning. The controller activates the warning but keeps the generators in parallel
to the mains,

• 4 – Alarm. The controller activates the alarm, opens MGCB (when present), forces the
genset controllers to open their GCB and to stop the engines with the standard
procedure (with the cool down cycle).

• 9 – Warning (MCB). If this value is selected, when the protection trips the controller
opens MCB and keeps the gensets running for supply the load in island mode. The
controller will try to close MCB only after the warning has been acknowledged. Note:
using this value, the protection works in OFF/RESET mode also (it opens MCB). In
this way, the mains is protected against manual parallel performed on the genset
controllers when MC400 is in OFF/RESET mode.

See 8.6.

See 8.7.

188 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 9
9.1
This function is used for “emergency” plants (MSB or MSB+MSTP). Normally, in case of mains
live, the controller connects the load to the mains. For stand-by application, MCB must be
usually closed to connect the loads to the mains. Using this function is possible to automatically
start the gensets and supply the loads in case of MCB failure.

To use this function, carry out following configuration:

• MCB feedback must be connected to a digital input of the controller.

• Set parameter P.9514 to 1.

With such configuration, MCB status is continuously monitored. When MCB is commanded
closed but remains opened for more than the programmed time (mains should be present if
MCB is supplied by mains – P.0847), the following actions are carried out:

• It tries to close the MCB circuit breaker.

• In case if failure, warning W013 is issued.

• All available engines are started.

• Loads are connected to generators.

Now, the loads won’t be switched automatically on the mains until the operator “acknowledges”
the warning W013. After this operation, the controller will try again to close MCB: if it does not
close, the warning will be issued again and the load will stay switched on gensets.

In MAN mode (or with start inhibitions activated) the function is disabled; it is also disabled if
a “inhibition to start” is activated,

The controller starts the generators (if P.9514 is set to 1) even when is activated the generic
warning related to a digital input configured with the functions DIF.4021, DIF.4022, DIF.4024
(these anomalies force the opening of MCB). Even in this case, the controller will try to close
MCB (and then will stop the generators) only when the operator will acknowledge and reset
that warning.

9.2
The board is provided with a hardware clock. It is shown in details on page S.03. It is possible
to set the clock through 4.7.1 menu or serial ports. It is used for several functions:

 History logs recordings.

 TEST weekly planning.

 Weekly planning of time intervals in which the gensets can start automatically.

 Weekly plan of periods in which the gensets automatic activation must be forced

The clock is equipped with a rechargeable battery and can work for some months even if the
controller is not supplied. After a long time in which the controller is not used (no supply), even
if the clock reactivates immediately when the supply comes back, a few hours are necessary
to guarantee to full recharge of the internal battery.
9.2.1 Clock automatic update
In case the controller has an Ethernet connection, the clock can be automatically updated
through the connection towards a NTP server (see par. 5.11.4). The controller registers the
event “EVT.1076 - Date and hour modified” in the history log, but only if the difference between
the new time received and the current one is higher than one minute.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 189

 The server TNP (questioned by the controller every 5 minutes) gives the date and hour of the
reference time zone (that is UCT “Universal Coordinated Time”) from which the controller can
calculate and update the internal calendar considering its own time zone and eventual daylight
saving time. To this purpose, the follow parameters are available:

 P.0408: Daylight saving offset (1=15 min.; 4=1 hour). The setting limits are from 0 to 48
and allow to manage the offset to be added/subtracted for the daylight saving time.

 P.0409: Daylight saving time.

 “0-No” daylight saving time not in use

 “1-Yes” daylight saving time in use (it adds P.0408 to the one received).

 “2-Automatic (only Europe)”: It is only valid for Europe, as since 2002 has been unified
(it activates ate 01.00 of the last Sunday of March and deactivates at 01.00 of the last
Sunday of October).

 P.0410: Time zone (1=15 min.; 4=1 hour). The setting limits are from -47 to + 48 and
allow to manage all time zones of the Earth by hour quarts.
9.2.2 Weekly planning for TEST.
The starting test plans is made on weekly base. That is, it is possible to indicate in which days
of the week the generators must be started in test and in which not.

The parameters related to this function are the following:

 P.0418: allows to specify in which days of week the TEST will be performed. It is a bit-
configurable parameter; each bit of the parameter corresponds to a day of the week.
The value you must set for the parameter is the sum of the value field of the following
table for the days needed.

Bit Hexadecimal value Day

0 01 Sunday
1 02 Monday
2 04 Tuesday
3 08 Wednesday
4 10 Thursday
5 20 Friday
6 40 Saturday

For example, if you want to perform the TEST only on Monday and Thursday, you
must set 12 (10+02).

 P.0419: allows to set start time for the TEST (Hours and minutes).

 P.0420: allows to configure the TEST duration (in minutes).

P.0420 allows to configure the TEST duration (in minutes). This is because the same
parameter is used also for the TEST activated by an SMS command.
9.2.3 Weekly planning for working days.
In some applications, it is useful to inhibit the automatic intervention of the gensets for mains
failure in hours or days where the mains is not used. For example, if a factory is closed on
Sunday, the gensets should never start in this day for mains failure (because it consumes
unnecessary fuel). With this function, you can select in which days and in which time intervals
the gensets can start automatically. The planning is made on a weekly basis: therefore, it is
possible to plan in which days the generator must operate. Besides days, it is possible to set
a single auto operation enable time slot common to all selected days.

The parameters related to this function are the following:

190 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

  P.0421: allows to specify in which days of week the gensets can start automatically.
It is a bit-configurable parameter; each bit of the parameter corresponds to a day of
the week. The value you must set for the parameter is the sum of the value field of the
following table for the days needed.


Bit Hexadecimal value Day
0 01 Sunday
1 02 Monday
2 04 Tuesday
3 08 Wednesday
4 10 Thursday
5 20 Friday
6 40 Saturday

 P.0422: allows to configure the start of the time interval during which the gensets can
start automatically (in hours and minutes).

 P.0423: allows to configure the end of the time interval during which the gensets can
start automatically (in hours and minutes).

Usually P.0422 will be set to a value lower than P.0423. On the contrary, if it contains a higher
value, the controller infers that the time interval is set across midnight: in this case, the time
set with P.0422 refers to the days selected with P.0421, while the time set with P.0423 refers
to the following days.

For example, in case an automatic gensets start is required only Monday through Friday,
between 08:00 and 18:00, you must set:

P.0421 = 3E (02+04+08+10+20)

P.0422 = 08:00

P.0423 = 18:00
9.2.4 Weekly planning of intervention forcing.
The planning of intervention forcing is performed weekly. That is, it is possible to indicate on
which days of the week the generators must intervene, even if the status of the system doesn't
require the intervention. Besides the days, it is possible to specify from what time to what time
the intervention should be forced. This time interval is common to all the days selected.

The parameters related to this function are the following:

• P.0426: it allows specifying on which days of the week the intervention of the
generators must be forced. It is a bit-configurable parameter; each bit of the parameter
corresponds to a day of the week. The value to be set for the parameter is the sum of
the value fields in the following table related to the days needed.

Bit Hexadecimal value Day

0 01 Sunday
1 02 Monday
2 04 Tuesday
3 08 Wednesday
4 10 Thursday
5 20 Friday
6 40 Saturday

For example, to configure the forcing of the intervention only on Monday and
Thursday, it is necessary to set 12 (10+02).

• P.0427: it allows setting the starting time of the forcing (in hours and minutes).

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 191

 • P.0428: it allows setting the ending time of the forcing (in hours and minutes).
9.2.5 Configurable calendars
The controller provides 16 calendars fully configurable. They allow to select days and time-
slots, inside which the controller activates an internal bit. This bit could then be used by
AND/OR logics to activate a digital output or to create more complex logics. All calendars are
identical: calendars 15 and 16, however, can be used for the activation/deactivation of the
daylight save time (if parameter P.0409 is set to “3”).

Each calendar can be individually selected as “monthly” or “weekly”:

Using BoardPrg3 software, it is very easy to select whether a calendar is “weekly” or “monthly”.
If you want to use the parameters of the controller, you must act on the parameter P.1900. It
is a bit-field parameter; one bit is provided for each calendar:
BIT Value Hexadecimal Calendar
0 1 0001 Calendar 1
1 2 0002 Calendar 2
2 4 0004 Calendar 3
3 8 0008 Calendar 4
4 16 0010 Calendar 5
5 32 0020 Calendar 6
6 64 0040 Calendar 7

192 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 7 128 0080 Calendar 8
8 256 0100 Calendar 9
9 512 0200 Calendar 10
10 1024 0400 Calendar 11
11 2048 0800 Calendar 12
12 4096 1000 Calendar 13
13 8192 2000 Calendar 14
14 16384 4000 Calendar 15
15 32768 8000 Calendar 16

The parameter must be set with the sum of the values for all the calendars that must be
selected as “weekly” (in hexadecimal notation). In fact, a bit set to “1” selects the “weekly”
mode.

Both calendar types allow to select in which months the controller activates the internal bit (at
least one month must be selected, it is even possible to select all months). Using the
parameters of the controller, this selection is done by means parameter P.1901 (for the
calendar 1 or equivalent for other calendars). This is also a bit-field parameter:
BIT Value Hexadecimal Month
0 1 0001 January
1 2 0002 February
2 4 0004 March
3 8 0008 April
4 16 0010 May
5 32 0020 June
6 64 0040 July
7 128 0080 August
8 256 0100 September
9 512 0200 October
10 1024 0400 November
11 2048 0800 December

The parameter must be set with the sum of the values of the required months (in hexadecimal
notation).

For “monthly” calendars, is then possible to select the days of the month for the activation of
the internal bit (at least one day must be selected, it is even possible to select all days). Using
the parameters of the controller, this selection is done by means parameter P.1902 (for the
calendar 1 or equivalent for other calendars). This is also a bit-field parameter:
BIT Value Hexadecimal Day of month
0 1 00000001 1
1 2 00000002 2
2 4 00000004 3
3 8 00000008 4
4 16 00000010 5
5 32 00000020 6
6 64 00000040 7
7 128 00000080 8
8 256 00000100 9
9 512 00000200 10
10 1024 00000400 11
11 2048 00000800 12
12 4096 00001000 13
13 8192 00002000 14
14 16384 00004000 15

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 193

 15 32768 00008000 16
16 65536 000100000 17
17 131072 00020000 18
18 262144 00040000 19
19 524288 00080000 20
20 1048576 00100000 21
21 2097152 00200000 22
22 4194304 00400000 23
23 8388608 00800000 24
24 16777216 01000000 25
25 33554432 02000000 26
26 67108864 04000000 27
27 134217728 08000000 28
28 268435456 10000000 29
29 536870912 20000000 30
30 1073741824 40000000 31

The parameter must be set with the sum of the values of the required days (in hexadecimal
notation).

For “weekly” calendars, is then possible to select the days of the week for the activation of the
internal bit (at least one day must be selected, it is even possible to select all days). Using the
parameters of the controller, this selection is done by means parameter P.1902 (for the
calendar 1 or equivalent for other calendars). This is also a bit-field parameter:
BIT Value Hexadecimal Day of week
16 65536 00010000 Sunday
17 131072 00020000 Monday
18 262144 00040000 Tuesday
19 524288 00080000 Wednesday
20 1048576 00100000 Thursday
21 2097152 00200000 Friday
22 4194304 00400000 Saturday

The parameter must be set with the sum of the values of the required days (in hexadecimal
notation).

Selecting a day of the week (Sunday for example), it is then possible to select if all “Sundays”
in the month must be used or only some of them. Using the parameters of the controller, this
selection is done by means parameter P.1902 (for the calendar 1 or equivalent for other
calendars). This is also a bit-field parameter:
BIT Value Hexadecimal Occurrence
0 1 00000001 First occurrence
1 2 00000002 Second occurrence
2 4 00000004 Third occurrence
3 8 00000008 Forth occurrence
4 16 00000010 Last occurrence

The parameter must be set with the sum of the values of the required occurrences (in
hexadecimal notation). Note: for “weekly” calendars, the days of week and their
occurrences in the month are selected by the same parameter, using different bits.

If the “occurrence” bits are all “0”, then the selected days of week will be managed in any week
of the month; otherwise they will be managed for the selected occurrences only. The “last”
option is useful because, depending on the month and on the year, a certain day of the week
can be present 4 or 5 times in a month: using the “last” option you can do an action exactly in
the last occurrence in the month. A typical example is the management of the daylight save
time; in Italy, it is activated on the last Sunday of October, and deactivated on the last Sunday

194 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 of March. Those Sundays can be the 4° or the 5° occurrence in the month, depending on the
first day of the month. Using the “last” option, the problem is solved.

Finally, for both “weekly” and “monthly” calendars, it is possible to select a time-slot (valid for
all selected days). The controller will activate the internal bit only inside the selected time-slot.
Using the parameters of the controller, the time-slot can be selected by means P.1903 and
P.1904 (for the calendar 1 or equivalent for other calendars). If those parameters are set with
the same values, the full day is selected. If the start time is lower than the end time, the time-
slot is not across midnight; otherwise, the internal bit is activated after the start time of the
selected days, and it is deactivated after the end time of the day after the selected one.

Using the AND/OR logics, it is possible to activate a digital output into selected days and time-
slot (selected using a calendar):

This is an example for the configuration of the daylight save time for Italy, using calendars 15
and 16:

• Calendar 15.

o Select “weekly” (bit 14 of P.1900 = “1”).

o Last Sunday of October:

▪ Select “October” (P.1957 = “0200”).

▪ Select “Sunday”, “Last” (P.1958 = “00010010”).

o The activation should happen at 02:00:

▪ Select “2:00” as start time (P.1959).

▪ Select “2:01” as end time (P.1960).

• Calendar 16.

o Select “weekly” (bit 15 of P.1900 = “1”).

o Last Sunday of March:

▪ Select “March” (P.1961 = “0004”).

▪ Select “Sunday”, “Last” (P.1962 = “00010010”).

o The activation should happen at 03:00:

▪ Select “3:00” as start time (P.1963).

▪ Select “3:01” as end time (P.1964).

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 195

 9.2.6 Configurable timers
The controller provides 4 generic timers fully configurable, that can be used inside the AND/OR
logics to create complex sequential logics. Each timer, in fact, activates/deactivates an internal
bit that can be used by the AND/OR logics.

The four timers are identical.

For each timer it is possible to select (by means an AND/OR logic) an “activation condition”
that starts the timer. In the same way, it is possible (but not mandatory) to select (by means
an AND/OR logic) a “reset condition” that resets the timer. When the “reset condition” is true,
the internal bit of the timer is forced to “0”.

Moreover, each timer provides the following five parameters (the list refers to the timer 1):

• P.2901: function of the timer 1.

• P.2902: Activation delay format for the timer 1.

• P.2903: Activation delay for the timer 1.

• P.2904: Deactivation delay format for the timer 1.

• P.2905: Deactivation delay for the timer 1.

196 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 In addition to the function, two delays are configurable for any timer; for each of them it is
possible to select the time base (“0 – Seconds”, “1 – Minutes”, “2 – Hours”) and the delay
value.

Each timer can work in four different modes, selectable by means parameter P.2901 (for the
timer 1 or equivalent for the other timers):

• 0 – Not used. In this case the internal bit related to the timer is always reset.

• 1 – Delay.

o The internal bit is reset while the “reset condition” is true.

o The internal bit is set with the delay P.2902 – P.2903 from when the “activation
condition” becomes true.

o The internal bit is reset with the delay P.2904 – P.2905 from when the
“activation condition” becomes false.

• 2 – Pulse.

o The internal bit is reset while the “reset condition” is true.

o The internal bit is set for the time configured with P.2902 – P.2903 each time
the “activation condition” changes from false to true.

o The internal bit is set for the time configured with P.2904 – P.2905 each time
the “activation condition” changes from true to false.

• 3 – Free run

o The internal bit is reset while the “reset condition” is true.

o The internal bit is reset while the “activation condition” is false.

o While the “activation condition” is true, the internal bit is managed as a square
wave: it is set for the time configured with P.2902 – P.2903, then it is reset for
the time configured with P.2904 – P.2905, and so on.

• 4 – Set/Reset

o The internal bit is reset while the “reset condition” is true.

o The internal bit is set if the “activation condition” is true and the “reset
condition” is false.

o The internal bit keeps its previous status if the “activation condition” is false
and the “reset condition” is false.

The following example manages a digital output related to the internal bit of the timer 1:

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 197

 9.3
The controller manages internally the following counters:

• Working time with MGCB closed (hours) counter (resettable to zero)

• Working time with MGCB closed (hours) counter (total)

• Active energy counter (kWh) exported by the generators (resettable to zero).

• Active energy counter (kWh) exported by the generators (total).

• Reactive energy counter (kvarh) exported by the generators (resettable to zero).

• Reactive energy counter (kvarh) exported by the generators (total).

• Active energy counter (kWh) imported by the generators (resettable to zero).

• Active energy counter (kWh) imported by the generators (total).

• Reactive energy counter (kvarh) imported by the generators (resettable to zero).

• Reactive energy counter (kvarh) imported by the generators (total).

• Active energy counter (kWh) exported on the mains (resettable to zero).

• Active energy counter (kWh) exported on the mains (total).

• Reactive energy counter (kvarh) exported on the mains (resettable to zero).

• Reactive energy counter (kvarh) exported on the mains (total).

• Active energy counter (kWh) imported from the mains (resettable to zero).

• Active energy counter (kWh) imported from the mains (total).

• Reactive energy counter (kvarh) imported from the mains (resettable to zero).

• Reactive energy counter (kvarh) imported from the mains (total).

• Controller total power supply time (hours) counter

Almost all these counters and meters are displayed on the controller's front panel. However,
all can be read via the serial port (with the ModBus protocol). Some of these counters can be
reset by the operator following a proper procedure, or via the serial port (they are marked in
the list with “resettable to zero”). All these counters are saved in a non-volatile memory;
therefore, they store their values also when the controller is powered off. Since non-volatile
memories “consume” themselves writing in them, it is necessary to reduce at the minimum the
number of writings. For this reason, a counter is not immediately saved as its value changes,
and it is then important to know when values are saved and how to be sure that they are saved
before removing supply from the board.

Counters are saved (all together and in the same time) in the following conditions:

 Each time the working hours counter (with MGCB closed) is increased (both total and
partial, also if the gensets have been started for instance six times for ten minutes
each time).

 Each time the operating mode is switched to OFF_RESET.

198 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

  Each time a “parallel to the pains” protection trips.

 For each hour of working of the controller.

Furthermore, counters are saved when they are reset to zero (individually or globally) via front
panel or serial port. Note that some counters have a decimal part (for example the minutes-
counters associated to hours-counters), which is also saved in a non-volatile memory.
Powering off the controller in an uncontrolled way can cause the loss of the decimal part. You
will need to switch the key to OFF-RESET to force the controller to save data, before switching
off the power.
9.3.1 Counters reset
The reset procedure is common to all counters, but it works only on some of them based on
the page shown on the multifunctional viewer. See in par.6.5.3.9.Errore. L'origine r
iferimento non è stata trovata. the description of the displayed page containing the counter
to be reset.

9.4
You can use certain properly configured digital inputs to change the configuration of the
system without changing the programming parameters. In fact, the controller manages
internally four groups of alternative parameters that can be “copied” in the operating
parameters on request (through a dedicated digital input).

Alternative configurations can be programmed only using the BoardPrg3xx.

You cannot program or modify the configurations from the controller.

The parameters present in each alternative group are the following:

 P.0101: Generators bus number of phases.

 P.0102: Generators bus nominal voltage

 P.0103: Primary of generators bus voltmeter transformers.

 P.0104: Secondary generators bus voltmeter transformers.

 P.0128: Is the neutral of the generators bus connected to the controller?

 P.0119: Mains phases number.

 P.0116: P.0116: nominal voltage.

 P.0117: Primary of mains voltmeter transformers.

 P.0118: Secondary of mains voltmeter transformers.

 P.0129: Is the neutral of the generator connected to the controller?

 P.0105: Generator nominal frequency.

 P.0124: Connection of current transformers

 P.0107: Primary of the current transformer.

 P.0139: Secondary of current transformer.

 P.0109: Transformer type for auxiliary current.

 P.0130: Auxiliary current connection.

MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN 199

  P.0108: Primary of the current transformer or toroid ratio for auxiliary power.

 P.0135: Secondary of current transformer or toroid ratio for auxiliary current

 P.0131: Auxiliary current use.

It is possible to change the configuration by means the following input digital functions:

 DIF.2151 – “Select configuration 1”. When the input becomes "active", parameters of
alternative configuration set 1 are copied in the working configuration.

 DIF.2152 – “Select configuration 2”. When the input becomes "active", parameters of
alternative configuration set 2 are copied in the working configuration.

 DIF.2153 – “Select configuration 3”. When the input becomes "active", parameters of
alternative configuration set 3 are copied in the working configuration.

 DIF.2154 – “Select configuration 4”. When the input becomes "active", parameters of
alternative configuration set 4 are copied in the working configuration.

Remark: copying an alternative set in working configuration causes the loss of the
previous loaded parameters. The only way to restore them is to save them in another
alternative configuration and recall it.

This function is usually used with multi-voltage and/or multi-frequency panel: cabling the cams
in a panel selector on the inputs of the controller it is possible to switch manually voltages and
frequency without using the parameter of the controller.

NB. The change of parameters happens only with the controller in OFF_RESET.

9.5
The controller has a non-volatile memory inside (with no need to be supplied), used to store
different information as parameters, counters or other. The memory is divided into different
zones. When the controller is powered, it performs a check on the data stored in each area: if
even just one area is incorrect, it displays an error message. This message contains a numeric
code (hexadecimal note); each bit if this code corresponds to a non-valid memory zone. A
chart follows with the zones and relative bits.
Area Versi Bit Value Description
on
1 1.00 1 0001 Coefficients for the calibration of the measuring inputs of the
controller.
2 1.00 2 0002 Different information (selected languages, lcd display contrast,
maintenance request).
3 1.00 3 0004 Counters
4 1.00 4 0008 History log of the maximum peaks.
5 1.00 5 0010 Parameters alternative configurations.
6 1.00 6 0020 Parameter:
7 1.00 7 0040 Parameters in text form (E.g. Configurable messages connected
to inputs)

If for example the value between brackets was “0004”, this means that the only counter zone
is not valid. If the value was “0041”, this means that the parameters zones (0040) and the
calibration zones (0001) are not valid.

If a zone is not valid, the normal operation sequences are not performed until when the
operator does not press ACK/ENTER + ESC/SHIFT: it is, in effect, necessary that the situation
is clear also because it might cause malfunctions (e.g. If the non-valid zone was the one of
the parameters). Only when the operator presses ACK/ENTER + ESC/SHIFT, the controller
recharges the default data for the data stored in non-valid zones: this means that if you turn
off the controller without pressing ACK/ENTER + ESC/SHIFT, in a subsequent start there will
be a signalling of not valid memory.

200 MC400 Technical Manual EAAM0608EN

 This document is owned by SICES s.r.l..
All rights reserved. SICES s.r.l. reserves the right to modify this document without prior notice.
SICES has made any effort to ensure that the information herein provide are correct; in any case
SICES does not assume any liability for the use these information.
The disclosure by any means of this document to third parties is not allowed.

S.I.C.E.S. SRL
Società Italiana Costruzioni Elettriche Sumirago

Via Molinello 8B
21040 - Jerago con Orago (VA) ITALY

T +39 0331 212941

F +39 0331 216102

www.sices.eu
[email protected]

SSSTTTTTGHTY
1